^1 


GIFT  OF 


StftrvJ.  n^-r^^' 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


I 


http://www.archive.org/details/ceasarproseOOpearrich 


LATIN 


PROSE  COMPOSITION 


BASED   ON    CAESAR 


BY 
HENRY   CARR   PEARSON,   A.B,   Harvard 

HORACE  MANN   SCHOOL,  TEACHERS  COLLEGE,   NEW   YORK 


r    »      o    e    r 


^>K< 


NEW  YORK.:. CINCINNATI.:. CHICAGO 

AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


Copyright,  1903  and  1908,  by 
HENRY  CARR  PEARSON. 

Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall,  London. 


PEAjiSON.      latin  prose. 
W.  p.     2 


PREFACE 

This  book  has  been  prepared  in  response  to  the  numer- 
ous requests  I  have  received  from  those  teachers  who  are 
using  my  Greek  Prose  Composition.  It  is  an  attempt 
(i)  to  combine  a  thorough  and  systematic  study  of  the 
essentials  of  Latin  syntax  with  abundant  practice  in  trans- 
lating English  into  Latin  ;  and  (2)  to  afford  constant  prac- 
tice in  writing  Latin  at  sight. 

Part  I  contains,  in  graded  lessons,  the  principal  points 
of  Latin  syntax,  the  unusual  and  non-essential  being  pur- 
posely omitted.  These  lessons  are  designed  for  use  at 
the  beginning  of  the  second  year's  study  of  Latin,  thereby 
serving  as  a  partial  review  of  the  first  year's  work  and  as 
an  introduction  to  the  composition  work  in  connection 
with  the  prose  authors  read  subsequently. 

Part  II  contains  short,  simple  English  sentences  based 
on  Books  I-IV  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  In  Books  I  and 
II  short,  model  sentences  and  phrases  are  selected  from 
the  Latin  text,  so  as  to  direct  the  student's  attention  more 
forcibly  to  the  actual  Latin  usages. 

At  intervals  in  Parts  I  and  II  review  lessons  are  intro- 
duced, containing  each  a  list  of  the  important  words  and 
an  enumeration  of  the  principal  constructions  used  in  the 
preceding  sections.  The  instructor  is  urged  to  form  origi- 
nal sentences  for  his  class  to  translate  at  sight  into  Latin 
based  upon  these  words  and  constructions.     While,  strictly 

3 

459825 


4  PREFACE 

speaking,  this  is  not  sight  work,  yet  it  enables  the  student 
to  make  definite  preparation  for  this  kind  of  work,  and 
gives  him  valuable  practice  in  the  offhand  use  of  words 
and  principles  of  grammar. 

I  take  this  occasion  to  thank  Albert  I.  Oliver,  Instructor 
in  Latin,  Kent's  Hill  Seminary,  Maine,  and  W.  S.  Burrage, 
Ph.D.,  of  Cambridge,  Massachusetts,  for  reading  the  manu- 
script of  Part  I.  I  am  especially  indebted  to  Miss  Emeline 
B.  Bartlett,  formerly  of  the  Allegheny  Preparatory  School, 
for  the  valuable  criticism  and  assistance  that  she  has  given 
me  throughout  the  preparation  of  this  book. 

HENRY   CARR   PEARSON. 


H  =  Harkness'  Complete  Latin  Grammar,  references  to  Harkness'  Standard 
Grammar  being  inclosed  in  parentheses.  L.M.  =  Lane-Morgan.  A.  = 
Allen  and  Greenough's  Nevr  Latin  Grammar,  references  to  the  preceding 
edition  in  parentheses.     G.  =  Gildersleeve.     B.  =  Bennett, 


CONTENTS 


PART  I 

LKSSON  FAGK 

1 .  Agreement  of  Nouns,  Adjectives,  Verbs        .        .        •        .  7 

2.  The  Accusative  Case 10 

3.  The  Genitive  Case        ....••••  12 

4.  The  Dative  Case 16 

5.  The  Ablative  Case 19 

6.  Review  and  Sight  Practice 24 

7.  Pronouns  :  Demonstrative,  Personal,  Reflexive,  Possessive    .  25 

8.  Pronouns  {continued^  :  Relative,  Indefinite,  Correlatives       .  30 

9.  Questions'.  Answers:  Connectives 35 

10.  The  Participle :  Its  Uses  and  Tenses 39 

11.  Gerund  and   Gerundive.      The   Periphrastic  Conjugations. 

Supine 44 

12.  Review  and  Sight  Practice 47 

13.  Tenses  of  Indicative,  Subjunctive,  and  Infinitive.     Delibera- 

tive Subjunctive.     How  to  express  "  Ought,"  "  Must "     .  49 

14.  Commands,  Exhortations,  Prohibitions.      How   to   express 

"  May,"  "  Can,"  "  Might,"  etc 53 

15.  Conditions  and  Wishes          ..o         ....  56 

16.  Sequence   of  Tenses.      Indirect   Questions.      Construction 

after  Verbs  of  Fearing  and  Doubting      ....  60 

17.  Review  and  Sight  Practice 64 

18.  Subjunctive  of  Purpose  and  Result.     Object  Clauses     .         .  65 

19.  Construction  after  Verbs  of  Hindering  and  Refusing.     Tem- 

poral Clauses .69 

20.  Indirect  Discourse.     Simple  Sentences          ....  73 

21.  Indirect  Discourse.     Complex  Sentences       ....  78 

22.  Concession.     Proviso.     Cause.     Characteristic.     Review  of 

Relative  Clauses 82 

23.  Review  and  Sight  Practice 86 

5 


6  CONTENTS 

PART  II 

PAGE 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  I 87 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  II 118 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  III 146 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  IV 159 

English-Latin  Vocabulary 239 

Grammatical  Index 255 


PART  I 

LESSON    I 

AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES,  VERBS 

1.  Apposition.  —  A  noun  in  apposition  with  another  noun 
agrees  with  it  in  case^  and,  when  it  is  possible,  in  gender  and 
number. 

Servius  rex,  Servius  the  king. 

quattuor   hie   primum  omen   equos  vidi,  here  I  saw  four 
horses y  the  first  omen. 

2.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  a  possessive  pronoun  or 
adjective  may  be  in  the  gemtwe,  because  the  possessive 
impUes  a  genitive. 

nomen  meum  absentis,  mf  name  in  my  absence  (i.e.  the 
name  of  me  absent). 

3.  A  noun  in  apposition  is  often  expressed  in  English 
by  a  clause  of  time,  cause,  etc. : 

litteras  Graecas  senex  didici,  /  learned  Greek  when  an  old 
man. 

4.  A  predicate  noun  is  one  connected  with  the  subject 
by  some  form  of  the  verb  sum  or  a  similar  verb  (i.e.  fid, 
become;  videor,  seem;  maneo,  remain;  creor,  be  elected; 
appellor,  be  called;  habeor,  be  heldy  regarded): 

7 


c'  8  '  LATiN^  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

c "  J  /' f      Cicero  oiBtor  fuit,  Cicero  was  an  orator. 

Numa  creatus  est  rex,  Numa  was  elected  king. 
Orestem  se  esse  dixit,  he  said  that  he  was  Orestes. 

Agreement  of  Nouns,  Sections  1-4 

[H.  393.  I,  5,  6,  8 ;  (362,  363)  ;  LM.  475  ;  A.  282-284,  302,  e ;  (184, 
185)  ;  G.  320-325  ;  B.  167-169.] 

5.  An  attributive  adjective  belonging  to  two  or  more 
nouns  regularly  agrees  with  the  nearest : 

pater  tuus  et  mater,  your  father  and  mother. 

6.  A  predicate  adjective  is  generally  plural  when  it 
modifies  two  or  more  singular  subjects ;  it  is  masculine  if 
the  subjects  are  living  beings  of  different  genders,  and 
neuter  if  the  subjects  are  things.  If  the  subjects  repre- 
sent both  living  beings  and  things,  there  is  no  fixed  rule : 

pater  sororque  occisi  sunt,  father  and  sister  were  killed. 
labor  voluptasque  inter  se  sunt  iuncta,  labor  and  delight  are 
bound  together, 

7.  Sometimes  an  adjective  or  a  participle  does  not 
agree  with  a  noun  according  to  strict  grammatical  form, 
but  according  to  the  sense  or  natural  gender  of  the  noun : 

hominum  milia  sex  perterriti,  six  thousand  me7t  were  badly 
frightened. 

Agreement  of  Adjectives,  Sections  5-7 

[H.  394,395;  (438,439);  LM.  476-481;  A.  285-287;  (186,  187); 
G.  286,  290;  B.  234,  235. J 

8.  When  a  verb  has  two  or  more  singular  subjects,  the 
verb  is  either  {a)  plural,  or  {b)  singular,  in  agreement  with 
the  nearest  subject : 


I 


AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES,  VERBS  9 

pater  et  avus  mortui  sunt,  his  father  and  grandfather  are 

dead. 
senatus  populusque  Romanus  voluit,  the  senate  and  people 

of  Rome  ordained. 

9.  A  collective  noun  commonly  takes  a  verb  in  the 
singular,  but  the  plural  is  often  used  when  individuals  are 
thought  of : 

senatus  haec  intellegit,  the  senate  is  aware  of  this. 
cum  tanta  multitude  lapides  conicerent,  when  such  a  crowd 
was  throwing  stones. 

10.  When  the  subjects  differ  in  person^  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second,  and  with  the 
second  rather  than  the  third : 

si  tu  et  TuUia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus,  if  you  and 
Tullia  are  welly  Cicero  and  I  are  well. 

Agreement  of  Verbs,  Sections  8-10 

[H.  389,  392;  (461,  463);  LM.  469-474;  A.  317;  (205);  G.  211, 
287;  B.  254,  255.] 

11.  Translate: 

1.  When  a  girl,  she  was  regarded  as  wise. 

2.  You  1  and  I  will  do  this. 

3.  A  part  of  the  soldiers  were  put  to  flight. 

4.  Your  sister  and  brother  have  come. 

5.  They  gave  it  to  Caesar,  the  consul. 

6.  The  boy  and  his  sister  were  very  brave. 

7.  I  heard  of  ^  your  bravery  when  a  youth. 

8.  Zeal  and  patience  have  been  called  virtues. 

9.  Two  thousand  men  had  been  seen  in  the  town. 
10.  A  multitude  of  soldiers  were  on  the  wall. 

^  See  example  under  10  for  order  of  pronouns.  *  ^g  ^th  ablative. 


10  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION— PART  I 

LESSON   2 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  CASE 

12.  The  direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the 
accusative : 

librum  scripsit,  he  wrote  a  book. 

13.  The  meaning  of  a  verb,  even  of  one  ordinarily  in- 
transitive, may  be  emphasized  or  more  exactly  defined  by 
adding  an  accusative  of  kindred  derivation.  This  is  called 
the  Cognate  accusative,  and  is  usually  modified  by  an 
adjective : 

tutam  vitam  vivere,  to  lead  a  secure  life. 

14.  Many  verbs  of  making,  choosing,  calling,  shaving, 
and  the  like,  may  take  two  accusatives,  —  one  of  the  per- 
son or  thing  affected,  the  other  a  predicate  accusative : 

urbem  Romam  vocavit,  he  called  the  city  Rome. 

15.  Some  verbs  of  asking,  demanding^  teaching,  and 
concealing  may  take  two  accusatives  —  one  of  the  person, 
and  one  of  the  thing : 

pacem  te  poscimus,  we  demand  peace  of  you. 

I.  Some  of  these  verbs  may  take  the  ablative  of  the 
person  with  a  preposition  instead  of  the  accusative.  So, 
generally,  peto  (ab),  seek  {from)',  postulo  (ab),  demand 
ipf)  \  quaero  (ab,  de,  ex),  ask  {of) : 

quaerit  ex  solo   ea,  he  asks  him   in  private  about  those 

things. 
pacem  a  vobis  petimus,  we  implore  peace  from  you. 


THE  ACCUSATIVE  CASE"  11 

i6.  The  accusative  is  used  to  express  the  duration  of 
time  or  the  extent  of  space  : 

fossas  quindecim  pedes  latas,  trenches  fifteen  feet  broad. 
quadraginta  annos  vixit,  he  lived  forty  years, 

I.  Emphasis  is  sometimes  given  by  using  the  preposition 
per,  as : 

Itidi  per  decern  dies,  games  for  ten  days, 

17.  Proper  names  of  towns  and  of  small  islands  or  pen- 
insulas are  put  in  the  accusative  to  denote  the  end  or  limit 
toward  which  the  motion  of  the  verb  is  directed : 

missi  legati  Athenas  sunt,  ambassadors  were  sent  to  Athens. 

1.  The  accusatives  domum  and  rus  are  used  like  proper 
names  of  towns : 

domum  reductus  est,  he  was  conducted  home, 
ego  rus  ibo,  /  shall  go  into  the  country. 

2.  Other  designations  of  place  than  those  mentioned 
above  require  a  preposition  (in  or  ad)  to  denote  the  limit 
of  motion : 

in  Italiam  venit,  he  came  into  Italy. 

legiones  ad  urbem  adducit,  he  is  leading  the  legions  to  (or 
toward^  the  city. 

3.  When  domum  is  modified  in  any  way,  except  by  a 
possessive  pronoun  or  a  genitive,  the  preposition  in  is  com- 
monly used : 

in  illam  domum,  into  that  house,   , 
domos  suas,  to  their  homes. 

18.  An  exclamation,  if  limited  by  an  adjective  or  a  geni- 
tive, may  be  expressed  by  the  accusative : 


12  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

m5  miserum,  ahy  W7'etched  me  !  or  dear^  dear  me  ! 
0  fallacem  spem,  oh,  deceptive  hope  ! 

References  for  Accusative 

[H.  403-421;  (370-381);  LM.  495-524;  A.  387^397,  423-429-, 
(237-240,  258)  ;  G.  329-343  ;  B.  172-185.] 

19.  Translate : 

1.  Caesar  asked  them  for  grain. 

2.  They  will  choose  him  consul. 

3.  Dear  me,  I  am  going  to  Rome  ! 

4.  We  will  demand  of  them  fifty  ships. 

5.  She  remained  in  the  city  for  ten  days. 

6.  They  made  a  wall  fifteen  feet  high. 

7.  He  set  out  for  his  home. 

8.  For  many  days  he  concealed  the  deed  from  his  father. 

9.  The  enemy  marched  into  Italy. 
10.  The  boy  and  his  mother  were  free. 

LESSON  3 

THE  GENITIVE  CASE 

20.  The  genitive  is  ordinarily  used  to  express  the  de- 
pendence of  one  noun  upon  another.  This  relation  is 
often,  but  not  always,  expressed  in  English  by  of  or  's  or  s' : 

Alexandri  equus,  Alexander' s  horse,  or  the  horse  of  Alexander. 

21.  If  a  noun  of  action  or  feeling  is  limited  by  another 
noun,  the  dependent  genitive  expresses  either 

I.   the  subject  of  the  action  or  feeling,  and  is  called  the 
subjective  genitive  : 

amor  patris,  the  love  of  a  father^  or  a  father^ s  love  (i.e.  the 
love  felt  by  a  father) ;  or 


( 


THE  GENITIVE  CASE    *  1 3 

2.    the  object  of  the  action  or  feeling,  called  the  objective 
genitive  : 

amor  patris,  love  for  father  (i.e.  the  love  toward  a  father). 

22.  The  genitive  is  used  to  denote  quality ^  but  only 
when  the  limiting  noun  is  modified  by  an  adjective : 

vir  summae  virtutis,  a  man  of  the  highest  courage, 

I.  If  the  noun  expressing  the  quality  is  not  modified, 
the  idea  of  quality  is  expressed  by  an  adjective  rather  than 
a  genitive.  For  example,  *'  a  man  of  courage  "  is  not  to  be 
rendered  vir  virtutis,  but  vir  fortis. 

23.  Genitive  of  the  Whole,  or  Partitive  Genitive.  —  The 
genitive  is  used  to  express  the  whole  of  which  a  part  is  taken : 

duo  milia  peditum,  two  thousand  foot  soldiers. 
minus  dubitationis,  less  hesitation. 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  common  words  followed 
by  this  construction : 


plus,  more. 
plurimum,  most, 
multum,  much. 
minus,  less. 
paulum,  little. 


nihil,  nothing. 
satis,  enough. 
parum,  not  enough. 
quod,  quid,  which,  what. 
aliquid,  something. 


I.  Numerals  and  quidam  are  generally  followed  by  ex 
or  de  and  the  ablative,  rather  than  a  partitive  genitive. 
Also  occasionally  other  words : 

unus  ex  militibus,  07te  of  the  soldiers. 

pauci  de  nostris  cadunt,  a  few  of  our  men  fall. 

24.  The  genitive  is  used  with  many  adjectives  to  limit 
the  extent  of  their  application.     Such  adjectives  are  those 


14  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

signifying  desire y  knowledge,  familiarity,  memory,  particu 
patiouy  power,  fulbiess,  and  their  opposites : 

peritus  belli  ^  skilled  in  war. 

cupidus  rerum  novarum,  eager  for  revolution. 

Some  of  the  common  adjectives  of  this  class  are : 


cupidus,  eager,  desirous. 
conscius,  conscious,  aware. 
peritus,  experienced,  skillful. 
insuetus,  unacctistomed,  inex- 
perienced. 
plenus,  full. 


memor,  mindful,  remember- 
ing. 

expers,  having  no  part^  free 
from. 

potens,  riding,  controlling. 

particeps,  sharing. 


25.  Verbs  of  remembering  2ind  forgetting — memini,  re- 
miniscor,  and  obliviscor  —  generally  take 

1.  the  genitive  when  referring  to  persons  : 

oblitus  sum  mei,  /  have  forgotten  myself. 

2.  sometimes  the  genitive,  and  sometimes  the  accusative, 

when  referring  to  things.     The  object  is  regularly 
accusative  when  it  is  a  neuter  pronoun : 

meministine  nomina,  do  you  remember  the  names  ? 
reminiscere  veteris  incommodi,  remember  the  former  disaster. 
haec  memini,  /  remember  this. 

26.  Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  condemning,  and  ac- 
quitting, take  the  genitive  to  express  the  charge : 

accusatus  est  proditionis,  he  was  charged  with  treason. 

27.  The  impersonal  verbs  paenitet,  repent ;  miseret,  pity  ; 
taedet,  be  weary ;  pudet,  be  ashamed ;  piget,  disgusts,  take 
the   accusative   to   express   the  person  affected,   and    the 


THE  GENITIVE  CASE  1 5 

genitive  to  express  the  person  or  thing  toward  whom  the 
feeling  is  directed: 

tui  me  miseret,  /  pity  you  (literally,  //  pities  me  of  you). 
eum  taedet  vitae,  he  is  tired  of  life. 

I.   misereor  also  governs  the  genitive : 

miseremini  sociorum,  pity  the  allies, 

28.  interest  and  refert,  it  interests  or  concerns  take  the 
genitive  of  the  person  concerned ;  but  in  the  case  of 
the  personal  pronoun  the  ablative  singular  feminine  of 
the  possessive  is  generally  used : 

patris  interest,  //  concerns  the  father. 

magis  rei  publicae  interest  quam  mea,  it  concerns  the  public 
welfare  more  than  me. 

29.  A  few  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity  are  put  in  the 
genitive  with  verbs  of  valuing  to  denote  the  amount  of 
estimation.     Such  genitives  are  : 

magni,    pluris,    plurimi ;    parvi,   minoris,    minimi ;    tanti, 
quanti. 

The  common  verbs  with  which  these  genitives  are  used 
are :  aestimo,  facio,  puto,  habeo,  and  sum  ; 

ea  magni  aestimantur,  those  things  are  highly  valued  (liter- 
ally, those  things  are  estimated  of  great  {value)). 

est  mihi  tanti,  it  is  worth  my  while  (literally,  it  is  of  so 
much  to  me). 

References  for  Genitives 

[H.  437-458 ;  (393-410)  ;  LM.  549-592 ;  A.  342-355»  359>  b ;  (213- 
222);  G.  360-382;  B.  194-211.] 


l6  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

30.  Translate  : 

1.  They  were  very  skillful  in  military  affairs.^ 

2.  He  forgot  his  name. 

3.  Love  for  his  country  made  him  brave. 

4.  They  asked  him  his  brother's  name. 

5.  He  was  a  man  of  great  size,  but  not  of  courage. 

6.  She  has  enough  money. 

7.  Five  of  the  soldiers  went  to  Athens. 

8.  She  pities  them. 

9.  How  valuable  is  that  book  ? 
10.   This  interests  him  very  much. 

LESSON  4 

THE  DATIVE  CASE 

31.  Indirect  Object.  —  The  dative  is  used  to  express  the 
object  that  is  indirectly  affected  by  the  action  of  the  verb : 

hanc  pecuniam  mihi  dat,  he  gives  me  this  money  (pecuniam 
is  the  direct,  and  mihi  the  indirect  object). 

I.  With  certain  verbs  that  imply  motion  it  is  often 
difficult  to  distinguish  between  the  dative  of  the  indirect 
object  and  the  accusative  of  the  limit  of  motion  (cf.  17). 
Generally  the  accusative  (with  or  without  a  preposition)  is 
used  when  the  idea  of  motion  prevails : 

litteras  quas  ad  Pompeium  scripsi,  the  letter  which  I  have 

written  {and  sent)  to  Pompey. 
mihi  litteras  mittere,  to  send  a  letter  to  me. 

32.  Most  verbs  signifying  to  favor,  help,  please,  trusty 
ind  their  contraries;  also  to  believe,  persuade ^  command, 

^res  militaris. 


THE  DATIVE  CASE  1 7 

obeyy  seruey  resist,  envy^  threaten,  pardon,  and  spare,  take 
the  dative. 

Some  of  the  more  common  of  these  verbs  are : 


persuadeo,  persuade, 
pareo,  obey, 
parco,  spare. 
impero,  order, 
resisto,  resist. 
fido,  confido,  trust, 
licet,  it  is  permitted. 


credo,  believe,  trust, 
faveo,  favor. 
placeo,  please. 
igno^co,  pardon, 
invideo,  envy. 
noceo,  harm. 
studeo,  be  eager  for. 


cur  mihi  invides,  why  do  you  envy  me  ? 
huic  imperat,  he  orders  him. 

1.  Some  verbs  apparently  of  the  same  meaning  govern 
the  accusative;  such  as  \\\}Qt^,  order ;  ^qIqqXq, please ;  iuvo, 
adiuvo,  help  ;  laedo,  injure. 

2.  If  these  verbs  are  used  in  the  passive,  the  dative  is 
retained  and  the  verbs  are  impersonal : 

nobis  persuadetur,  we  are  persuaded, 

33.  Most  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter, 
ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  and  sometimes  circum,  govern 
the  dative  case.  If  transitive,  such  verbs  may  take  an 
accusative  besides : 

consiliis  obstare,  to  oppose  plans. 

pecuniae  pudorem  anteponit,  he  puts  honor  before  money, 

34.  Dative  of  Possession.  —  The  English  verb  have  is 
often  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  dative  and  some  form  of 
sum.  The  possessor  is  expressed  by  the  dative,  and  the 
object  possessed  is  the  subject  of  sum. 

LATIN  PROSE  COMP.  — ?, 


1 8  LATIN   PROSE  COiMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

.  The  English  sentence,  "  The  master  has  a  book,"  may 
be  expressed  in  either  of  the  following  ways: 

1.  magistro  est  liber. 

2.  magister  habet  librum. 

35.    The  dative  is  used  with  many  adjectives  of  fitness, 
nearnesSy  likeness^  sendee,  inclination^  and  their  opposites. 

Some  of  the  more  common  adjectives  are : 


similis,  like. 
dissimilis,  unlike. 
adversus,  opposite. 
iniquus,  not  equal  to. 
proximus,  next  to. 
utilis,  useful  to. 
idoneus,  suitable  for. 


aptus,  suitable  for, 
par,  equal  to. 
aequus,  equal  to. 
amicus,  friendly. 
carus,  dear. 
familiaris,  friendly  to. 
alienus,    unfavorable^   for- 
eign. 

castris  idoneum  locum,  a  place  suitable  for  a  camp. 
filius  patri  similis,  a  son  like  his  father. 

I.  Similis  and  a  few  others  also  sometimes  govern  the 
genitive  (cf .  24). 

36.  Dative  of  Reference.  —  The  dative  is  used  to  denote 
the  person  to  whom  the  thought  of  the  sentence  is  of 
special  interest.  This  dative  is  translated  into  EngUsh 
in  a  variety  of  ways : 

laudavit  mihi  fratrem,  he  praised  my  brother,  (mihi 
shows  that  it  was  out  of  regard  for  me,  while  meum 
would  imply  no  such  motive.) 

nobis  divites  esse  volumus,  we  wish  to  be  rich  for  ourselves. 

37.  Dative  of  Purpose  or  End.  —  The  dative  is  often 
used  to  denote  the  purpose,  use,  or  result  of  a  tljing,  often 


THE  ABLATIVE  CASE  I9 

with  another  dative  of  the  person  for  whom.    This  con- 
struction is  most  common  with  the  verb  sum: 

magno  usui  nostris  fuit,  it  was  a  great  help  to  our  men 
(literally,  //  was  for  a  great  help  to  our  men). 

tertiam  aciem  nostris  subsidio  misit,  he  sent  the  third  line 
as  a  relief  to  our  men. 

The  datives  most  frequently  used  are:  usui,  subsidio, 
praesidio,  auxilio,  curae,  muneri,  odio,  bono,  impedimento. 

References  for  Datives 
[H.  422-436;  (382-392);   LM.  525-548;  A.  361-385;  (224-236)5 
G.  344-359;  B.  186-193.] 

38.  Translate : 

1.  You  and  your  sister  gave  him  this. 

2.  The  soldiers  obey  the  general. 

3.  He  wrote  a  letter  to  his  mother. 

4.  Caesar  was  persuaded. 

5.  The  wall  will  be  a  great  hindrance  to  the  enemy. 

6.  He  put^  an  officer  in  charge  of  the  legion. 

7.  The  farmer  had^  fertile  fields. 

8.  There  was  a  hill  opposite  the  town. 

9.  My  ^  brother  went  to  Corinth. 

10.   He  took  the  lead  of  all  his  friends. 

LESSON   5 

THE  ABLATIVE  CASE 

39.  Verbs  indicating  separation  or  privation  take  an 
ablative  to  denote  the  thing  from  which  the  separation 
takes  place.     A  preposition,  ab  or  ex,  is  often  used  with 

*  Put  in  charge  of=  praeficio.  ^  Do  not  use  the  verb  habeo. 

•  Do  not  use  meus;  express  the  idea  in  another  way. 


20  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

these  verbs,  and   regularly  when   the  ablative   denotes  a 
person : 

magno  me  metu  liber  abis,  you  will  free  me  from  great  fear, 
secernantur  a  nobis,  let  them  be  separated  from  us. 
auxilio  eget,  he  needs  help. 
de  provincia  decedere,  to  withdraw  from  one  s  province. 

40.  The  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition,  de,  ex, 
or  ab,  is  used  to  denote  the  source  from  which  a  thing  is 
derived,  or  the  material  of  which  it  consists. 

Source  —  amplissimo  genera  natus,  born  of  an  influential 
family. 

Material  (ex  is  regularly  used)  —  pocula  ex  auro,  cups 
of  gold.  An  adjective  could  also  be  used,  as  pocula  aurea. 
Also  a  genitive  of  material,  pocula  auri. 

41.  The  ablative  with  a  or  ab  is  used  with  passive  verbs 
to  denote  tho,  personal  agent ; 

ab  his  fit  initium,  a  beginning  is  made  by  them. 

42.  An  ablative  may  be  used  with  a  comparative  instead 
of  quam,  than^  and  a  nominative  or  accusative : 

patria  mihi  vita  carior  est,  my  country  is  dearer  to  me  than 
life  (quam  vita  could  be  used  instead  of  vita). 

tui  studiosior  sum  quam  illius,  /  am  fonder  of  you  than  of 
him  (here  the  ablative  could  not  be  used). 

43.  The  ablative  may  denote  the  cause,  means,  or  instru- 
ment : 

f  ortuna  amici  gaudeO,  /  rejoice  at  the  good  fortune  of  my 

friend  (i.e.  on  account  of,  etc.). 
lacte  atque  pecore  vivunt,  they  live  upon  milk  and  flesh 

(Lc.  by  means  of  milk  and  flesJi). 


THE  ABLATIVE  CASE  21 

I.  The  ablative  of  the  agent  (which  requires  a  or  ab) 
must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  ablative  of  means 
or  instrument,  which  uses  no  preposition.     See  41. 

44.  The  deponent  verbs  utor,  use  ;  fruor,  enjoy  ;  f ungor, 
perform;  potior,  get  possession  of;  vescor,  eat;  and  their 
compounds,  govern  the  ablative : 

vita  fruitur,  he  enjoys  life. 

45.  The  ablative,  with  or  without  cum,  may  be  used  to 
express  the  manner  of  an  action.  If  the  noun  is  modified 
by  an  adjective,  cum  is  often*  omitted,  otherwise  cum  is 
regularly  used. 

Allobroges  magna  cum  cura  suos  finis  tuentur,  the  Allobroges 
guard  their  own  territory  with  great  care.  (Note  the  posi- 
tion of  cum ;  magna  cura  would  also  mean  with  great  care ^) 

cum  celeritate  venit,  he  came  with  speed  {speedily). 

I.  Some  nouns  that  are  unmodified  express  manner 
without  cum: 

iure,  rightly. 

iniuria,  wrongly. 

Vi,  by  force,  forcibly. 

consilio,  on  purpose. 

casu,  by  chance. 

consuetiidine,  more,  according  to  custom. 

46.  To  denote  acco7npaniment,  the  ablative  is  used  with 
cum.  But  cum  is  often  omitted  in  military  expressions 
where  an  adjective  is  used : 

cum  comitatibus  profectus  est,  he  set  out  with  his  attendants. 


22  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

47.  Ablative  of  Specification.  —  The  ablative  is  used  with 
nouns,  verbs,  and  adjectives  to  show  that  in  respect  to  which 
the  statement  applies : 

reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  they  excel  the  rest  of  the 

Gauls  in  courage. 
claudus  pede,  lame  in  his  foot» 

1.  Note  the  phrases: 

minor  natii,  j/ounger  (literally,  less  in  respect  to  age  or  birth), 
maior  natu,  older, 

2.  On  this  principle  the  adjectives  dignus  and  indignus 
govern  the  ablative  :  ' 

digni  honore,  worthy  of  honor, 

48.  Ablative  of  Degree  of  Difference.  —  With  words  ex- 
pressing comparison  the  ablative  is  used  to  denote  the 
amount  or  degree  of  difference  between  the  objects. 
Especially  common  are  the  ablatives  paulo,  little ;  multo, 
much;  tanto,  quanto,  hoc,  quo. 

tribus  pedibus  altior,  three  feet  higher  (literally,  higher  by 

three  feet). 
multo  me  vigilare  acrius,  that  I  watch  much  more  sharply 

(literally,  more  sharply  by  much). 

49.  Ablative  of  Quality.  —  The  ablative,  modified  by  an 
adjective  or  genitive,  is  used  to  denote  quality : 

summa  virtiite  adulescens,  a  youth  of  the  highest  worth. 

I.  The  genitive  case  likewise  may  describe  a  noun,  or 
express  quality.     See  22. 

50.  The  Ablative  of  Price.  —  The  definite  price  of  a  thing 
is  expressed  by  the  ablative : 


I 


THE  ABLATIVE  CASE  23 

eervum  quinque  minis  emit,  he  bought  the  slave  for  five 
minae. 
I.    For  the  genitive  of  indefinite  price,  see  29. 

51.  Ablative  of  Time.  —  The  ablative  is  used  to  express 

1.  Time  when  an  action  takes  place : 

postero  die  movet  castra,  on  the  next  day  he  moves  his  camp, 

2.  Time   within   which   an   action   takes   place.      The 
preposition  in  is  sometimes  used  : 

his  paucis  diebus,  within  these  few  days. 
I.    For  the  accusative  of  the  duration  of  tinie^  see  16. 

52.  The  ablative  absolute  is  explained  in  the  lesson  on 
the  participle.     See  89. 

References  for  Ablative 

[H.  459-487;    (411-429);    LM.  596-655;    A.  398-420,  423,  426; 
(242-253)  ;  G.  384-408;  B.  213-226.] 

53.  Translate  : 

1.  Rome  was  much  larger  than  Corinth. 

2.  For  five  days  they  refrained  from  battle. 

3.  She  was  born  of  a  German  family. 

4.  It  is  very  important  ^  for  me  to  remember  this. 

5.  He  performed  his  task  very  carefully. 

6.  On  the  third  day,  through  the  bravery  of  his  troops, 

Caesar  got  possession  of  the  town. 

7.  This  river  is  two  feet  wider  than  that  one.^ 

8.  Aspasia  was  famous  for  her  wisdom. 

9.  Our  ancestors  were  men  of  great  ability. 

10.    He  was  slain  by  a  sword  by  one  of  the  soldiers. 

1  See  29.  2  Omit. 


24 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


LESSON  6 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE 

54.  Review  the  principles  of  syntax  in  sections  1-5 1. 

55.  Learn   thoroughly  the   meanings  of  the  following 
words : 


I.  facio. 

25. 

peto. 

2.  fugo.i 

26. 

rus. 

3.  soror. 

27. 

mitto. 

4.  frater. 

28. 

postulo. 

5.  habeo. 

29. 

murus. 

6.  miles. 

30. 

maneo. 

7.  do. 

31. 

proficiscor. 

8.  studium. 

32. 

satis. 

9.  video. 

33. 

parum. 

10.  opus. 

34. 

miseret. 

II.  celo. 

35- 

pudet. 

12.  fr amentum. 

36. 

persuaded. 

13.  peritus. 

37. 

credo. 

14.  cupidus. 

38. 

impero. 

15.  memini.2 

39. 

delecto. 

16.  reminiscor. 

40. 

libero. 

17.  obliviscor. 

41. 

egeo. 

18.  similis. 

42. 

fungor. 

19.  praesidium. 

43. 

potior. 

20.  usus. 

44. 

finis. 

21.  mille.^ 

45. 

adulescens 

22.  creo. 

46. 

nascor. 

23.  posco. 

47. 

clarus. 

24.  quaero. 

48. 

nanciscor. 

1  Do  not  confuse  this  with  fugi5. 

*  Perfect  in  form,  but  present  in  meaning. 


8  Look  up  its  declension. 


PRONOUNS  25 

56.  Memorize  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  in  55. 

57.  Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  English  from  the  words  in  55,  illustrating  the  gram- 
matical principles  of  1-5 1.  These  sentences  may  be  given 
for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 

LESSON   7 

PRONOUNS:   DEMONSTRATIVE,   PERSONAL,   REFLEXIVE, 
POSSESSIVE 

58.  Demonstrative  pronouns  point  out  what  object  is 
referred  to,  and  show  whether  it  is  here  or  there. 

They  are : 

1.  hie,  this  (i.e.  the  object  that  is  near  where  I  am), 

2.  iste,  that  {that  near  you ). 

3.  ille,  that  {that  yonder^  over  there ,  not  near  the  speaker), 

59.  Hie  is,  therefore,  called  the  demonstrative  of  the 
first  person.     It  is  used  as  follows  : 

1.  To  point  out  the  object  that  is  near  the  speaker  (in 
time,  place,  thought,  or  on  the  written  page). 

2.  To  refer  to  the  present  as  contrasted  with  the  past: 

haec  tempora,  modern  times ^  present  times, 

3.  To  refer  to  what  follows  : 

eius  belli  haec  fuit  causa,  the  cause  of  this  war  was  as 
follozvs. 

4.  Sometimes  to  refer  to  what  precedes  : 

his  Caesar  ita  respondit,  to  them  (the  persons  just  men- 
tioned) Caesar  thus  replied. 

5.  In  reference  to  two  objects  previously  mentioned, 
hie  generally  refers  to  the  latter  one,  and  is  translated, 


26  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

the  latter.     lUe  refers  to  the  former,  and  is  translated 

the  former. 

[H.  505-507;  (450);   LM.  1049-1055;  A.  296,  297;  (102,  a,  b); 
G.  305-307;  B.246.]i 

60.  Iste  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  per- 
son.    It  often  implies  contempt,  as : 

iste  Manlius,  that  (fellow)  Manlius  of  yours. 

[H.  507,  3 ;  (450)  ;  LM.  1053 ;  A.  297,  a,  b,  e,  f ;  (102,  c)  ;  G.  306; 
B.  246, 4-] 

61.  lUe  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  third  per- 
son.    It  is  often  translated : 

I.    The  former  [see  59,  5]. 

3.    That  well-known,  that  notorious,  that  famous,  etc. 

Magnus  ille  Alexander,  that  famous  Alexander  the  Great. 

(Note  the  position  of  ille.) 

62.  Learn  the  following  adverbs  of  place : 


Place  Where 
hie,  here. 
istic,  there. 
illic,  there. 


Place  to  Which 
hue,  hither. 
istue,  thither. 
illue,  thither. 


Place  from  Which 
hine,  hence. 
istine,  thence. 
'  illine,  thence. 


63.   The  determinative  pronoun  is,  ea,  id,  that,  is  not  as 
strong  as  ille.     It  is  used 

I.    As  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  meaning  he,  she,  it, 
they,  when  one  needs  to  be  expressed.     See  64. 
As  an  antecedent  of  the  relative,  is  qui,  he,  who,  etc. 

*  Grammatical  reference  will  now  be  given,  as  far  as  is  possible,  after  each 
section. 


PRONOUNS  27 

2.  The  English  expression  "that  of  *'  is  not  expressed  by 

is  and  a  genitive,  but  by  a  genitive  alone  or  by  the 
repetition  of  the  noun  to  which  "  that "  refers  : 

in  exercitu  Sullae  et  postea  in  Crassi  fuerat,  he  had  been  in 
the  army  of  Siilla^  and  afterwards  in  that  of  Crassus, 

3.  Is  has  often  the  force  of  talis,  such: 

non  sum  is  qui  terrear,  /  am  not  such  a  person  as  to  be 
frightened. 
[H.  508;   (451);   LM.  1056-1058;  A.  297,  b,  d,  e,  f;  (102,  d)  ;  G. 
308;  B.247.] 

64.  The  personal  pronouns  ego,  /;  tu,  you ;  is,  ea,  id, 

he^  she,  it,  are  used  as  subjects  only  to  show  emphasis  or 
avoid  ambiguity ;  te  voco,  I'm  calling  you ;  but  ego  te  voco, 
/(emphatic)^///  calling  you  (such,  emphasis  might  be  ex- 
pressed in  English  by  the  translation,  "  It  is  I  who  am 
calling  you  "). 

1.  The  genitive  forms  mei,  tui,  sui,  vestri,  nostri,  are 
chiefly  used  as  objective  genitives.  See  21,  2.  The  geni- 
tive plural  forms  in  -um  (nostrum,  vestrum)  are  generally 
used  as  partitive  genitives: 

desiderium  vestri,  longing  for  you, 
nemo  vestrum,  no  one  of  you. 

2.  Never  express  my,  your,  our,  etc.,  by  the  genitive 
of  the  pronoun.  Use  the  proper  possessive  adjective. 
See  6^]. 

[H.  5CX) ;  (446,  N.  3) ;  LM.  456, 1041 ;  A.  295  ;  (194) ;  G.  304 ;  B.  242.] 

65.  A  reflexive  pronoun  refers  to  the  subject  of  the 
sentence.     There  are  two  uses. 

I.  It  may  refer  to  the  subject  of  the  clause  in  which  it 
stands  (direct  reflexive) : 

se  videt,  he  sees  himself. 


28  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

2.  It  may  be  used  in  a  subordinate  clause  and  refer^ 
not  to  the  subject  of  its  own  clause,  but  to  the  subject  of 
the  principal  clause  (indirect  reflexive) : 

cum  intellegeret  sibi  bellum  gerendum,  when  he  perceived 
that  he  must  wage  war.  (Sibi  refers  to  the  subject  of 
intellegeret.) 

66.  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  per- 
son are  also  used  as  reflexives.  But  there  is  a  special 
reflexive  for  the  third  person  : 

sui,  etc.,  himself i  herself ,  itself;  (plural)  themselves. 

[H.  174,  502;  (448,  449);  LM.  1042-1046;  A.  299-301;  (196)5 
G.  309,  520,  521 ;  B.  244.] 

67.  The  possessive  pronouns  are : 

meus,  my^  mine-,  noster,  our,  ours ;  tuus,  your,  yours ; 
vester,  your^  yours  (plural);  suus,  his^  hers,  its,  their,  theirs 
(reflexive). 

Note  the  following : 

1.  They  are  all  decHned  like  adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  declension,  and  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case 
with  the  noun  to  which  they  belongs  and  not  with  the  noun 
to  which  they  refer: 

suam  matrem  occidit,  he  slew  his  own  mother, 

2.  They  are  generally  not  expressed  in  Latin,  except 
for  the  purpose  of  clearness : 

video  pattern,  /  see  my  father,     (To  express  /  see  your 
father  it  would  be  necessary  to  use  video  tuum  pattern.) 

3.  The  possessive  pronouns  of  the  third  person  in 
English,  his,  hers,  its,  their,  may  refer  either  to  the  subject 
of  the  verb  (j.e.  be  reflexive),  or  refer  to  some  other  person 


PRONOUNS 


29 


than   the  subject.     When  reflexive,  suus  must  be  used, 

otherwise  use  the  genitive  of  is : 

laudavit  suum  fratrem,  he  praised  his  brother,  (eius  fratrem 
would  mean  his  brother,  but  some  one  else's  brother.) 
[H.  176,  501,  502,  503,  I ;  (447,449»  i-  0  ;  LM.  271,  1048;  A.  299, 

302 ;   (196,  h,  197)  ;  G.  309,  312 ;  B.  243,  86.] 

68.  Reciprocal  Pronouns.  —  The  Latin  has  no  special 
reciprocal  pronoun  {each  other,  one  another).  The  recipro- 
cal idea  is  expressed  by  the  phrases  inter  nos,  inter  vos, 
inter  se.     See  73,  2. 

obsides  inter  se  dederunt,  they  gave  one  another  hostages 
(literally,  they  gave  hostages  among  themselves). 

[H.  502, 1 ;  (448,  N.)  ;  LM.  1047 ;  A.  301,  f,  145,  c ;  (196,  f)  ;  G.  221 ; 
B.  245.] 

69.  Summary  of  personal,  reflexive,  and  possessive  pro- 
nouns : 


Personal 

Reflexive 

Possessive 

First 
Person 

ego 

meii 

meus,  -a,  -um,  my,  mine, 
noster,  nostra,  nostrum, 

our,  ours. 

Second 
Person 

tu 

tuii 

tuus,  -a,  'Mm,  your,  yours 

(sing.), 
vester,  vestra,  vestrum, 

your,  yours  (pi.). 

Third 
Person 

is,  ea,id 

sul^ 

suus,  -a,  -um,  his,  his 
own,  hers,  her  own, 
etc.  (reflexive). 

When  not  reflexive,  use 
genitive  of  is,  ea,  id. 

*  W^hy  is  there  no  nominative  form  for  reflexives  ? 


30  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   * 

70,  Translate: 

1.  You  have  convinced  yourselves. 

2.  He  praised  his  own  friends,  but  blamed  his. 

3.  I  am  the  one^  that  is  doing  this. 

4.  We  love  each  other. 

5.  They  saw  her  mother  on  the  street. 

6.  The  former  is  his  friend,  the  latter  my  enemy. 

7.  She  said  that  ^  they  would  obey  her. 

8.  Many  of  us  will  be  freed  from  fear. 

9.  He  sold  her  house  and  that  of  his  brother. 
10.  The  following  are  my  reasons. 

LESSON   8 

PRONOUNS   (CoNTiNUED>     CORRELATIVES 

71.  Relative  Pronouns.  —  The  relative  pronoun  qui,  quae, 
quod,  who^  which,  that,  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender 
and  number,  but  its  case  depends  upon  the  construction  of 
the  clause  in  which  it  stands : 

pecunia  quam  habeo,  the  money  that  I  have.  (Here  quam  is 
accusative  because  it  is  the  direct  object  of  habeo.) 

gladius  quo  pugnabat,  the  sword  with  which  he  fought.  (Here 
quo  is  ablative  because  it  expresses  the  instrument.) 

1.  The  relative  generally  agrees  in  gender  and  number 
with  a  predicate  noun  of  its  own  clause,  rather  than  with 
an  antecedent  of  different  gender  and  number : 

Celtae,  quae  est  tertia  pars,  the  Celts,  zvho  are  the  third  part. 

2.  Sometimes  the  relative  takes  its  gender  and  number 
from  the  real  meaning  of  its  antecedent,  rather  than  its 
actual  form : 

*  See  64.        2  (fidt  .  .  .  ob^  :  use  accusative  and  future  infinitive. 


PRONOUNS.    CORRELATIVES  3 1 

nostra  qui  adsumus  salus,  the  safety  of  iis  who  are  present, 
(Here  qui  agrees  with  nostrum  implied  in  nostra.) 

3.  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  is  sometimes  omitted, 
especially  if  it  is  indefinite : 

sunt  qui,  etc.,  there  are  men  who, 

4.  In  English  the  relative  is  sometimes  omitted,  but 
never  vsi  Latin.  Thus,  tJie  book  I  have  mvis,t  be  expressed 
in  Latin  liber  quern  habeo. 

5.  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  is  often  incorporated 
in  the  relative  clause  : 

urbem  quam  statuo  vestra  est,  the  city  which  I  am  building 
is  yours  (literally,  what  city  I  am  building  is  yours). 

6.  A  relative  is  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  or 
clause,  where  in  EngHsh  a  demonstrative  or  personal  pro- 
noun would  be  used : 

quae  cum  ita  sint,  since  these  things  are  so, 
quo  factum  Qst,from  this  it  resulted. 

7.  A  relative  clause  in  Latin  is  often  used  when  the 
corresponding  construction  is  not  employed  in  English : 

the  bystanders,  qui  adsunt  (literally,  those  who  are preseitt). 
the  standard  bearer,  qui  aquilam  ferebat  (literally,  he  who 

carried  the  eagle), 
the  existing  laws,  leges  quae  nunc  sunt  (literally,  the  laws 

which  now  exist  [^are']). 
the  plaintiff,  ille  qui  petit  (literally,  he  who  sues). 

[H.  396,  510;  (445)  ;  LM.  820-827;  A.  304-308;  (198,  199,  201); 
G.  610-616;  B.  250,  251.] 

72.  Indefinite  pronouns  are  used  to  indicate  that  some 
person  or  thing  is  referred  to,  without  indicatingy/^i-/  what 


32  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

one.  They  vary  in  degree  of  indefiniteness.  Quis  is  the 
least  definite,  and  quidam  the  most  definite.  The  mean- 
ings of  the  following  indefinite  pronouns  should  be  thor- 
oughly learned : 

quis  (generally  used  only  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  num),  some  one^ 

any  one, 
aliquis,  some  one,  any  one, 
quisquam,  any  ^«^(used  chiefly  in  negative  and  conditional 

sentences). 
qui  vis    ]  . 

quilibet}^^-^"^"-^"^^^^^"^- 
quisque,  each, 
quidam,  a  certain^  a. 

1.  Quis,  some,  any,  is  never  the  first  word  in  its  clause : 
si  quid  his  .  .  .  accidat,  if  anything  should  happen  to  these 

2.  Quisque,  each,  should  be  distinguished  from  omnis, 
every.  It  is  not  often  used  in  the  plural,  quisqu^egularly 
follows  the  word  to  which  it  belongs. 

3.  Quisque  is  often  used  with  the  superlative: 

optimus  quisque,  all  the  best  (literally,  each  best  one), 

[H.  512;  (455-458);  LM.  1064-1072;  A.  309-314;  (202);  G.  313- 
318;  B.  252.] 

73.  Alius,  other  (of  more  than  two),  and  alter,  other  (of 
two  only),  are  used  idiomatically  as  follows : 

1.  In  pairs,  alius  .  .  .  alius,  one  .  .  .  another ;  alter, 
alter,  the  one  ,  ,  ,  the  other;  alter  exercitum  perdidit,  alter 
vendidit,  one  ruined  the  army,  the  other  sold  it. 

2.  When  repeated  in  different  cases  or  when  used  with 
the  corresponding  adverb,  they  express  in  a  condensed 
form  various  idiomatic  phrases: 


> 


PRONOUNS.     CORRELATIVES  33 

alius  alium  incusat,  one  accuses  one^  another  another 
(literally,  another  accuses  another^  i.e.  each  one  accuses 
some  one  else). 

alii  aliam  in  partem,  {they  fled)  some  in  one  direction,  others 
in  another. 

[H.  516;  (459)  ;  LM.  1047;  A.    315;  (203) ;  G.  319;  B.  253.J 

74.  Ipse,  self,  emphasizes  the  substantive  with  which  it 
is  used.  Do  not  confuse  it  with  the  reflexive  (65,  66). 
"  Self  "  in  English  may  be  either  intensive  or  reflexive,  while 
the  Latin  has  a  special  word  for  each : 

se  videt,  he  sees  himself  (reflexive). 

ipse  puerum  videt,  he  himself  sees  the  boy  (intensive). 

Note  the  following  uses  and  meanings  of  ipse : 

1.  very,  mere,  in  person,  own  accord^  etc. 

60  ipso  die,  on  that  very  day. 
ipsa  audacia,  by  mere  audacity. 
ipse  aderat,  he  was  present  in  person, 

valvae  se  ipsae  aperuerunt,  the  doors  opened  of  their  own 
accord. 

2.  When  it  emphasizes  a  reflexive,  it  is  put  in  the  nom- 
inative rather  than  in  agreement  with  the  reflexive : 

se  ipse  continere  non  potest,  he  cannot  contain  himself  (not 
se  ipsum). 

3.  It  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  an  indirect  reflexive : 

legates  misit  qui  ipsi  vitam  peterent,  he  sent  messengers  to 
beg  life  for  himself  {hQVQ  ipsi  is  used  instead  of  sibi). 

[H.  509;  (452);  LM.  1060-1062;  A.  298,  c-f,  300,  b;  {195,  f-1) ; 
G.  311;  B.  249.] 

LATIN  PROSE  COMP. —  3 


34  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

75.  The  interrogative  pronoun  is  quis  (qui),  quae,  quid 
(quod),  who^  which,  what?  The  forms  qui  and  quod  are 
generally  used  as  interrogative  adjectives : 

qui  locus  est,  what  place  is  there  ? 

Quis  and  quid  are  generally  used  as  pronouns  (i.e.  no 

noun  is  expressed): 

quis   clarior   Themistocle,  who  is  more  famous  than  The- 
mistocles  ? 
[H.  511 ;  (454)  ;  LM.  285;  A.  148,  149;  (104) ;  G.  106;  B.  90.] 

76.  Idem,  the  same,  is  often  equivalent  to  the  English 
likewise,  at  the  same  time,  also,  yet: 

quod  idem  mihi  contigit,  which  likewise  {or  also)  happened 

to  me  (literally,  which,  the  same  thing). 
quidquid  honestum  est,  idem  est  utile,  whatever  is  honorable 

is  at  the  same  time  advantageous. 
cum  .  .  .  dicat,  negat  idem,  although  he  says,  etc.,  yet  he 

denies,  etc.  (literally,  he,  the  same  man,  denies), 

I.    For  idem  atque  (ac),  the  same  as,  see  82,  3. 
£H.  508 ,-(45 1, 3, 5);  LM.  1059;  A.  298, a,  b;  (i9S>e);  G.310;  B.248.] 

77.  Translate: 

1.  I  witnessed  those  deeds  with  my  own  eyes. 

2.  What  road  did  he  fortify  t 

3.  The  boy,  whose  book  I  have,  is  not  here  to-day. 

4.  He  blamed  himself  for  his  laziness. 

5.  The  Rhine,  which  is  a  river  in  Europe,  is  one  hun 
dred  feet  wide. 

•   6.    All  the  houses  I  had  were  burned. 
7.    Some  did  one  thing,  others  another. 


i 


QUESTIONS.    NEGATIVE  CONNECTIVES  35 

8.  The  perpetrators  ^  of  the  crime  have  left  the  city. 

9.  That  also  belongs  to  me.^ 

10.   Each  one  fled  to  the  very  gates  of  the  city. 


LESSON  9 

QUESTIONS.     NEGATIVE  CONNECTIVES 

78.  Direct  questions  in  Latin  are  not  distinguished  by 
the  order  of  the  words,  as  in  English.  They  are  introduced 
by  the  following  special  words : 

1.  -ne.  This  is  an  enclitic,  and  is  added  to  the  emphatic 
word,  generally  the  first  word.  Such  a  question  merely 
asks  for  information : 

mansitne  Romae  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  ? 

2.  nonne.  This  particle  implies  that  the  answer  "yes" 
is  expected : 

nonne  mansit  Romae  ?  didnt  he  stay  at  Rome,  or  he  s'taid 
at  Rome,  didn't  he?  (answer  "yes  "  expected). 

3.  num.     This  particle  implies  the  answer  "no." 

num  mansit  Romae  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  f  or  he  didn't 
stay  at  Rome,  did  he  ?  (answer  "  no"  expected). 

[H.  378 ;  (351,  N.  1-3)  ;  LM.  697-701 ;  A.  330-333 ;  (210)  ;  G.  454- 
^56;  B.  162,  2.] 

79,  Direct  questions  that  are  introduced  by  the  various 
interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  such  as  quis,  qui,  ubi, 
qualis,  quot,  etc.,  are  like  the  corresponding  English  ques- 
tions, and  involve  no  difficulties.     See  75. 

'  1  What  does  this  noun  really  mean  ? 

*  belongs  to  me  —  is  mine. 


is  it  good  or  badf 


36  LA'HN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

80.  In  double  or  alternative  questions,  utrum,  -ne, 
whether^  or  occasionally  no  particle  at  all,  is  used  in  the 
first  member ;  in  the  second,  an,  or^  is  used.  In  direct 
questions,  if  the  second  member  is  negative,  annon,  or  not^ 
is  used ;  in  indirect  questions,  necne. 

The  following  table  summarizes  the  various  forms : 

FIRST  MEMBER  SECOND  AND  SUBSEQUENT 

Members 

Utrum,  whether.  an,  or. 
-ne.  an. 
an. 

Examples : 

utrum  bonum  an  malum  est  ? 
bonumne  an  malum  est  ? 
bonum  an  malum  est  ? 

mansitne  R5mae  annon  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  or  not  ? 
[H.380;  (353);  LM.705;  A.  334, 335;  (211);  G.458;  B.  162,4.] 

81.  Answers.  —  Latin  has  no  words  meaning  exclusively 
"  yes  "  or  "  no."     Answers  are  expressed  as  follows : 

1.  By  repeating  the  verb  : 

mansitne  Romae  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  ?    marsit,  yes  (pt 
non  mansit,  no). 

2.  By  the  following  adverbs  and  phrases : 
For  "yes," 

ita,  so,  true,  etc. 

ita  est,  it  is  so,  etc. 

etiam,  even  so,  yes,  etc. 

sane,  surely,  no  doubt,  etc. 

vero,  in  truth,  true,  no  doubt,  etc. 

certe,  certainly,  unquestionably,  etc. ;  and  others. 


B  QUESTIONS.    NEGATIVE  CONNECllVES  3/ 

Kl    For  "no," 

^H  non,  not  {so), 

^y  minime,  not  at  all, 

nuUo  modo,  by  no  means, 
^  non  quidem,  certainly  not ;  why,  no  ;  etc. ;  and  others. 

[H.  379;  (352);  LM.  703,  704;  A.  336,337;  (212);  G.  471;  B. 
162,5.] 

82.  Connectives.  —  Note  the  following  facts  about  the 
connection  of  coordinate  words  and  clauses : 

1.  at  is  the  most  common  particle  of  connection,  and 
unites  likes  and  unlikes. 

2.  -que  (enclitic)  unites  more  closely  than  at.  It  com- 
bines things  that  belong  closely  to  each  other,  and  is 
appended  to  the  first  word  of  its  clause  (unless  that  word 
is  a  preposition  of  one  syllable). 

pariculis  insidiisqua,  dangers  and  plots, 

3.  atque  (ac)  generally  emphasizes  the  second  of  the 
two  things  mentioned,  as  the  English  "  and  also,"  "  and 
in  fact,"  "and  indeed."  After  words  of  likeness  and 
difference^  atque  (ac)  may  have  the  force  of  as^  than, 
Ac  never  stands  before  vowels  or  h. 

intra  moenia  atqua  in  sinu  urbis  sunt  hostes,  within  the 
walls,  and,  in  fact^  In  the  heart  of  the  city  are  the 
enemies. 

ego  idem  sentio  ac  tu,  /  think  the  same  as  you, 

4.  atiam,  even,  still,  emphasizes  the  word  to  which  it 
belongs,  and  which  it  generally  precedes. 

5.  quoque,  also,  immediately  follows  the  word  to  which 
it  belongs. 


38  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

6.  When  three  or  more  words  are  to  be  connected, 
either  (i)  connect  all  by  et,  or  (2)  omit  all  conjunctions, 
or  (3)  connect  the  last  two  by  -que. 

uxores,  et  liberi,  et  bona,  1 

uxores,  liberi,  bona,  ?-  wives,  childreUy  and  property, 

uxores,  liberi,  bonaque,    J 

7.  Instead  of  et  and  the  negative,  neque  (nee)  and  the 
positive  is  generally  used  in  Latin.  Such  combinations 
give  us  the  following  phrases: 

and  noty  neque  (nee),  literally,  nor, 

and  no,  neque  iillus,  nor  any, 

and  never,  neque  umquam,  nor  ever, 

and  no  one,  neque  quisquam,  nor  any  one, 

and  nothing,  neque  quidquam,  nor  anything, 

8.  Two  adjectives  belonging  to  one  noun  are  connected 
by  et,  and  generally  follow  the  noun : 

vir  clarus  et  fortis,  a  famous  brave  man. 

[H.  314,315;  (310);  LM.  755-761;  A.  323,  324;  (156);  G.475- 
480;  B.  341.] 

83.   Translate: 

1.  He  will  go  to  Rome,  will  he  not? 

2.  They  had  many  fields,  buildings,  and  cattle. 

3.  Whose  book  is  that  on  the  table  .^ 

4.  He  was  a  general,  and  no  one  obeyed  him. 

5.  Do  you  remember  ?     No. 

6.  Will  he  not  use  his  sword  ? 

7.  Did  he  fight  or  stay  in  camp  ? 

8.  Will  you  free  us  from  danger }     No,  indeed. 

9.  A  Roman  is  a  brave,  faithful  soldier. 

10.  The  Gauls  plundered  the  houses,  and,  indeed,  the 
very  temples  of  Rome. 


THE  PARTICIPLE  — ITS  USES  AND  TENSES  39 

LESSON    10 

THE  PARTICIPLE  — ITS  USES  AND  TENSES 

84.  The  participle  is  a  verbal  adjective.  As  a  verb,  it 
may  govern  a  case ;  as  an  adjective,  it  agrees  with  a  sub- 
stantive. The  tenses  of  the  participle  denote  time,  not 
absolutely,  as  in  the  indicative  mood,  but  with  reference  to 
the  time  of  the  verb  of  the  clause  in  which  it  stands.  The 
participle  has  the  following  tenses  : 

Present:  representing  an  action  as  in  progress  at  the  time 
indicated  by  the  tense  of  the  verb  : 

video  eum  id  agentem,  /  see  him  as  he  does  it  (literally,  him 

doing  it'). 
videbam  eum  id  agentem,  /  saw  him  as  he  was  doing  it, 
videbo  eum  id  agentem,  /  shall  see  him  as  he  will  be  doing 

it. 

Note  that  the  participle  in  these  examples  expresses  no 
absolute  time.  It  describes  an  action  that  is  going  on  at 
the  time  of  the  main  verb. 

Perfect :  representing  an  action  as  completed  at  the  time 
indicated  by  the  tense  of  the  verb  : 

cohortatus  suos  abiit,  he  encouraged  his  troops,  and  went 

away  (literally,  having  encouraged  his   troops,  he  went 

away). 
cohortatus  suos  abit,  he  encourages  his  troops,  and  goes 

away. 
cohortatus  suos  abibit,  he  will  encourage  his  ti^oops,  and 

then  go  away. 

Note  again  in  these  examples  the  various  meanings  of 
the  perfect  participle,  yet  they  all  express  action  that  is 
completed  hQioxQ  the  action  of  the  main  verb  begins. 


40  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

Future:  expressing  subsequent  action : 

videbam  eum  id  acturum,  I  saw  him  when  he  was  intending 
to  do  it, 

[H.  d-ij^^  640;  (548,  550)  ;  LM.  1009-1011 ;  A.  488-493 ;  (289,  290)  ; 
G.  282,283;  B.  336.] 

85.  The  following  outline  shows  how  the  tenses  of  the 
participle  may  be  formed  from  the  stems  obtained  from 
the  principal  parts : 

Present  stem.  Perf.  act.  stem.   Perf.  pass.  stem. 

Principal  Parts. — ago,      age|re  eg|i  act|us 


Tense 

Active  Voice 

Passive  Voice 

Present 

pres.  stem  +  ns 

wanting 

Future 

perf.  pass,  stem  +  urus 

Gerundive.    Pres.  stem 
+  ndus 

Perfect 

wanting 

the  last  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal parts 

1.  Deponent  verbs  have  the  participles  of  both  voices. 

2.  The  missing  perfect  active  participle  is  supplied  by 
the  perfect  passive  participle  of  the  deponent  verbs ,  if 
there  is  no  deponent  verb  with  the  necessary  meaning, 
clauses  with  cum,  postquam,  etc.,  may  be  used : 

having  done  this^  he  went  away^  cum  id  fecisset,  abiit. 

3.  The  missing  present  passive  participle  is  supplied 
by  clauses  with  dum,  cum,  or  quod. 


THE  PARTICIPLE  — ITS  USES  AND  TENSES  4 1 

4.  The  perfect  participles  of  some  deponents  are  used 
practically  like  our  present  participle : 

usus,  using, 
secutus,  following, 
arbitratus,  ratus,  thinking. 
solitus,  accustomed, 
ausus,  daring. 

And  some  others. 

[H.  222, 1,640, 1,  4,  5  ;  (231.  550^  N.  4and  5)  ;  LM.  393-40T ;  A.  190,  a, 
b,  491^493;  035?  a,  290  b,  c,  d);  G.  128,  585  r.  ;  B.  112,  a,  336,  5, 356,  2.] 

86.  Form  all  the  participles  (giving  the  English  mean- 
ings) of  the  following  verbs  : 

do,  dare,  dedi,  datus,  give, 
.  video,  videre,  vidi,  visus,  see, 
facio,  facere,  feci,  factus,  make^  do, 
sequor,  sequi,  secutus  sMmy  follow. 
munio,  munire,  munivi,  mumXxis,  fortify. 

87.  Participles  are  used  in  Latin  more  extensively  than 
in  English.  They  may  express  tiiney  condition^  cause, 
manner,  meanSy  concession,  circumstance. 

Study  carefully  the  following  examples  which  show  Che 
various  relations  that  the  participle  expresses : 

1.  Time. 

milites  cohortatus  .  .  .  proeli  committendi  signum  dedit, 
after  he  had  encouraged  his  soldiers,  he  gave  the  signal  to 
begin  battle, 

2.  Condition, 

damnatum  poenam  sequi  oportebat,  if  condemned,  the  punish^ 
ment  must  follow. 


42  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

3.  Cause. 

horum  auctoritate  finitimi  adducti  retinent,  since  their 
neighbors  were  influenced  by  their  authority,  they  retained. 

4.  Manner, 

* 

Romani  gratulantes  Horatium  accipiunt,  the  Romans  receive 
Horatius  with  congratulations  {congratulating^ 

5.  Means. 

sol  oriens  diem  conficit,  the  sun,  by  its  rising,  makes  the  day, 

6.  Concession. 

repulsus  in  oppidum,  tamen  .  .  .  impetravit,  although  he 
had  been  driven  back  into  the  town,  yet  he  gained,  etc. 

It  will  be  seen  from  these  examples  that  clauses  beginning 
with  '*if,"  ^'when,"  "after,"  "although,"  "since,"  "while," 
etc.,  and  relative  clauses  may  often  be  rendered  in  Latin  by 
the  participle. 

[H.  637-639;  (549) ;  LM.  1017;  A.  496;  (292)  ;  G.  664-668 ;  B.  337, 2.] 

88.  When  a  verb  in  English  is  coordinate  (connected  by 
"and")  with  another  verb,  it  may  often  be  rendered  in 
Latin  by  a  participle  in  agreement  with  the  subject  or 
object  of  that  verb : 

copias  eductas  ex  castris  instruxerunt,  they  led  their  troops 
out  of  camp  and  drew  them  up  (literally,  they  drew  up 
their  troops  having  been  led  out  of  camp). 

89.  Ablative  Absolute.  —  A  noun  or  pronoun  in  the 
ablative,  with  a  participle  agreeing  with  it,  may  be  used  to 
express  any  of  the  relations  mentioned  in  Sy.  The  word 
"  absolute  "  means  that  this  construction  can  be  used  only 


THE  PARTICIPLE  — ITS   USES   AND  TENSES  43 

when  the  noun  has  no  grammatical  connection  with  the 
rest  of  the  sentence : 

armis  obsidibusque  acceptis  Crassus  .  .  .  profectus  est,  after 
arms  and  hostages  had  been  received^  Crassus  set  outy  etc. 

The  student  will  notice  that  it  is  possible  to  use  the  abla- 
tive absolute  in  the  above  example  because  armis  .  .  . 
acceptis  has  nothing  to  do  grammatically  with  the  mair 
clause,  O'assiis  set  out. 

1.  The  ablative  absolute  is  often  used  to  supply  the 
lack  of  a  perfect  active  participle  [85,  2].  If  we  wished  to 
express  Caesar  having  done  thisy  we  must  say  quo  facto 
Caesar  {this  having  been  done^  Caesar). 

2.  The  participle  is  sometimes  omitted,  and  two  sub- 
stantives, or  a  substantive  and  an  adjective,  are  used  in  the 
ablative  absolute  construction  : 

duce  Bruto,  under  the  leadership  of  Brutus. 
[H.489;  (43O;  LM.  638-642;  A.  419, 420;  (255);  G.  409, 410;  B.227.] 

90.   Translate : 

1.  When  they  had  performed  these  deeds,  they  set  out 
for  Rome. 

2.  Though  he  was  wounded,  he  fought  for  many  hours. 

3.  I  heard  her  while  she  was  speaking. 

4.  He  took  1  the  town  and  killed  the  inhabitants. 

5.  He  received  the  gifts  that  had  been  sent.. 

6.  When  Cicero  had  been  elected  ^  consul,  he  drove 
Catiline  from  Rome. 

7.  When  Cicero  had  been  elected  ^  consul,  Catiline 
formed  a  conspiracy. 

8.  We  become  better  citizens  by  doing  ^  our  duty. 

9.  If  he  is  killed,  we  shall  all  mourn. 

1  Use  potior.  2  Use  facio.  *  Use  fungor. 


44  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

LESSON    II 

GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE.     THE  PERIPHRASTIC  CONJUGA- 
TIONS.   SUPINE 

91.  The  gerund  is  a  verbal  noun.  It  has  only  the 
oblique  cases  of  the  singular,  i.e.  genitive^  dative^  accusa- 
tive,  and  ablative.  As  a  noun  the  gerund  may  itself  be 
governed  by  other  words ;  as  a  verb  it  may  take  an  object. 

Examples  of  its  use  in  different  cases : 

Genitive. 

ars  Vivendi,  art  of  living, 

agendi  causa,  for  the  sake  of  doing, 

cupidus  videndi,  desirous  of  seeing. 

Dative, 

aan?  utilis  est  bibendo,  water  is  useful  for  drinking. 
The  dative  is  not  often  used. 

Accusative. 

This  case  is  used  only  with  ad  (sometimes  in)  to  denote 
purpose. 

niilla  res  tantum  ad  dicendum  proficit,  etc.,  nothing  is  as 
profitable  for  speakingy  etc. 

Ablative.  - 

deterrere  a  scribendo,  to  deter  from  writing. 
mens  discendo   alitur  et  cogitando,  the  mind  grows  by  learn- 
ing and  reflection. 

Note.  —  As  a  rule,  the  gerund  takes  a  direct  object  only  when  used 
in  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  (without  a  preposition). 

[H.  624-631;  (541-542);   LM.  989,990;  A.  501-507;  (295-301),- 

G.  425-433 ;  B.  338.] 


GERUND  AND   GERUNDIVE  45 

92.  The  gerundive  is  a  verbal  adjective  and  is  passive  in 
its  literal  meaning.  See  85.  Therefore,  being  an  adjec- 
tive, it  always  agrees  with  a  substantive : 

consilia  urbis  delendae,  plans  for  destivying  the  city  (literally, 

plans  of  the  city  to  be  destroyed). 
ad  pacem  petendam  venerunt,    they  came   to  seek  peace 

(literally,  they  came  for  peace  to  be  asked). 

93.  Gerundive  Construction  used  instead  of  the  Gerund.  — 

When  the  genitive  or  ablative  of  the  gerund  would  have  a 
direct  object,  the  gerundive  is  generally  used  instead.  See 
91,  note. 


Gerund  Construction 

cupidus  pacem  petendi,  desir- 
ous of  seeking  peace. 

scribendo  epistulas,  by  writing 
letters. 


Gerundive  Construction 

(preferable) 

cupidus  pacis  petendae. 
scribendis  epistuliSo 


1.  The  gerundive  is  always  used  to  avoid  using  a  direct 
object  with  the  dative  of  the  gerund,  or  with  a  case  de- 
pendent upon  a  preposition.     91,  note. 

aptum  tegendis  corporibus,  suited  to  the  defense  of  the  body, 
ad  pacem  petendam  venerunt,  they  came  to  seek  peace. 
Brutus  in  liberanda  patria  est  interfectus,  Brutus  was  slain 
in  freeing  his  country. 

2.  When  the  genitives  mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  vestri,  are 
used  in  the  gerundive  construction,  the  gerundive  regularly 
ends  in  di,  regardless  of  the  gender  and  number  of  the 
pronoun : 

nostri  servandi  causa,  yj^r  the  sake  of  saving  ourselves. 

[H.  625-631 ;  (543,  544)  ;  LM.  987-1003  ;  A.  503-507 ;  (296-301)  ; 
G.  427-433;  B.  339.] 


46  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

94.  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation.  —  This  is  formed 
by  the  future  active  participle  and  the  auxiliary  verb  sum. 
It  expresses  the  idea  conveyed  by  the  English  phrases 
"  I  am  about  to,"  "  I  am  going  to,"  "  I  intend  to " : 

amaturus  est,  he  is  about  to  love, 
[H.  236  (233)  ;  LM.  355  ;  A.  193-19S  ;  (129)  ;  G.  247 ;  B.  115.] 

95.  Passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation.  —  This  is  formed 
by  the  gerundive  and  the  auxiliary  verb  sum.  It  expresses 
obligation  or  necessity,  and  in  its  literal  meaning  is  passive. 
The  agent  is  expressed  by  the  dative  case. 

Note  the  following  points  : 

1.  Since  the  conjugation  is  passive,  all  active  English 
sentences  must  be  recast  into  the  passive  voice  before  they 
can  be  literally  translated  in  Latin.  Thus :  "  I  must  give 
the  signal "  (active)  =  "  The  signal  must  be  given  by  me  " 
(passive)  =  signum  mihi  est  dandum. 

2.  Intransitive  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  always 
used  impersonally  in  Latin.  Thus  :  "■  We  ought  to  come  " 
=  "  It  ought  to  be  come  by  us  "  =  nobis  veniendum. 

[H.  237 ;  (234)  ;  LM.  991, 992 ;  A.  193-196;  (129) ;  G.  251 ;  B.  115.] 

96.  Supine. 

1.  The  form  ending  in  -um  is  used  chiefly  to  express 
purpose  after  verbs  of  motion : 

ad  Caesarem  gratulatum  convenerunt,  they  came  to  Caesar 
to  congratulate  him. 

2.  The  form  in  -u  is  used  as  an  ablative  of  specification 
with  various  adjectives : 


REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE  4/ 

hoc  est  Optimum  factu,  this  is  best  to  do  (literally,  this  is 

best  in  respect  to  doing). 
mirabile  dictu,  wonderful  to  say. 

[H.  633,  635  ;  (546,  547)  ;  LM.  1004-1008  ;  A.  508-510;  (302,  303); 
G.  435»436;  B.  340.J 

97.   Translate: 

1.  She  was  fitted  to  rule. 

2.  You  must  remain  here. 

3.  Ambassadors  came  to  seek  peace.-^ 

4.  Since  Crassus  is  their  leader,  they  ought  to  fight 
bravely. 

5.  They  formed  ^  the  plan  of  renewing  the  war. 

6.  We  will  flee  for  the  sake  of  saving  ourselves. 

7.  No  time  was  given  the  Romans  to^  arm  themselves. 

8.  That  is  easy  to  do. 

9.  Caesar  had  to  recall  the  soldiers. 
10.    By  giving  and  aiding  we  enjoy  life. 


LESSON    12 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE 

98.  Review  the  principles  of  syntax  in  58-96. 

99.  Learn  thoroughly  the  meanings  of   the  following 
words : 


I.   hinc. 

6. 

pareo. 

2.   illic. 

7- 

vendo.* 

3.   hue. 

8. 

domus. 

4.    culpo,  /  blame. 

9. 

soleo. 

5.    inimicus,  hostis. 

10. 

quisque. 

1  Express  in  two  ways. 

2  capio. 

^  ad  and  ace. 

48 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 


11.  quisquis. 

12.  quisquam. 

13.  quidam. 

14.  relinquo. 

15.  porta. 

16.  portus. 

17.  etiam. 

18.  vero. 

19.  ager. 

20.  ago. 

21.  cohortor.* 

22.  audeo.* 

23.  audio. 

24.  obses. 

25.  dives. 

26.  aptus. 

27.  trado. 

28.  salus. 

29.  adsum. 

30.  peto. 


31.  aperio. 

32.  munio. 

33.  pigritia,  ae,  laziness 

34.  pes. 

35.  minime. 

36.  quidem,  ne-quidem. 

37.  quoque. 

38.  aedificium. 

39.  castra. 

40.  periculum. 

41.  fidelis. 

42.  conficio. 

43.  instruo. 

44.  interficio.* 

45.  consilium. 

46.  iuvo. 

47.  statuo. 

48.  constituo. 

49.  consisto. 


100.  Memorize  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  given 
above,  and  write  out  all  the  participles  of  those  that 
are  starred. 


loi.    Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  English  from  the  words  in  99,  illustrating  the  gram 
matical   principles    of    58-96.     These   sentences   may   be 
given  for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 


TENSES  OF  INDICATIVE,   SUBJUNCTIVE,   INFINITIVE  49 

LESSON    13 

TENSES  OF  INt)ICATIVE,  SUBJUNCTIVE,  AND  INFINITIVE. 
DELIBERATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE.  HOW  TO  EXPRESS  "OUGHT,'* 
"  MUST  " 

102.  Present  Indicative.  —  Aside  from  its  regular  mean- 
ings, the  following  uses  should  be  noted : 

1.  It  is  used  to  describe  past  actions  and  events  which 
the  writer  imagines  to  be  now  going  on  before  his  eyes. 
It  is  then  called  the  Historical  Present^  and  is  generally 
translated  by  a  past  tense : 

Caesar  Aeduis  obsides  imperat,  Caesar  demanded  hostages 
of  the  Aediians. 

2.  When  dum,  while,  is  used  with  the  present  tense, 
the  verb  is  generally  translated  as  if  it  were  imperfect : 

dum  haec  geruntur,  while  these  things  were  going  on. 

3.  In  combination  with,  iam,  now:  iam  ^m,  now  for  a 
long  time;  iam  pridem,  now  long  since,  and  similar  words, 
the  present  is  used  with  the  force  of  the  English  perfect. 

iam  diu  cupio  te  visere,  /  have  for  a  long  time  wished  to 
visit  you  (i.e.  /  now  wish  and  have  long  wished). 

103.  Imperfect  Indicative.  —  This  tense  represents  the 
action  as  taking  place  irt  past  time. 

1.  It  sometimes  represents  an  action  as  customary  or 
repeated: 

epulabatur  more  Persarum,  he  used  to  banquet  in  the 
Persian  style. 

2.  With  iam,  iam  diu,  iam  dudum,  etc.  [see  102,  2], 
the  imperfect  has  the  force  of  the  English  pluperfect : 

LATIN  PROSE  COMP.  —  4 


50  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

iam  diu  cupiebam  te  visere,  /  had  for  a  long  time  wished  to 
visit  you. 

m 

104.  Future  Indicative.  —  The  Latin  uses  the  future 
much  more  exactly  than  the  EngHsh.  We  often  use  the 
present  tense  to  refer  to  future  time,  the  Latin  very 
seldom.     Thus  : 

If  he  comes,  I  shall  see  him,  si  venie^ (literally,  will  come\ 
eum  videbo. 

105.  Perfect  Indicative.  —  Note  its  two  meanings  (i) 
amavi,  /  have  loved,  called  the  present  perfect  or  perfect 
definite ;  (2)  amavi,  /  loved,  called  the  historical  perfect  or 
perfect  indefinite. 

106.  Note  these  perfects  that  have  a  present  meaning. 
Their  pluperfect  forms  have  the  force  of  the  imperfect : 

novi,  I  know. 

memini,  /  remember, 

Odi,  /  hate. 

consuevi,  /  am  accustomed. 

107.  Future-perfect  Indicative.  —  Note  again  (see  104) 
how  exactly  the  Latin  uses  its  tenses : 

When  I  reach  Rome,  I  will  write,  Romam  cum  venero 
(literally,  shall  have  reached),  scribam. 

References  for  Use  of  Tenses  of  iNDiCAxrvrE 

[H.  532-540;  (466-473);  LM.  730-748;  A.  465-479^556;  (276- 
281);  G.  227-244;  B.  259-264.] 

108.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  present,  past, 
or  future  time  not  absolutely,  but  with  reference  to  the  time 
of  the  verb  on  which  they  depend.     The  significance  of  the 


TENSES  OF  INDICATIVE,  SUBJUNCTIVE,  INFINITIVE       5 1 

tenses  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  tenses  of  the  participle. 
Review  84,  with  the  examples  given,  very  carefully. 

[H.  617  ;  (537)  ;  LM.  978  ;  A.  486,  569,  a ;  (288) ;  G.  529, 530 ;  B.  270.] 

109.    The  following  outline  shows  how  the  tenses  of  the 
infinitive  may  be  formed.     Review  85. 

Infinitives 


Tense 

Active  Voice 

Passive  Voice 

Present 

second  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal parts 

change  final  e  of  pres- 
ent active  infinitive 
to  i,  except  in  third 
conjugation,  which 
changes  ere  to  i 

Future 

future    active    parti- 
ciple and  esse 

supine  and  iri 

Perfect 

perfect  active   stem 
H-isse 

perfect  passive  parti- 
ciple and  esse 

I.  Deponent  verbs  substitute  the  future  active  for  the 
future  passive  infinitive. 

Form  all  the  infinitives  of  the  following  verbs : 

vincO,  vincere,  vici,  victus,  conquer, 
sentio,  sentire,  sensi,  sensus,  perceive, 
proficiscor,  proficisci,  profectus,  set  out 

no.  Deliberative  Subjunctive.  —  The  subjunctive  is  used 
in  questions  that  are  asked,  not  to  receive  information,  but 
to  indicate  (i)  doiibty  indignation^  or  (2)  an  impossibility 


52  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

of  the  thing's  being  done.    The  negative  is  non.     They  are 
most  common  in  the  first  person. 

quid  agam,  iudices  ?  what  am  I  to  do,  judges  ? 

quid  dicerem  ?  w/iat  was  I  to  say  f  or  what  could  I  say  ? 

[H.  S59j  4;  (484,  V)  ;  LM.  723;  A.  444;  (268)  ;  G.  265  ;  B.  277.] 

III.  English  expressions  that  employ  the  auxiliary  verbs 
ought  or  musty  such  as  you  ought  to  go,  he  mtist  do  this,  are 
expressed  in  Latin  in  several  ways : 

1.  The  passive  periphrastic  conjugation.     Review  95. 

2.  debeo  and  the  infinitive. 

3.  oportet  (an  impersonal  verb)  with  the  infinitive,  or 
the  subjunctive  (without  ut): 

te  oportet  virtus  trahat,  virtue  ought  to  attract  you  (literally, 

it  ought  (to  be)  that  virtue  attract  you). 
legem  brevem  esse  oportet,  a  law  ought  to  be  brief. 

Examples : — 


id  mihi  faciendum  est, 
debeo  id  facere, 
me  oportet  id  facere, 
oportet  id  f  aciam, 


/  ought  to  do  thiSf 

or 
/  must  do  this. 


[H.  564,  II,  I ;  (502,  I) ;  LM.  694,  782 ;  A.  565 ;  (331,  i)  ;  G.  535, 
R.  2 ;  B.  295,  6,  8.] 

112.    Compare  these  two  English  sentences: 

"  I  ought  to  do  this." 

"  I  ought  to  have  done  this." 

In  changing  to  past  time,  the  infinitive  changes,  and 
not  the  main  verb  "ought.'*  This  is  because  the  verbs 
"ought"  and  "must"  are  defective  in  English.     In  the 


COMMANDS,   EXHORTATIONS,   PROHIBITIONS  53 

following  Latin  examples,  note  that  the  main  verb  changes 
to  a  past  tense,  and  not  the  infinitive : 

debeo  id  facere,         ]  ^        .    ^    j  ^r  • 


[  /  ought  to 


oportet  me  id  facere 

debui  id  facere,  )  ^        7^^    ?         ■,       \j - 

,^\  \  I  ousrkt  to  have  done  this, 

oportuit  me  id  facere,  J 

[H.  618, 2 ;  (537, 1) ;  LM.  980;  A. 486, a ;  (288,  a);  G.  254,  R.  i  ;B.  270, 2.] 

113.  Translate: 

1 .  We  have  been  living  in  the  city  for  many  years. 

2.  Shall  I  tell  him  this  ? 

3.  She  ought  to  work  more  diligently. 

4. '-While  the  city  was  being  fortified,  the  enemy  ar- 
rived. 

5.  He  had  been  in  command  of  ^  the  army  a  long  time. 

6.  You  ought  not  to  have  written  that  letter. 

7.  He  hates  them  on  account  of  their  laziness. 

8.  Caesar  had  to  fortify  his  camp. 

9.  What  was  I  to  do } 

10.    He  never  used  to  obey  his  parents. 

LESSON    14 

COMMANDS,  EXHORTATIONS,  PROHIBITIONS ;    HOW  TO 
EXPRESS   "MAY,"   "CAN,"   "MIGHT,"   ETC. 

114.  The  present  imperative  is  used  to  express  a  direct 
positive  command  in  the  second  person.  The  future  tense 
is  used  chiefly  in  legal  phrases  : 

da  mihi  hoc,  give  me  this. 
[H.  560;   (487)  ;   LM.  725;  A.  448,  449;   (269)  ;  G.  266;  B.  281.] 
1  Be  in  command  of  —  praesum. 


54 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


115.  The  first  and  third  persons,  which  are  missing  in 
the  imperative,  are  supplied  by  the  subjunctive  (negative 
ne).  The  tense  is  usually  present.  The  subjunctive  then 
expresses  an  exhortation  or  an  entreaty : 

amemus  patriam,  let  us  love  our  country. 

secernant  se  a  bonis,  let  them  separate  themselves  from  the 

£[ood, 

[H.  559.  I.  560;  (484, 11)  ;  LM.  713;  A.  439;  (266); 
G.263, 1,  3;  B.  274,  275.] 

116.  A  direct  command  in  the  second  person,  when 
negative,  is  called  a  prohibition.  They  are  expressed  in 
Latin  as  follows : 

1.  Noli  (plural  nolite),  he  unwilling,  with  the  infinitive. 
This  is  the  common  expression  :  noli  hoc  facere,  do  not  do 
this  (literally,  be  tmzvilliiig  to  do  this). 

2.  Ne  with  the  second  person  of  the  perfect  subjunctive, 
or  cave,  cave  ne,  fac  ne,  take  care  not,  see  that  not,  with  the 
second  person  of  the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive.  These 
expressions,  however,  are  less  common. 

Caution.  —  Do  not  express  prohibition  by  ne  or  non  and 

the  imperative.  j-^   ^^i,  i,  2;  (488-489);  LM.  728,  729; 

A.  450 ;  (269,  a,  b)  ;  G.  271,  2,  272,  2 ;  B.  276.] 

Summary 


Person 

Positive 

Negative 

First 

hoc  faciamus,  let  us  do 
this 

ne  hoc  faciamus,  let  us 

not  do  this 

Second 

hoc  fac,  do  this 

noli  (nolite)  hoc  facere, 

do  not  do  this 

Third 

hoc  faciat,  let  him  do 

this 

ne  hoc  faciat,  let  him 
not  do  this 

COMMANDS,   EXHORTATIONS,  PROHIBITIONS  55 

117.  The  English  auxiliaries,  rnayy  might,  could,  would, 
should,  are  not  always  used  with  the  same  force.  When 
used  with  their  full  force  of  possibility,  or  power,  they  are 
expressed  by  corresponding  Latin  verbs.  Thus,  licet,  it  is 
permitted,  gives  the  idea  of  may,  might ;  possum,  /  am 
able,  the  idea  of  could;  volo,  I  am  willing,  the  idea  of  would. 
When  these  English  auxiharies  are  less  forceful,  that  is, 
are  not  used  with  their  full  literal  meaning,  they  are 
represented  in  Latin  by  the  subjunctive  mood. 

118.  Potential  Subjunctive.  —  This  expresses  an  action 
2iS,  possible  or  conditional,  not  as  real.  It  often  represents 
an  action  as  dependent  upon  some  implied  condition.  The 
negative  is  non.  This  subjunctive  is  generally  represented 
in  English  by  may,  should,  would: 

quispiam  quaerat,  some  one  may  ask, 

velim,  /  should  wish,  or  /  should  like  (more  polite  than 

volo,  /  wish). 
diceres,  you  would  say,  or  would  have  said, 

[H.  552-556;  (485,  486);  LM.  717-720;  A.  445-447,  522;  (311, 
a,  b);  G.  257,  258;  B.  280.] 

119.  When  may  or  might  emphasize  the  idea  of  permis- 
sion, use  licet.     It  is  used  as  follows : 

1.  Followed  by  subjunctive. 

2.  Followed  by  infinitive. 

Examples : 

licet  eum(ei)  venire,  1   ,  ,.      .  .      .    v 

licet  veniat,  J        ^^-^  ^^'^'  ^^  P^^^^^^^^  ^^)  ^^'^^^ 

[H.  564,  II,  I,  615 ;  (501,  I,  536,  2,  (3))  ;  LM.  693,  782 ;  A.  565, 
N.  2 ;  (331,  i,  N.  3)  ;  G.  535,  553,  4;  B.  295,  6,  327,  i.] 


56  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

120.  Translate : 

1.  Let  them  free  us  from  danger. 

2.  He  ought  to  have  remained  here. 

3.  Don't  leave  the  city. 

4.  Let  us  all  enjoy  life. 

5.  What  can  that  fellow  do  ? 

6.  Let  us  not  be  afraid  of  work. 

7.  I  should  like  to  do  that. 

8.  You  may  ^  do  it  if  you  wish. 

9.  Some  one  may  ^  ask  you  for  that  book. 

10.   Any  one  would  have  fought  for  ^  his  country. 

LESSON    15 

CONDITIONS  AND   WISHES 

121.  Conditional  sentences  are  complex  sentences  con- 
sisting of  two  parts,  the  condition  (or  protasis)  introduced 
by  "  if,"  "if  not,"  "  unless,"  and  the  conclusion  (or  apodosis). 

For  convenience,  they  may  be  arranged  in  these  classes: 

L    Conditions  referring  to  present  or  past  time. 

1.  Simple. 

2.  Contrary  to  Fact  (Non-fact). 

IL    Conditions  referring  to  future  time. 

1.  Vivid  Future. 

2.  Less  Vivid  Future. 

122.  Simple.  —  In  this  class  the  condition  (or  protasis) 
simply  states  a  present  or  past  supposition  of  fact,  without 

1  Does  "  may  "  mean  "  is  permitted  "  ? 

2  Do  not  use  the  dative. 


CONDITIONS  AND  WISHES  57 

implying  whether  or  not  it  is  true.  The  present  and  past 
tenses  of  the  indicative  are  used  in  both  condition  and 
conclusion : 

si  hoc  faciunt,  bene  est,  if  they  do  this,  it  is  well. 

si  hoc  fecerunt,  bene  fuit,  if  they  did  this,  it  was  well, 

[H.  574;  (508)  ;  LM.  933 ;  A.  515  ;  (306)  ;  G.  595  ;  B.  302.] 

123.  Contrary-to-fact  Conditions. — When  the  condition 
states  a  present  or  past  supposition,  implying  that  the  con- 
dition is  not  or  was  not  fulfilled  {i.e.  is  contrary  to  the  actual 
facts  of  the  case),  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive 
are  used  in  both  condition  and  conclusion.  The  imperfect 
expresses  present  time,  the  pluperfect  past  time: 

si  hoc  facerent,  bene  esset,  if  they  zvere  {now)  doing  this 
(implying  that  they  are  not),  it  would  be  well. 

si  hoc  f  ecissent,  bene  f  uisset,  if  they  had  do7ie  this,  it  would 
have  been  well. 

I.  Expressions  oi  ability,  obligation,  or  necessity  (such 
as  debeo,  oportet,  decet,  possum,  the  periphrastic  conjugation, 
etc.),  when  used  in  the  conclusion,  are  often  in  the  imper- 
fect, perfect,  or  pluperfect  indicative^  instead  of  the  sub- 

jitnctive  : 

si  Romae  privatus  esset,  tamen  is  erat  deligendus,  if  he  were 
a  private  citizen  at  Rome,  yet  he  ought  to  be  appointed. 

[H.  579,1,  583;  (510,511,2);  LM. 938,  940;  A.  517;  (308,  a,  c); 
G.  597.  3,  (a)  ;  B.  304,  i,  3.] 

124.  Vi^id  Future  Condition.  —  When  a  supposed  future 
case  is  stated  distinctly  and  vividly  (as  in  English,  **  if  I 
shall  go,"  or  "  if  I  go  "),  the  future  or  future-perfect  indica- 
tive is  used  in  both  condition  and  conclusion : 


58 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  1 


61  hoc  facient,  bene  erit,  if  they  do  (i.e.  will  do)  this,  it  will 
be  well. 

Caution.  —  Remember  that  the  present  tense  in  English 
often  refers  to  future  time.     See  104. 

[H.  574;  (508)  ;  LM.  933 ;  A.  516,  a;  (307,  a)  ;  G.  595  ;  B.  302.] 

125.  Less  Vivid  Future  Condition.  —  When  a  supposed 
future  case  is  stated  in  a  less  distinct  or  vivid  form  (as  in 
English,  "if  I  should  go  "),  the  present  (less  often  the  per- 
fect) subjunctive  is  used  in  both  condition  and  conclusion : 

si  hoc  faciant,  bene  sit,  if  they  should  do  this,  it  would  be 
well. 

This  form  of  condition  may  be  recognized  in  English  by 
the  auxiliaries  should  ox  would,  in  both  parts  of  the  condition. 

[H.576;  (509);  LM.936;  A.5i6,b;  (307,b);  G.  596;  B.  303.] 

126.  Summary  of  conditions : 

I.    Present  or  past  time. 

1.  Simple.     Present   or  past  tenses  of 
indicative  in  both  parts. 

2.  Contrary  to  fact. 
(i)  Present  time — imperfect  subjunc- 
tive in  both  parts. 

(2)  Past  time  —  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive in  both  parts. 
11.    Future  time. 

1.  Vivid  future.      Future  or  future  per- 
fect indicative  in  both  parts. 

2.  Less  vivid  future.     Present  or  perfect 
subjunctive  in  both  parts. 


Classes 

OF 

Conditional 
Sentences. 


CONDITIONS  AND   WISHES  59 

127.  Condition  omitted.  The  condition  (or  protasis)  is 
sometimes  contained  in  a  participle,  or  implied  from  the 
sense  of  the  sentence. 

liberatus  Romam  ibit,  if  he  is  set  free  (literally,  having  been 
liberated),  he  will  go  to  Rome.  See  potential  subjunc- 
tive, 118. 

128.  Wishes  may  be  divided  into  two  classes  : 

1.  Those  that  refer  to  the  future  as,  **  may  he  do  this," 
or  "  O  that  he  may  come." 

2.  Those  that  refer  to  present  or  past  time,  and  that 
wish  for  something  which  (it  is  implied)  is  not  or  was  not 
attained.  They  are  sometimes  called  contrary-to-fact 
wishes.  Thus,  **  O  that  this  had  happened "  (implying 
that  it  did  not  happen),  or  "  would  that  he  were  not  here  " 
(implying  that  he  is  here  now). 

129.  The  subjunctive,  usually  with  utinam,  is  used  to 
express  a  wish.  The  negative  is  ne.  The  force  of  the 
tenses  is  as  follows  : 

1.  The  present  tense,  often  with  utinam,  refers  to  future 
time,  and  denotes  the  wish  as  possible. 

2.  The  imperfect  tense,  regularly  with  utinam,  expresses 
a  wish  that  is  contrary  to  fact  in  present  time. 

3.  The  pluperfect,  regularly  with  utinam,  represents  a 
wish  as  contrary  to  fact  in  past  time. 

Examples : 

1 .  utinam  hoc  f  aciat,  may  he  do  this  !  (possible). 

2.  utinam  hoc  faceret,  would  that  he  were  doing  this! 
(contrary  to  fact  in  present  time,  implying  that  he  isn't  do- 
ing this). 


6o  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

3.   utinam  hoc  ne  fecisset,  would  that  he  had  not  done 
this  !  (contrary  to  fact  in  past  time). 

[H.  558,  I,  2 ;  (483)  ;  LM.  710-712 ;  A.  441,  442 ;  (267,  b)  ;  G.  260, 

261 ;  B.  279.] 

130.   Translate : 

1.  I  wish  he  would  not  come! 

2.  If  he  should  leave  the  city,  we  would  all  be  glad. 

3.  Let  us  not  surrender  to  the  enemy. 

4.  Would  you  have  remained,  if  I  had  come  ? 

5.  O  that  the  famous^  Alexander  were  now  alive ! 

6.  Even  if  he  gives  the  signal,  we  will  not  advance. 

7.  Would  that  we  had  not  persuaded  him  1 

8.  You  would  not  have  done  so.^ 

9.  If  she  is  at  home,  I  am  glad. 


LESSON    16 

SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES.  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS.  CONSTRUC- 
TION AFTER  VERBS  OF  FEARING  AND  VERBS  OF  DOUBT- 
ING 

131.  When  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  a  dependent 
clause,  the  choice  of  the  tense  to  be  used  depends  upon 
the  time  of  the  principal  or  leading  clause. 

All  tenses  are  divided  into  two  classes :  primary  (^prin- 
cipal^ and  secondary  {historical). 

I.  The  primary  or  principal  tenses  include  all  forms 
that  express  present  or  future  time.  They  are  the  present, 
future,  and  future-perfect  indicative,  the  present  and  per- 
fect subjunctive,  and  the  present  and  future  imperative. 

*  See  61.  *  Is  a  condition  implied  ? 


SEQUENCES  OF  TENSES  6 1 

2.  The  secondary  or  historical  tenses  are  those  that 
express  past  time.  They  are  the  imperfect,  perfect,  and 
pluperfect  indicative,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive. 

(a)  The  historical  present  [102,  i]  is  sometimes  consid- 
ered a  primary  tense,  although  more  often  a  secondary. 

132.  Rule  for  Sequence  of  Tenses. — ^  Whenever  the  sub- 
junctive is  used  in  a  subordinate  or  dependent  clause,  the 
tense  that  shculd  be  used  is  determined  by  the  following 
rule: 

A  primary  tense  in  the  main  clause  is  followed  by  a 
primary  tense  in  the  dependent  clause ;  a  secondary  tense 
is  followed  by  a  secondary  tense. 

133.  In  applying  this  rule  for  the  sequence  of  tenses- 
the  student  should  notice  (i)  whether  the  verb  of  the  main 
clause  is  primary  or  secondary ;  (2)  whether  the  depend- 
ent verb  denotes  (a)  time  that  is  present  or  future  with 
reference  to  the  time  of  the  main  verb  (i.e.  whether  it 
denotes  incomplete  action),  or  (d)  time  that  is  past  with 
reference  to  the  main  verb  (i.e.  completed  action). 

I.  If  the  main  verb  is  primary,  the  dependent  subjunc- 
tive must  be  present  tense  if  the  action  is  incomplete,  and 
perfect  if  it  denotes  complete  action. 

e  2.  If  the  main  verb  is  a  secondary  tense,  the  dependent 
subjunctive  must  be  imperfect  if  it  denotes  incomplete 
action,  and  pluperfect  if  it  denotes  completed  action. 

Examples  of  sequence  of  tenses  : 


1.  video  quid  faciat, 

/  see  what  he  is  doing, 

2.  vidi  quid  faceret, 

I  saw  what  he  ivas  doing. 


In  both  these  examples 
the  dependent  clause  ex- 
presses incomplete  action, 
because  the  doing  was  go- 
ing on  at  the  same  time  as 
the  seeing. 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 


3.  vided  quid  fecerit, 

I  see  what  he  did  {or  has  done\ 

4.  vidi  quid  fecisset, 
/  saw  what  he  did  (or  had  done).  ^ 


Here  the  dependent 
clauses  denote  completed 
action,  because  the  doing 
was  finished  before  the 
seeing  began. 


Outline  for  Use  of  Subjunctive  Tenses 


Principal  or  Main  Verb 

Tense  used  in  Subjunctive 

Incomplete  Time 

Completed  Time 

Present 
Future 

Future  perfect 
Imperative 

Present 

Perfect 

Perfect 

Pluperfect 

Imperfect 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

References  for  Sequence  of  Tenses  * 
[H.  543-545  ;  (490-495)  ;   LM.  802-809;  A.  482-485  ;   (285,  286)  ; 
G.  509-511 ;  B.  266,  267.] 

134.  Indirect  Questions.  — When  a  question  is  not  asked 
directly,  but  depends  upon  some  introductory  verb,  the 
subjunctive  is  used : 

scio  quis  ille  sit,  /  know  who  he  is,    (The  direct  question 
was,  quis  ille  est?  who  is  he?) 

Indirect  questions  may  be  recognized  in  English  by  the 
fact  that  some  interrogative  word  follows  the  main  or 
introductory  verb. 

[H.  649,  n  ;  (529, 1)  ;  LM.  810 ;  A.  573-575  ;  (334)  ;  G.  467 ;  B.  300.] 


SEQUENCES  OF  TENSES  63 

135.  A  clause  dependent  upon  a  verb  or  expression  of 
fearing  may  be  expressed  by  ut  or  ne  and  the  subjunctive. 
Ne  is  affirmative,  and  means  that ;  ut  is  negative,  and 
means  that  not: 

timeo  ne  hoc  faciat,  I  fear  that  he  will  do  this  (or  I  fear 

that  he  is  doing  this), 
timebam  ut  hoc  faceret,  I  feared  that  he  would  not  do  this, 

I.  ne  non,  that  .  .  .  not,  is  occasionally  used  instead  of 
ut,  and  regularly  so  when  the  verb  of  fearing  is  negative  : 

non  vereor  ne  hoc  non  fecerit,  /  am  not  afraid  that  he  has 
not  done  this, 

[H.  567, 1 ;  (498,  III)  ;  LM.  897 ;  A.  564 ;  (331,  f )  ;  G.  550, 2 ;  B.  296, 2.] 

136.  Verbs  of  doubting^  when  negative  or  in  the  form 
of  a  question  that  implies  a  negative  answer,  are  followed 
by  quin,  that^  but  that,  and  the  subj  unctive : 

non  erat  dubium  quin  plurimum  possent,  there  was  no  doubt 
that  they  had  very  great  power. 

quis  dubitat  quin  in  virtute  divitiae  sint  ?  who  doubts  (im- 
plying that  no  one  does)  that  there  are  i^iches  in  vii^tue  ? 

I.  Dubito  also  means  hesitate,  and  is  regularly  followed 
by  the  infinitive : 

non  dubitem  dicere,  etc.,  /  should  not  hesitate  to  say,  etc. 

[H.  595,  I ;  (504,  505,  I,  4)  ;  LM.  913,  914;  A.  558,  a;  (332,  g,  r. 
N.  2);  G.  555,  2,  R.  3;  B.  298,  b.] 


137.   Translate: 

I.    Do  not  tell  me  where  you  went. 
'  e  not  hesitate  to  fight ' 
not  asked  who  she  is. 


.        x-/vy    i.i.\j\,    i,v^xj.    ixxv^     vv  xxv^x  v^    ^  \j\x     vv  v^xi  >,. 

2.  May  he  not  hesitate  to  fight  bravely ! 

3.  I  have  not  asked  who  she  is. 


64 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


4.  I  was  afraid  that  they  had  not  returned  home. 

5.  Would  any  one  doubt  that  he  was  a  good  soldier? 

6.  Let  us  not  fear  that  the  enemy  will  come. 

7.  What  has  that  fellow  ^  told  you  ? 

8.  Caesar  ought  not  to  have  killed  all  the  inhabitants. 


LESSON    17 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE 
138.    Review  the  principles  of  syntax  in  102-136. 


139.    L^ 

jarn  thoroughly 

words : 

I. 

vinco. 

2. 

vincio. 

3. 

vivo.* 

4. 

cognosco. 

5. 

oportet. 

6. 

debeo.* 

7. 

finitimus. 

8. 

parens. 

9- 

epistula,  littera. 

10. 

secerno. 

II. 

quaero. 

12. 

iter. 

13. 

licet. 

14. 

vereor. 

15. 

timeo. 

16. 

terreo. 

17. 

queror.* 

18. 

incola. 

19. 

consuesco 

20. 

traho. 

21. 

brevis. 

22. 

lex. 

23. 

labors. 

24. 

munus. 

25. 

odi. 

26. 

gero.* 

27. 

fides. 

28. 

gaudeo.* 

29. 

cupio. 

30. 

gratia. 

31. 

scio. 

32. 

dubito. 

33- 

nemo. 

34. 

scelus. 

Write  all  the  infinitives  of  the  starred  verbs. 


1  See  60. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  OF   PURPOSE  AND   RESULT  6$ 

140.  Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  English  from  the  words  in  139,  illustrating  the  gram- 
matical principles  of  102-136.  These  sentences  may  be 
given  for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 


LESSON    18 

SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  PURPOSE  aND  RESULT.     OBJECT  CLAUSES 

141.  A  purpose  clause  is  one  which  expresses  the  end  or 
purpose  of  the  action  of  a  verb. 

In  English,  purpose  is  indicated  in  a  variety  of  ways. 
In  the  sentence,  "  He  came  to  see  me,"  the  purpose  clause 
"to  see  me"  may  be  expressed  "in  order  that  he  might 
see  me,"  or  "for  the  purpose  of  seeing  me,"  or  "in  order 
to  see  me,"  etc. 

142.  In  Latin,  also,  there  are  many  ways  of  expressing 
purpose.     In  previous  lessons  these  have  been  considered. 

1.  The  genitive  of  the  gerundive  construction  followed 
by  causa.     See  91,  second  example,  and  93. 

2.  The  genitive  of  the  gerund  followed  by  causa.  See 
91,  second  example. 

3.  ad  and  the  accusative  of  the  gerundive  construction. 
See  93,  I,  second  example. 

4.  ad  and  the  accusative  of  the  gerund.  See  91,  accusa- 
tive. This  construction  is  not  used  with  transitive  verbs. 
See  93,  I. 

5.  Supine  in  -um  after  verbs  of  motion.     See  96,  i. 

143.  A  clause  of  purpose  is  most  commonly  expressed 
by  ut,  fkaf,  in  order  that,  and  ne,  in  order  that  not^  lest,  and 
the  subjunctive : 

LATIN  PROSE  COMP.  —  5 


66  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

veni  ut  meum  amicum  viderem,  /  came  that  I  might  see  my 

friend  (or  to  see  my  friend). 
portas  clausit,  ne  quam  oppidani  initiriam   acciperent,  he 

closed  the  gateSy  lest  the  townsmen  should  receive  any 
injury, 

1.  A  relative  pronoun  is  used  with  the  subjunctive  to 
express  purpose.  There  must,  of  course,  be  an  antecedent 
of  the  relative,  expressed  or  understood,  in  the  main  clause  : 

qui  cognoscerent  misit,  he  sent  men  to  find  out,  etc.  (literally 
he  sent  those  who  should  find  out). 

2.  quo  (the  ablative  of  the  relative)  is  often  used  with 
the  subjunctive  to  express  purpose  when  the  purpose  clause 
contains  a  comparative : 

carinae  aliquanto  planiores  quam  nostrarum  navium,  quo 
facilius  vada  excipere  possent,  the  bottoms  of  the  ships 
(were)  considerably  flatter  than  those  of  our  vessels,  so  that 
they  might  be  able  to  stand  the  shoals  more  easily. 

[H.  568;  (497);  LM.  835,  899,908;  A.  529-532;  (317);  G.  544, 
R.  2;  B.  282.] 

Caution.  —  Do  not  express  purpose  in  Latin  by  the 
infinitive.  This  is  used  in  English,  but  not  in  classical 
Latin. 

Query.  —  In  how  many  ways  may  purpose  be  expressed 
in  Latin } 

144.  The  student  should  notice  carefully  the  difference 
between  a  purpose  and  a  result  clause.  A  result  clause 
expresses  the  result  or  outcome  of  the  action  of  a  verb 
Observe  the  difference  as  shown  in  these  two  examples : 

"They  shouted  so  that  he  might  hear."     (Purpose.) 
"They  shouted  so  that  he  heard."     (Result.) 


SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  PURPOSE  AND  RESULT       6/ 

Some  word  or  phrase  like  so^  suck,  in  such  a  way,  etc.,  is 
often  used  in  the  sentence  before  the  result  clause  to  lead 
up  to  it,  and  to  show  that  such  a  clause  is  to  follow. 

145.  A  result  clause  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  ut,  that^  so 
that,  and  ut  non,  so  that  not,  and  the  subjunctive : 

tanta  subito  malacia  exstitit  ut  se  movere  non  possent,  such  a 

calm  suddenly  arose  that  they  could  not  move, 

I.  A  relative  and  the  subjunctive  also  often  express 
result : 

nemo  est  tarn  senex  qui  se  annum  non  putet  posse  vivere, 

nobody  is  so  old  as  not  to  think  that  he  can  live  a  year. 

Note  that  a  negative  purpose  clause  is  introduced  by  ne, 
a  negative  result  clause  by  ut  non. 

[H.  570;  (500);  LM.  90s;  A.  537,  538;  (319);  G.  552;  B.  284.] 

146.  After  many  Latin  verbs  the  object  clause  is  ex- 
pressed by  ut  or  ne  and  the  subj  unctive,  whereas  in  English, 
the  corresponding  construction  employs  the  infinitive: 

(Latin.)  huic  persuadet  uti  ad  hostis  transeat  (the  object 
of  persuadet  is  the  clause  uti  .  .  .  transeat). 

(English.)  he  persuaded  him  to  go  over  to  the  enemy  (the 
object  of  persuaded  is  the  infinitive  clause,  to  go  over  to 
the  enemy). 

Because  of  this  difference  in  idiom  it  is  necessary  to 
know  what  Latin  verbs  are  followed  by^an  object  clause  in 
the  subjunctive. 

147.  The  subjunctive  introduced  by  ut  or  ne  is  used  as 
the  object  of  verbs  signifying  to  ask,  command,  advise, 
resolve,  urge,  persuade,  permit,  strive,  decree. 


68  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

monet  ut  omnis  suspiciones  vitet,  he  advises  (or  warns)  him 

to  avoid  all  suspicion. 
Helvetiis  persuasit  ut  exirent,  he  persuaded  the  Helvetians 

to  march  forth. 
suis  imperavit  ne  quod  omnino  telum  in  hostis  reicerent,  he 

ordered  his  men  not  to  throiv  back  at  the  enemy  any  weapon 

at  all. 
te  rogo  ut  eum  iuves,  /  beg  you  to  aid  him. 

The  following  verbs  are  some  of  the  most  common  that 
take  this  construction : 


persuades,  persuade. 

impero,  mando,  order. 

rogo,  ask, 

6r6,  beg, 

postulo,  demand, 

moneo,  advise, 

peto,  quaero,  request^  entreat. 


cohortor,    hortor,    encourage^ 

urge. 
•concedo,  permitto,  allow, 
ctnsQQ,  propose,  move, 
decerno,  resolve,  decree, 
operam  do,  take  pains, 
negotium  do,  employ.,  charge, 
laboro,  contendo,  strive. 


[H.  565 ;  (498,  I,  II)  ;   LM.  893-895  ;  A.  563,  566;  (331)  ;  G.  546, 
and  N.  I ;  B.  295,  i,  2,  4,  5.] 

148.   There  are  many  exceptions  to  the  principle  stated 
in  147,  of  which  note  the  following : 

1.  lubeo,  order y  and  Ytio,  forbid,  are  regularly  followed 
by  the  infinitive : 

<.. 
Helvetios  oppida  restituere  iussit,  he  ordered  the  Helvetians 

to  rebuild  their  towns. 

2.  Conor,  try,  strive,  regularly  takes  the  infinitive : 
si  transire  conarentur,  if  they  should  try  to  cross^ 


VERBS  OF   HINDERING  AND   REFUSING  69 

3.  The  following  verbs  are  followed  either  by  (i)  the 
infinitive,  or  (2)  ut  and  ne  and  the  subjunctive.  Yet  the 
infinitive  is  more  common. 


patior,  sino,  allow. 
constituo,  determine. 
statuo,  resolve  upon. 
volo,  wishy  be  willing. 


nolo,  be  unwilling. 
malo,  prefer. 
cupio,  desire. 
studeo,  be  eager  for. 


149.  Translate : 

1.  They  sent  a  man  to  see  her.     (Express  in  six  differ- 
ent ways  in  Latin.) 

2.  They  were  persuaded  ^  to  do  this. 

3.  Caesar  asked  Labienus  to  occupy  ^  the  mountain  and 
wait  for  his  men. 

4.  I  ordered  him  to  be  bound  ^  and  led  to  me. 

5.  We  should  like  to  go  to  Athens. 

6.  He  was  so  lazy  that  he  would  not  fight. 

7.  I  am  not  the  man  to  desert  a  friend. 

LESSON    19 

CONSTRUCTION    AFTER  VERBS    OF   HINDERING    AND    REFUS- 
ING.   TEMPORAL  CLAUSES 

150.  Object  clauses  dependent  upon  verbs  of  hindering^ 
preventing,  and  refusing  are  expressed  as  follows  : 

(i)  By  ne  or  quominus  and  the  subjunctive,  if  the  main 
clause  is  affirmative. 

Caesar  deterrere  potest  ne  maior  multitude  Germanorum 
Rhenum  traducatur,  Caesar  can  prevent  a  greater  multi* 
tude  of  Germans  from  being  led  across  the  Rhine. 

1  were  persuaded :  see  32,  2.  2  Use  a  participle  to  express  this  verb. 


70  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

I.    Prohibeo  regularly  takes  the  infinitive. 

Germanos  transire  prohibebant,  they  kept  the  Germans  from 
crossing, 

(2)  By  quin  (less  often  quominus)  and  the  subjunctive,  if 
the  main  clause  is  negative. 

neque  recusant  quin   armis   contendant,   and  they  do  not 

refuse  to  contend  in  arms. 
retineri  non  potuerant  quin  tela  conicerent,  they  could  not 

be  restrained  from  hurling  their  weapons. 

[H.  566,  568,  8,  595»  2;  (504,  4,  505,  II)  ;  LM.  898;  A.  558;  (331, 
e,  2,  332,  g)  ;  G.  548,  549,  554,  555  ;  B.  295,  3,  a.] 

151.  The  time  of  the  action  of  a  verb  may  be  defined 
by  (i)  a  noun,  or  (2)  a  clause.  As,  **  At  six  o'clock  he  went 
home."     "  When  it  was  dark  he  went  Home." 

Review  51. 

152.  Temporal  clauses  introduced  by  the  following 
particles  take  the  indicative.  The  tense  is  generally  per- 
fect or  historical  present. 

postquam  (posteaquam),  after. 
ubi,  when. 
ut,  as^  when. 


ut  primum, 
cum  primum, 
simul  atque, 
simul  ac, 
simul, 


>  as  soon  as. 


postquam  Caesar  pervenit,  obsides  poposcit,   after  Caesar 

arrived,  he  demanded  hostages. 
Pompeius  ut  equitatum  suum  pulsum  vidit,  acie  excessit, 

when  Pompey  saw  his  cavalry  beaten,  he  left  the  army. 

[H.  602;  (518)  ;  LM.  881 ;  A.  543;  (324)  ;  G.  561 ;  B.  287,  i.] 


VERBS  OF   HINDERING  AND   REFUSING  71 

153.  Temporal  clauses  introduced  by  cum,  when,  while, 
after,  take : 

f .  The  indicative,  if  the  tense  is  present,  perfect,  future, 
or  future-perfect. 

2.   The  subjunctive,  if  the  tense  is  imperfect  or  pluperfect. 

The  imperfect  or  pluperfect  indicative  is  very  rare  in 
classical  Latin. 

cum  id  nuntiatum   esset,  maturat,   when  this  had   been 

reported,  he  hastened. 
cum  Caesar  in  Galliam  venit,  when  Caesar  came  into  Gaul 

Review  87,  i,  89. 

[H.  600,  601;  (521);  LM.  854-858;  A.  545^548;  (325);  G.  580, 
585;  B.  288,1.] 

154.  antequam  and  priusquam,  before,  until,  are  used  as 

follows : 

( r )  With  the  indicative  to  express  an  actual  fact.  The 
tense  is  generally  perfect,  future-perfect,  or  present. 

(2)  With  the  subjunctive  when  the  action  is  viewed  as  an^ 
ticipated.    The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  are  generally  used. 

nee  prius  respexi  quam  venimus,  and  I  did  not  look  back 

until  we  arrived. 
priusquam  telum  adici  posset,  omnis  acies  terga  vertit,  be^ 

fore  a  spear  could  be  hurled,  the  whole  army  fled, 

1.  Antequam  and  priusquam  are  often  divided  into  their 
two  elements,  ante  .  .  .  quam,  prius  .  .  .  quam,  and  the 
first  part  put  in  the  main  clause,  the  second  in  the  temporal 
clause.     See  first  example  given  above. 

2.  Antequam  and  priusquam  mean  until  after  a  negative 
clause.     See  first  example. 

[H.  605, 1,  II ;  (520)  ;  LM.  877-880;  A.  550,  551 ;  (327)  ;  G.  574- 
577;  B.  291,  29a. i 


72  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

••  155.  Dum,  quoad,  or  quam  diu,  as  long  as,  so  long  as^ 
take  the  indicative.     For  dum,  while,  see  102,  2. 

quoad  potuit,  restitit,  he  resisted  as  long  as  he  could. 

[H.  603,  I ;  (519, 1)  ;  LM.  918  ;  A.  554,  555  ;  (328,  2)  ;  G.  569;  B. 
293,  I,  II.] 

156.  Dum  and  quoad,  imtil,  are  used  as  follows : 

1.  With  the  indicative  to  denote  an  actual  event.  This 
will  be,  in  general,  when  the  reference  is  to  a  past  action. 
In  this  sense  dum  is  used  less  often  than  quoad. 

nostri  non  f inem  sequendi  fecerunt,  quoad  equites  praecipitis 
hostis  egerunt,  our  men  did  not  give  up  the  pursuit  until 
the  cavalry  drove  the  enemy  headlong. 

2.  With  the  subjunctive  to  denote  anticipation  or 
expectancy.  This  will  be,  in  general,  when  the  "  until " 
clause  refers  to  future  time  with  reference  to  the  main 
verb: 

expectas  dum  dicat,  you  are  waiting  until  he  speaks. 

dum  naves  convenirent,  in  ancoris  expectavit,  he  waited  at 

anchor  for  the  ship  to  assemble  (Hterally,  until  the  ships 

should  assemble^ 

[H.  603,  II,  I,  2 ;  (519,  II) ;  LM.  921, 922 ;  A.  553 ;  (328)  ;  G.  571, 
572  ;  B.  293,  III,  I,  2.] 

157.  Translate: 

1.  I  enjoyed  my  books  as  long  as  I  remained  there. 

2.  Just^  as  soon  as  they  saw  the  enemy,  they  fled. 

3.  When  he  had  been  informed  of  this,  they  started  for 
Rome. 

4.  You  ought  to  have  gone  before  they  came. 

5.  While  he  was  delaying  near^  the  city,  he  met  many 
of  his  friends. 

1  This  word  merely  emphasizes  *'  as  soon  as."        ^  ad  and  ace 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE.    SIMPLE  SENTENCES  73 

6.  Caesar  waited  for  the  soldiers  to  gather. 

7.  We  will  prevent  them  from  going  away. 

8.  He  did  not  leave  the  city  until  he  had  seen  her. 

9.  They  did  not  refuse  to  believe  me. 


LESSON   20 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.     SIMPLE  SENTENCES 

158.  The  words  or  thoughts  of  any  person  may  be 
quoted  either  directly  or  indirectly.  A  direct  quotation 
(i.e.  direct  discourse)  is  one  which  gives  the  exact  words 
or  thoughts  of  the  original  speaker  or  writer.  An  indirect 
quotation  (i.e.  indirect  discourse)  is  one  in  which  the  origi- 
nal words  or  thoughts  are  stated  in  the  words  of  another, 
and  conform  to  the  construction  of  the  sentence  in  which 
they  stand. 

The  English  sentence,  /  am  present^  when  quoted  di- 
rectly, is  stated:  he  said,  "/  a^n  present^  When  quoted 
indirectly,  it  assumes  this  form  :  he  said  that  he  was  present, 
or,  after  a  present  tense  of  the  verb  of  saying,  he  says  that 
he  is  present.  An  indirect  statement,  then,  is  generally 
introduced  in  English  by  the  word  **that,"  although  this 
may  be  omitted,  as,  he  says  {that)  he  is  coming. 

Caution.  —  The  English  word  "that"  should  be  care- 
fully examined.  It  may  (i)  introduce  an  object  clause,  a 
purpose  or  result  clause,  being  rendered  in  Latin  by  ut, 
ne,  quin,  quominus ;  (2)  be  the  relative  pronoun,  as  "  the 
book  that  I  saw,"  and  be  expressed  by  the  proper  form  of 
qui;  (3)  be  the  demonstrative  pronoun,  as  ''that  book  is 
mine,"  and  be  expressed  by  ille ;  (4)  be  used  to  introduce 
a  clause  in  indirect  discourse,  as  "  I  know  that  he  is  here." 
In  this  case  there  is  no  corresponding  word  in  Latin. 


74 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 


159.    Examine  carefully  these  examples 


Direct  Discourse 
/  am  coming y  venio. 


Indirect  Discourse 
he  says  that  he  is  comings 
dicit  se  venire. 
/  came^  veni.  he  said  that  he  had  come^ 

dixit  se  venisse. 
Note  (i)  that  the  English  expresses  the  indirect  state- 
ment by  a  clause  introduced  by  "that";  (2)  that  the  Latin 
changes  the  verb  of  the  direct  statement  to  the  infinitive, 
with  its  subject  in  the  accusative;  (3)  that  there  is  no 
word  in  Latin  to  correspond  to  the  "  that "  in  English. 
Hence  never  write  dico  ut,  etc.,  /  say  that,  etc. 

160.   Rule  for  Main  Verbs  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  In 

changing  from  direct  to  indirect  discourse,  the  main  verb 
of  a  declaratory  sentence  becomes  infinitive  with  its  sub- 
ject in  the  accusative. 

Verbs  and  expressions  of  knowings  thinking,  telling,  and 
perceiving  are  used  to  introduce  a  sentence  when  it  is 
quoted  indirectly. 

Some  of  the  more  common  verbs  are : 


dico,  say,  tell. 
niintio,  announce, 
refero,  report. 
certiorem  facio,  inform. 
polliceor,  promise. 
nego,  say  that  .  .  .  not. 
narro,  relate. 
respondeo,  reply, 
scribo,  write. 
memini,  remember. 


scio,  know, 

cognosco,  learn,  find  out 

sentio,  perceive, 

audio,  hear, 

video,  see, 

comperio,  find  out 

puto,  think, 

iiidico,  judge. 

spero,  hope. 

confido,  trust. 


[H.  642;  (523,1);  LM.  1020-1023;  A.  579,  580;  (336,1,2);  G 
527;  B.  314,  1,3315  i-J 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.    SIMPLE  SENTENCES 


75 


i6i.  Review  carefully  io8  and  109.  The  tenses  of  the 
infinitive  do  not  follow  the  tense  of  the  introductory  verb. 
They  only  denote  time  relative  to  that  of  the  main  verb. 
The  present  infinitive  describes  an  action,  as  going  on  at 
the  time  of  the  main  verb ;  the  perfect  as  prior  or  com- 
pleted;  the  future  as  subsequent. 

The  student  will  be  aided  in  deciding  what  tense  of  the 
infinitive  to  use  in  a  given  indirect  statement,  if  he  will 
imagine  what  tense  was  used  in  the  direct  statement.  A 
present  indicative  in  the  direct  statement  becomes  present 
infinitive  in  the  indirect ;  an  imperfect,  perfect,  or  pluper- 
fect indicative  become  perfect  infinitive ;  a  future  tense 
becomes  future  infinitive,  or  fore  (fiiturum  esse)  ut  and 
the  subjunctive. 

Study  carefully  these  examples : 


Tense 

Direct  Discourse 

Indirect  Discourse 

(Present) 

videt  me  venire,  he  sees  that 

Present 

venio,  /  am  coming. 

I  am  coming. 

(Past) 

vidit  me  venire,  he  saw  that 
I  was  coming. 

(Present) 

Imperfect 

veniebam,     /     was 

videt   me  venisse,  he  sees 

coming. 

that    I   came,    or    have 

Perfect 

veni,   /  have   come, 

come. 

or  /  came. 

(Past) 

Pluperf. 

veneram,  I  had  come. 

vidit   me  venisse,  he  saw 
that  I  came,  or  had  come. 

76 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


Tense 

Direct  Discourse 

Indirect  Discourse 

(Present) 

videt  me  venturum  (esse), 

or  videt  fore  ut  veniam, 

Future 

veniam,  I  shall  come. 

he  sees  that  I  will  come. 

(Past) 

vidit  me  venturum  (esse), 
or  vidit  fore  ut  venirem, 

he  saw  that  I  would  come. 

1.  If  a  verb  has  no  perfect  passive  participle,  its  future 
infinitive  must  be  represented  by  fore  ut  and  subjunctive. 

2.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  should  never  be  omitted 
in  Latin. 


162.  When  the  main  verb  in  the  direct  discourse  is  used 
in  any  one  of  the  following  constructions,  it  becomes  sub- 
junctive  in  indirect  discourse,  and  not  infinitive. 

(i)  A  direct  question,  asked  for  an  answer: 

(Direct.)  cur  in  meas  possessiones  venis  ?  why  do  you  come 
into  m,y  domain  ? 

(Indirect.)  Ariovistus  Caesari  respondit,  cur  in  suas  pos- 
sessiones veniret?  Ariovistus  replied  to  Caesar ^  why  did 
he  come  into  his  domain  ? 

(2)  Any  imperative  form : 

(Direct.)  noli  Aeduis  bellum  inferre,  do  not  make  war  upon 
the  Aeduans. 

(Indirect.)  postulavit  n6  Aeduis  bellum  inferret,  he  de- 
manded that  he  should  not  make  zvar  upon  the  Aeduans. 


i 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.     SIMPLE  SENTENCES  77 

(Direct.)  cum  legione  veni,  come  with  a  legion. 

(Indirect.)  scribit  Labieno  cum  legione  veniat,  he  writes  to 

Labienus  to  come  (literally,  that  he  should  come)  with  a 

legion, 

(3)  A  subjunctive  of  exhortation  {\\ 5),  or  wish {12^,  129), 
or  deliberation  (no),  remains  subjunctive  in  indirect  dis- 
course. 

[H.  642,  3,  4;  (523,  II,  I,  III)  ;  LM.  1023;  A.  586-588;  (338-339)  ; 
G,  651,652;  B.  315,  1,37316.] 

163.  If  the  direct  discourse  is  in  the  form  of  a  rhetorical 
question  {i.e.  one  that  is  asked  for  effect,  and  implies  its 
own  answer),  the  main  verb  becomes  infinitive  in  indirect 
discourse ; 

(Direct.)  num  recentium  initiriarum  memoriam  deponere 
possum  ?  can  I  lay  aside  the  memory  of  recent  wrongs  ? 

(Indirect.)  Caesar  respondit,  num  recentium  iniuriarum 
memoriam  se  deponere  posse  ?  Caesar  replied^  could  he 
lay  aside  the  memory  of  recent  wrongs  ? 

I.  It  is  often  hard  to  distinguish  between  a  real  and 
rhetorical  question.  It  often  depends  merely  on  the 
writer's  point  of  view. 

[H.642,  2;  (523,  II,  2)  ;  LM.  1024;  A.  586;  (338);  G.  651,  R.  I ;  B. 
315,2.] 

164    Translate: 

1.  I  could  not  leave  the  city. 

2.  Quote  sentence  i  indirectly  after  dixit. 

3.  We  told  him  not  to  wage  war  on  them. 

4.  Give  the  direct  discourse  of  sentence  3. 

5.  He  thought  that  he  was  going  home. 


yS  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

6.  Caesar  replied  asking  what  did  he  intend  ^  to  do  ? 

7.  I  saw  who  was  coming. 

8.  Caesar  was  informed  that  the  enemy  would  not  flee. 

9.  He  trusted  that  I  would  not  be  able  to  come. 


LESSON   21 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.    COMPLEX  SENTENCES 

165.  A  complex  sentence  is  one  consisting  of  a  principal 
clause  and  one  or  more  dependent  clauses ;  as  **  if  he  comes, 
I  shall  go  "  ;  "  we  waited  until  we  saw  her  " ;  **  the  man 
whom  I  saw  is  a  German."  The  dependent  verbs  are 
italicized. 

166.  When  a  complex  sentence  is  indirectly  quoted,  its 
principal  or  main  verb  follows  the  rules  stated  in  160,  162, 
163.     Its  dependent  verb  follows  this  law : 

Each  dependent  verb  becomes  subjunctive.  Its  tense  de- 
pends upon  the  tense  of  the  introductory  verb  of  saying, 
thinking,  etc.,  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  sequence 
of  tenses  (131). 

[H.  643 ;  (524)  ;  LM.  1026;  A.  580,  585 ;  (336,  2,  336,  B)  ;  G.  650^ 
654;  B.  314,  1,318.] 

167.  Pronouns  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  In  changing  from 
direct  to  indirect  discourse,  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second 
persons  are  generally  changed  to  pronouns  of  the  third 
person.  The  reflexive  pronouns  (65,  i,  2,  66)  refer  either 
to  the  subject  of  the  introductory  verb,  or  to  the  subject  of 
the  verb  of  their  own  clause. 

1  Intend—  volo,  or  in  animo  habe5. 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.     COMPLEX   SENTENCES 


79 


Direct  Discourse 


vir  quern  vidi  meus  amicus 
est,  the  man  whom  I  saw 
is  my  friend. 


i68.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  changes  of  a 
dependent  clause : 

Indirect  Discourse 
(Present) 

dicit  virum  quern  viderit 
suum  amicum  esse,  he  says 
that  the  man  zvhom  he  saw 
is  his  friend. 

'     (Past) 

dixit  virum  quem  vidisset 
suum  amicum  esse,  he  said 
that  the  m^an  whom,  he  saw 
(or  had  seen)  was  his 
friend. 

169.  When  conditional  sentences  are  quoted  indirectly, 
the  following  facts  should  be  noted : 

(i)  The  condition  (or  protasis),  being  a  dependent  clause, 
is  always  subjunctive. 

(2)  The  conclusion  (or  apodosis),  being  a  main  clause, 
becomes  the  infinitive,  unless  it  is  in  the  form  that  would 
change  to  the  subjunctive  (162). 

(3)  The  conclusion  of  a  less  vivid  future  condition 
becomes  the  future  infinitive.  Hence  it  is  impossible  to 
distinguish  vivid  and  less  vivid  future  conditions  when 
quoted  indirectly. 

(4)  The  condition  of  a  contrary-to-fact  condition  never 
changes  its  tense. 

(5)  The  conclusion  of  a  contrary-to-fact  condition  be- 
comes, 

1.  if  active,  the  infinitive  form  obtained  by  combining  the 

participle  in  -urus  with  fuisse. 

2.  if  passive,  or  without  a  supine  stem,  the  periphrase 

futurum  fuisse  ut  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 


So 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 


Examples  of  Conditions  in  Indirect  Discourse 


Kind  of 
Condition 

Direct  Discourse 

Indirect  Discourse 

(Present) 

dicit,  si  hoc  faciant,  bene 

esse,  he  says  that^  if  they 

si  hoc  f  aciunt,  bene 

do  this,  it  is  well. 

Simple 

est,    if   they   do 
this,   it  is  well. 

(Past) 

dixit,  si  hoc  facerent,  bene 
esse,  he  said  that,  if  they 
did  this,  it  was  well. 

(Present) 

dicit,   si  hoc  faciant,  bene 

futurum,  he  says  that,  if 

si  hoc  facient,  bene 

they  do  this,  it  zuill  be 

Vivid 

erit,    if  they  do 

well. 

Future 

thiSf    it  will  be 

(Past) 

well. 

dixit,  si  hoc  facerent,  bene 
futurum,  he  said  that,  if 
they  did  this,  it  would  be 
well. 

si  hoc  f aciant,  bene 

Less  Vivid 

sit,  if  they  should 

Latin  same  as  that  of  vivid 

Future 

do  this,  it  would 
be  well. 

future  condition. 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.    COMPLEX   SENTENCES  8 1 


Examples  of  Conditions  in  Indirect  Discourse 


Kind  of 
Condition 

Direct  Discourse 

Indirect  Discourse 

dicit  (or  dixit),  si  hoc  face- 

(Present  time) 

rent,  bene  f uturum  f uisse 

si  hoc  f  acerent,  bene 

(rarely  esse),  he  said  (or 

esset,     if     they 

says)  that,  if  they  were 

were  (now)  doing 

doing  this,  it  would  be 

this,  it  would  be 

well.     (The  tense  of  the 

Contrary 

well. 

verb  of  saying  does  not 

TO  Fact 

affect  the  condition.) 

(Past  time) 

dicit  (or  dixit),  si  hoc  fecis- 

si  hoc  fecisset,  bene 

sent,  futurum  fuisse  ut 

fuisset,    if   they 

bene   esset,  he  says  (or 

had  done  this,  it 

said)  that,    if  they  had 

would  have  been 

done  this,  it  would  have 

well. 

been  well. 

[H.  646,  647 ;  (527)  ;  LM.  1034-1040;  A.  589;  (337)  ;  G.  656-659; 
B.  319-321.] 


170.   Translate: 

1.  He  said  he  would  do  it,  if  I  would  help  him. 

2.  Wait  until  the  enemy  arrive. 

3.  Quote  sentence  2  indirectly  after  dixit. 

4.  I  think  that  I  know  what  you  did. 

5.  If  Caesar  had  been  present,  we  would  not  have  been 
defeated. 

6.  Quote  sentence  5  indirectly  after  scio. 

7.  He  hoped  that  we  would  refrain  from  injuring  her. 


latin  prose  COMP 


82  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

8.  He  replied  that,  if  we  needed  help,  we  ought  to  have 
come  to  him. 

9.  They  informed  Caesar  that  they  had  been  sent  to 
learn  about  this  very  thing. 

LESSON   22 

CONCESSION.    PROVISO.    CAUSE.     CHARACTERISTIC.     REVIEW 
OF  RELATIVE  CLAUSES 

171.  Clauses  of  concession,  introduced  in  English  by 
although^  are  generally  expressed  in  Latin  by 

1.  Quamquam,  although^  and  the  indicative; 

2.  Quamvis,  cum,  although^  and  the  subjunctive ; 

3.  Etsi,  etiamsi,  tametsi,  even  if,  with  the  same  construc- 

tion as  si.     The  indicative  is  more  common. 

Examples  :  — 
quamquam  f  estin^s,  nSn  est  mora  longa,  although  you  are  in 

haste,  the  delay  is  not  long. 
quamvis  sis  molestus,  numquam  te  esse  confitebor  malum, 

although  you  may  be  troublesome,  I  shall  never  confess 

that  you  are  an  evil. 
cum  primi  ordines  concidissent,  tamen  acerrime  reliqui  re- 

sistebant,  although  the  first  ranks  had  fallen,  still  the 

others  resistefl  vigorously. 

[H.  585,  586,  I,  II;  (515)  ;  LM.  872,  875;  A.  527,  549;  (313);  G. 
603-606;  B.  309.] 

172.  Dum,  modo,  dummodo,  if  only,  provided  that,  intro- 
ducing a  proviso,  take  the  subjunctive : 

oderint,  dum  metuant,  let  them  hate,  provided  (if  only)  they 
fear. 
[H.  587;  (513,1);  LM.920;  A.  528;  (314);  G.  573;  B.  310.] 


dum 


CONCESSION.    PROVISO.    CAUSE.    CHARACTERISTIC,  ETC     83 

Different  Uses  of  Dum 

Review  102,  2,  156. 

'  =     while,         present  indicative. 

r  ( I )  Indicative  to  denote  actual  event, 

=     until,        <  (2)  Subjunctive  to  express  anticipa-^ 

L  tion  or  expectancy. 

{ provided,  1      ,  .       ^. 
=  H    -y.      /       r  subjunctive. 
L       [  if  only,    J 

173.  A  clause  that  denotes  cause  may  be  expressed  as 
follows : 

1.  By  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  and  the  indicative^  when 
the  reason  is  that  of  the  writer  or  speaker ;  with  the  sub- 
junctive, when  the  reason  is  regarded  as  that  of  ariother, 

Aedui  Caesari  gratias  egerunt,  quod  se  periculo  liberavisset, 

the  Aedui  thanked  Caesar  because  he  had  delivered  them 
from  danger.  (The  subjunctive,  liberavisset,  shows  that 
the  reason  is  that  of  the  Aedui,  not  the  writer's  reason.) 
quoniam  supplicatio  decreta  est,  celebratote  illos  dies,  since 
a  thanksgiving  has  been  decreed^  celebrate  those  days, 
(The  reason  is  that  of  the  writer.) 

2.  By  cum  and  the  subjunctive : 

quae  cum  ita  sint,  perge,  since  these  things  are  so,  proceed, 

3.  Sometimes  by  the  participle.     See  Zy,  3. 

4.  By  a  relative  and  the  subjunctive. 

6  fortunate  adulescens,  qui  tuae  virtutis  Homerum  praeco- 
nem  inveneris,  O  fortunate  youths  since  you  have  found 
a  Homer  as  the  herald  of  your  valor, 

[H.  588,  598 ;  (516,  517)  ;  LM.  851,  863  ;  A.  540,  549;  (321,  326)  ; 
G.  538-541 ;  B.  286.] 


84  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

174.  Relative  of  Characteristic.  —  The  simplest  use  of 
a  relative  clause  is  to  state  2ifact  about  the  antecedent,  as : 
puer,  quern  vidi,  adest,  the  boy^  whom  I  saw^  is  here.  The 
indicative  mood  is  then  used.  When,  however,  the  relative 
clause  expresses  an  essential  quality  or  characteristic  of  a?i 
indefinite  antecedent^  the  subjunctive  is  used,  as  nemo  est 
qui  dicat,  there  is  nobody  who  says,  etc. 

The  relative  clause  of  characteristic  is  necessary  to  complete  the 
meaning  of  the  sentence ;  therefore,  to  leave  it  out  would  destroy  the 
sentence.  A  relative  with  the  indicative,  however,  merely  expresses 
an  additional  fact  about  the  antecedent ;  therefore,  it  may  be  omitted 
and  a  complete  statement  still  remains.  Compare  the  two  examples 
just  given.  In  the  first,  leave  out  "  whom  I  saw,"  and  a  complete  state- 
ment "the  boy  is  here"  remains.  In  the  second,  omit  "who  says," 
and  the  rest  of  the  sentence  "there  is  nobody"  seems  incomplete,  as 
we  naturally  expect  a  clause  to  fill  out  the  meaning.  This  test,  then, 
will  often  help  the  student  to  determine  whether  a  given  relative  clause 
expresses  an  essential  characteristic : 

quae  civitas  est  quae  n5n  everti  possit  ?  what  state  is  there  which  can- 
not be  overthrown? 

The  relative  of  characteristic  is  especially  common  after  such  expres- 
sions as : 

sunt  qui,  there  are  some  who. 
multi  sunt  qui,  there  are  many  who, 

nemo  est  qui,   \  _,,  , 

-11         i.      -  f  there  is  no  one  who, 
nullus  est  qui,  J 

quis  est  qui,  who  is  there  who  ? 
solus  est  qui,  he  is  the  only  one  who. 
And  others. 
I.   Dignus,  worthy;  indignus,  unworthy;  aptus,  fit;  id5neus,  suit- 
able, are  often  followed  by  a  relative  and  the  subjunctive, 
idoneus  qui  impetret,yf/  to  obtain. 

[H.  591,  I,  5,  6,  7;  (503)  ;  LM.  836-838;  A.  535,  a,  b,  f;  (320,  a, 
b,  f)  ;  G.  631,  1,2;  B.  283,  I,  2 ;  282,  3.] 

175.  Relative  clauses  are  more  frequent  in  Latin  than 
in  English.     Their  various  uses  are  mentioned  below : 


CONCESSION.     PROVISO.    CAUSE.    CHARACTERISTIC,   ETC.      8$ 

1.  With  the  indicative  to  state  a  descriptive  fact  dhout 
the  antecedent.     See  174. 

2.  With  the  subjunctive  to  express  the  essential  charac- 
teristic.    See  174. 

3.  With  the  subjunctive  to  denote  purpose.    See  143,  i. 

4.  With  the  subjunctive  to  denote  result.     See  145,  i. 

5.  With  the  subjunctive  to  express  cause  and  conces- 
sion.    See  173,  4. 

6.  A  relative  pronoun  may  be  used  instead  of  si,  if,  to 
form  the  protasis  of  any  one  of  the  four  classes  of  con- 
ditional sentences.     See  126. 

(Simple.)  quicumque  hoc  facit,  errat,  zvhoever  does  this  makes 
a  mistake,     (quicumque  =  si  quis,  if  any  one.) 

(Contrary  to  fact.)  quicumque  hoc  fecisset,  errasset,  whoever 
had  done  this  would  have  made  a  mistake. 
Such  sentences  are  called  conditional  relative  sentences. 

176.    Translate : 

1.  I  sent  a  messenger  to  inform  him. 

2.  Since  you  think  it  is  best,  I  will  go. 

3.  He  was  put  to  death,  because  (they  said)  he  had  be- 
trayed his  country. 

4.  Cicero  was  worthy  ^  of  being  elected  consul. 

5.  He  went  into  the  front  ranks  although  he  had  no 
shield. 

6.  There  are  many  soldiers  who  like  to  linger  around 
the  camp. 

7.  He  came  to  help  me  in  spite  of  the  fact  that^  he  was 
my  enemy. 

8.  The  Gauls  with  whom  Caesar  fought  were  very  brave. 

9.  I  will  do  it,  provided  you  help  me. 

1  See  174,  I. 

*  in  spite  of  the  fact  that.     What  conjunction  expresses  this  idea? 


S6 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


LESSON   23 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE 
177.    Review  the  grammatical  principles  of  141-175. 


178.    Learn  thoroughly  the 
words : 

1.  Clauds. 

2.  facilis. 

3.  transeo. 

4.  rogo. 

5.  telum. 

6.  cohortor. 

7.  patior. 

8.  sino. 

9.  credo. 

10.  piger. 

11.  desero. 

12.  posco. 

13.  resisto. 

14.  praeceps. 

15.  exspecto. 

16.  polliceor. 

17.  finis. 

18.  impetro. 

19.  iuvo. 


meanings  of  the  following 

20.  mando. 

21.  iubeo. 

22.  porta. 

23.  portus. 

24.  vito. 

25.  subito,  repente. 

26.  moneo. 

27.  iacie. 

28.  Conor. 

29.  constituO. 

30.  prohibeO. 

31.  recuso. 

32.  frumentum. 

33.  moror. 

34.  morior. 

35.  spero. 

36.  fido,  confido. 

37.  idoneus 

38.  prodo. 


179.  Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  EngHsh  from  the  words  in  178,  illustrating  the  gram- 
matical principles  of  141-175.  These  sentences  may  be 
given  for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 


PART   II 

CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR 

Book  I 

Note.  The  student  should  not  depend  on  the  English-Latin  vocabulary  for  the 
Latin  words.  The  Latin  text  upon  which  each  exercise  is  based  should  always 
be  consulted  for  the  proper  words  or  phrases. 

i8o  CHAPTER   I 


a,  hi  lingua  inter  se  differunt. 

b.  proximi  GermanTs. 

c.  minime  .  .  .  saepe. 

d,  initium  capit  a. 


a.  these  differ  from  one  another 

in  language. 

b,  nearest  the  Germans. 

c.  very  seldom. 

d,  begins  at. 


1.  There  are  three  parts  in  Gaul  as  a  whole. 

2.  All  of  us  differed  from  one  another  in  many  ways.^ 

3.  The  Belgae  are  nearest  the  Rhine. 

4.  The   Gauls  very   seldom    surpass   the   Germans   in 
bravery. 

5.  It  has  been  said  that  Gaul  begins  at  the  river  Rhine. 


a. 

civitati  persuasit  ut  exirent. 

a.  he   persuaded   the   state  to 
go  forth. 

b. 

his  rebus  fiebatf. 

b,  the  result  of  this  was. 

€. 

una  ex  parte. 

€,   on  one  side. 

1  ways  =  things. 

8 

7 

88 


LATIN   TROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


1.  Orgetorix  persuaded  the  Helvetians  to  get  possession 
of  Gaul. 

2.  The  Rhine  bounds  the  Helvetians  on  one  side. 

3.  It  was  very  easy  to  form^  a  conspiracy. 

4.  The  result  of  this  was  that  Caesar  waged  war  on  the 
Helvetians. 


182 


CHAPTER   HI 


a.  quam  maximas. 

b,  ad  eas  res  conficiendas. 


non  esse  dubium  quTn 
plurimum  Helvetil  pos- 
sent. 


a,  as  great  as  possible. 

b,  to  accomplish  these  things, 

or,  for  the  purpose 
of  carrying  out  these 
plans. 

c,  that  there  was  no  doubt  that 

the  Helvetians  were  the 
most  powerful. 


1.  They  got  together  as  many  carts  as  possible. 

2.  Orgetorix  was  chosen  to  undertake  this  embassy. 

3.  He   persuaded   them   to   exchange^   an   oath-bound 
pledge. 

4.  There  is   no   doubt  that  the   Helvetians   are  very 
powerful. 


183  CHAPTER  IV 

a.  poenam  sequi  oportebat. 

b,  ne  causam  diceret  se  eripuit. 


c.  neque  abest  suspTcio  quTn 
ipse  sibi  mortem  con- 
sciverit. 


a.  punishment  must  (had  to) 
follow. 

b.  he      saved     himself     from 

pleading  his  case. 

c.  and    there    is    a    suspicion 

that        he        committed 
suicide. 


1  form  =  make. 


8  Do  not  use  the  infinitive. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  89 

1 .  Orgetorix  ought  not  to  be  burned. 

2.  He  gathered  together  all  the  friends  that  he  had. 

3.  He  will  save  himself  from  pleading  his  case. 

4.  The  Helvetians  think  that  he  committed  suicide. 


184  CHAPTER  V 


a.  e  finibus  suis  exeunt. 

b,  paratiores    ad    omnia    peri- 

cula  subeunda. 


a.  they  emigrate. 

b.  more   ready  to  undergo  all 

dangers. 


1.  The  Helvetii  nevertheless  attempted  to  emigrate. 

2.  Each  man  was  more  ready  to  take  grain. 

3.  They  persuaded  their  neighbors  to  adopt  the  same 
plan. 

185  CHAPTER  VI 


a.  bono    animo    in    populum 

R5manum. 

b,  L.  Pisone,  A.  Gablnio  con- 

sulibus. 


a.  friendly   (or  well)  disposed 

toward   the  Roman  peo- 
ple. 

b.  in  the  consulship  of  Lucius 

Piso  and  Aulus  Gabinius. 


1.  The  road  is  so  ^  narrow  that  carts  can  hardly  be 
hauled  one  by  one. 

2.  The  Helvetii  thought  that  the  Allobroges  were  not 
well  disposed  toward  Caesar. 

3.  In  our  consulship  they  were  compelled  to  go  through 
their  territories. 

4.  When  the  bridge  had  been  built,^  they  got  everything 
ready. 

1  tam.  *     2  facio. 


90 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


i86 


CHAPTER  VII 


a,  HelvetiT  certiores  facti  sunt. 

b,  legates  mittunt  qui  dicerent. 

c,  dum  milites  convenlrent. 


a,  the  Helvetii  were  informed 

(or  learned). 

b,  they  sent  ambassadors  to  say. 

c,  until     the    soldiers     should 

assemble. 


1.  Caesar  set  out  from  Geneva. 

2.  He  will  send  an  ambassador  to  inform  them. 

3.  Men  of  unfriendly  spirit  will  not  refrain  from  wrong- 
doing. 

4.  He  will  deliberate  until  they  return. 

5.  Caesar  is  informed  of  this. 


187 


CHAPTER  VIII 


a.  milia  passuum  decern. 

b.  negat  se  posse. 

c.  hoc  conatu  destiterunt. 


a.  ten  miles. 

b.  he  says  he  cannot. 

c.  they  gave  up  this  attempt. 


1.  A  wall  was  extended  for  sixteen  miles. 

2.  Caesar  says  they  cannot  cross  without  his  ^  consent. 

3.  After  the  redoubts  had  been  fortified,^  the  ambassa- 
dors came  back. 

4.  The  soldiers  will  not  give  up  the  fortification  of  the 
camp. 


188 


CHAPTER   IX 


a.  Sequanis     invitis,     ire     non 

poterant. 

b,  Orgetorlgis    filiam    in    ma- 

trimonium  duxerat. 


if  the  Sequani  were  unwill- 
ing, they  could  not  go. 

he  had  married  the  daugh- 
ter of  Orgetorix. 


1  To  whom  does  this  refer  ? 


2  Use  the  participle. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


91 


1.  The  Helvetii  cannot  emigrate,  if  Caesar  is  unwilling. 

2.  By  the  intercession  of  Dumnorix  they  could  persuade 
them. 

3.  He  wished  to  marry  her. 

4.  They  exchanged  as  many  hostages  as  possible. 


189 


CHAPTER   X 


Helvetiis  esse  in  animo. 
magno    cum    periculo    pro- 

vinciae  futiirum. 
munltioni    Labienum    prae- 

ficit. 


a.  that  the  Helvetii  intend. 

b.  that      it     would     be     very 

dangerous  for  the  province. 

c.  he   puts   Labienus   in  com- 

mand of  the  fortification. 


I.  The  Helvetii  intended  to  do  this. 

"2.    The  Helvetii  perceived  that  it  would  be  very  danger- 
ous for  them  to  march  ^  through  the  province. 

3.  He  put  a  lieutenant  in  command  of  the  legion. 

4.  In  three  days  he  arrived  among  the  Allobroges. 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   I-X 

190.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  declensions  of  nouns  and  adjectives, 
and  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  : 


I. 

finis. 

9- 

legio. 

2. 

finitimus. 

10. 

exercitus. 

3. 

flumen. 

II. 

pars,  several  meanings 

4. 

copia,  sing,  and  pi. 

12. 

res  frumentaria. 

5- 

tempus. 

13. 

civitas. 

6. 

iter. 

14. 

proelium. 

7- 

animus,  sing,  and  pi. 

15- 

singuli. 

8. 

miles. 

16. 

omnis,  sing,  and  pi. 

1  Do  not  use  inf 

mitive 

;  see  text. 

92 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


17.  quisque. 

18.  reliquus. 

19.  alius. 

20.  alter. 

2 1 .  unus. 

22.  magnus,  compare. 

23.  multus,  compare. 

24.  nuUus. 

25.  nonnuUus. 

26.  uUus. 

27.  superior. 

28.  contendo. 

29.  transeo. 

30.  gero. 

31.  prohibeo. 

32.  persuadeo. 

33.  consisto. 


34.  constituo. 

35.  instituo. 

36.  proficiscor. 
37-  cogo. 

38.  sequor. 

39.  iubeo. 

40.  impero. 

41.  impetro. 

42.  conficio. 

43.  utor. 

44.  convenio. 

45.  existimo. 

46.  praesum. 

47.  antecedo  |  with  the 

48.  praecedoJ      ace. 

49.  praesto. 

50.  praeficio. 


191.    Review   thoroughly    the    following    principles    of 
syntax : 

I.  Limit  of  motion,  17. 

z.  Extent  of  space  and  duration  of  time,  16. 

3.  Dative  with  compound  verbs,  33. 

4.  Ablative  with  utor^  etc.,  44. 

5.  Indirect  statements  —  main  clause,  160. 

6.  Construction  with /'^n'//^^^^^,  32,  147. 

7.  Construction  after  verbs  of  commanding,  147,  148. 


IQ2.  The  instructor  should  form  original  EngHsh  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  190  and  the  constructions 
of  191.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  93 


193  CHAPTER  XI 


a.  oppida       expiignari       non 

debuerint. 

b.  sibi  nihil  esse  reliqul. 

c.  Caesar    non   exspectandum 

sibi  statuit. 


a.  their    towns    ought    not    to 

have  been  captured. 

b.  that  they  had   nothing  left. 

c.  Caesar     decided     that     he 

ought  not  to  wait. 


1.  Their  fields  ought  ^  *  not  to  be  devastated. 

2.  We  have  nothing  left  except  our  fields. 

3.  The  Aedui  ought  ^  to  have  been  able  to  defend  them- 
selves and  their  possessions. 

4.  We  must  not  wait. 

194  CHAPTER  XH 


a.  ea     princeps    poenas    per- 

solvit. 

b.  Pisonem      eodem      proelio 

quo      Cassium      interfe- 
cerant. 


a.  that   was    the    first   to   pay 

the  penalty. 

b,  they  had  killed  Piso  in  the 

same  battle  with  Cassius. 


1.  I  could  not  judge  by^  looking  at  it  in  which  direction 
the  Sa6ne  flowed. 

2.  They  were  not  informed  that  the  legions  had  started 
from  camp. 

3.  Caesar  was   the   first  to  inflict  a   disaster   on    the 
Helvetii.. 

4.  Cassius  was  killed  in  the  same  battle  with  Piso. 

5.  Caesar  crossed  the  river  so  quickly  ^  that  the  enemy 
fled. 

*  These  numbers  in  the  foot-notes  refer  to  sections  of  this  book. 

1  See  III,  112.  8  celeriter. 

2  "  by  looking  at  it,"  use  a  single  word. 


94  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

195  CHAPTER   XIII 


a,  pontem  in  Araii  faciendum 

curat. 

b,  ne  committeret  ut  is  locus 

nomen  caperet. 


a.  he  has  a  bridge  built  over 

the  Saone. 

b,  let  him  not  cause  {^or  allow) 

this  place  to   receive   its 
name. 


1.  Caesar  had  his  army  led  across  in  one  day. 

2.  Divico  said,  "  Remember  ^  our  valor." 

3.  "  If  you  remember  the  destruction  of  your  army,  you 
will  not  persist  in  war." 

4.  He  said  that,  if  Caesar  would  remember  ^  that  old 
disaster,  he  would  not  persist  in  war. 

196  CHAPTER  XIV 


a,  Caesar   respondit    sibi    mi- 

nus dubitationis  darl. 

b,  commissum  (esse)  a  se  qua 

re  timeret. 

€,   secundiores  res. 


a.  Caesar  replied  that  he  had 

less  hesitation. 

b.  that  he  had  done  anything 

to  make  him   afraid    (to 
be  afraid  of). 

c.  prosperity. 


1.  I  have  done  nothing  to  be  afraid  of. 

2.  Caesar  says  that  he  will  remember  the  injuries  which 
they  have  inflicted. 

3.  Although  the  gods  grant  you  prosperity,  still  they 
will  punish  you  for  your  crimes. 

4.  Caesar  replied,  "  I  have  less  hesitation." 

5.  Caesar  thought  that  they  would  not  apologize  to  him 
for  the  wrongs  which  had  been  done. 

1  See  25.  a  Review  carefully  169. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR                                    95 

197 

CHAPTER   XV 

a.  alieno  loco. 

a.  on  unfavorable  ground. 

^.  pauci  de  nostrls. 

If.  a  few  of  our  men. 

c.   satis  habebat. 

c.   he  deemed  it  sufficient,  was 
satisfied. 

1.  He  sent  ahead  a  few  of  ^  the  cavalry  to  see  in  what 
direction  they  had  marched. 

2.  The  enemy  followed  so  eagerly  that  they  joined  battle 
on  unfavorable  ground. 

3.  Caesar  is  satisfied  to  harass  the  enemy's  rear. 


198 

a.  ne  pabuli  quidem. 


^.  diem  ex  die. 
c,   magna  ex  parte. 


CHAPTER   XVI 


a.  not  even  of  fodder  (the 
emphatic  word  is  always 
placed  between). 

^.  from  day  to  day. 

c,  in  great  measure,  chiefly, 
very  largely. 

be   brought   up  the  river  in 


1.  Not  even   grain  could 
boats. 

2.  Caesar  was  put  off  by  the  Aedui  from  day  to  day. 

3.  The  day  is  at  hand  when^  grain  ought  to  be  bought 

4.  Although  ^  the  war  had  been  undertaken  chiefly  be 
cause  of  the  entreaties  of  Liscus,  yet  Caesar  was  deserted 


199 

a.  pliirimum  valere. 


CHAPTER   XVn 


hos  multitudinem    deterrere 
ne  friimentum  conferant. 


1  See  23.  I. 

a  ••  although 


to  have  very  great  influ- 
ence. 

that  these  prevent  the  multi- 
tude from  bringing  grain. 


2  Do  not  use  cum,  see  text, 
undertaken,"  see  tam  .  .  .  hostibus  in  text. 


96 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


1.  Some  people  have  more  influence  than  the  officers. 

2.  They  said  that,  if  the  Romans  were  victorious,  thej 
would  deprive  the  Aedui  of  their  liberty. 

3.  I  don't  doubt  that  Liscus  spoke  under^  compulsion. 

4.  Caesar  perceived   that  they  were   frightened  from 
doing  this. 

200  CHAPTER  XVIII 


a.  pluribus  praesentibus. 

b.  summam  in  spem  venire. 

c.  quem  auxilio  Caesari  Aedui 

miserant. 


a,  in  the  presence  of  many. 

b,  that    he    had    the    greatest 
hopes. 

c,  which  the  Aedui  had  sent 
to  help  Caesar. 

1.  Caesar  did  not  discuss  these  matters  in  Dumnorix's 
presence. 

2.  Dumnorix  was  a  man  of  great  liberality.^ 

3.  When  I  bid,  who  will  dare  bid  against  me } 

4.  I  have  learned  that  Dumnorix  did  not  favor  Caesar,^ 
because  he  was  a  Roman. 

5.  I  have  very  great  hopes  of  buying  up  the  revenues 
at  a  low  price.* 

6.  I  have  come  to  help  you. 

7.  A  few  days  ago  the  cavalry  had  fled. 


201 


CHAPTER  XIX 


a.  satis  esse  causae  arbitraba- 

tur  qua  re  in  eum    ani- 
madverteret. 

b.  ne  offenderet  verebatur. 

c.  hortitur  ut  de  eo  statuat. 


a,  he    thought    he    had    suffi- 

cient   reason  for  punish- 
ing him. 

b,  he   feared    that    he    would 

offend. 

c,  he    urges    him    to    punish 

him. 


I  •*  under  compulsion  "=having  been  compelled. 

•  See  49,  22.  «  See  32.  *  See  50, 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  97 

1.  The  Romans   have   sufficient   reason   for  punishing 
Dumnorix. 

2.  I  will  have  ^  him  called  before  me. 

3.  We  are  afraid  that    Caesar   will   punish    Dumnorix 
without  the  knowledge  ^  of  his  brother. 

4.  I  urged  him  to  converse  with  you. 

5.  What  did  they  say  in  my  presence.'* 

202  CHAPTER  XX 


a.  nee  quemquam  ex  eo  plus 

quam  se  doloris  capere. 

b.  qua  ex  re  futurum  (ut  and 

subj.) 

c.  tanti  eius   apud   se   gratiam 

esse  ostendit. 


a.  and  that  no  one  feels  more 

pain    in   consequence    of 
this  than  himself. 

b.  that  the  result  of  this  would 

be  that,  etc. 

c.  he  shows  that  his  regard  for 

him  is  so  great. 


1.  No  one  felt  more  pain  as  a  result  of  this  than 
Diviciacus. 

2.  While  I  had  very  little  power  at  home,  he  used  all 
his  resources  to  my  destruction. 

3.  My  regard  for  you  is  so  great,  that  I  urge  you  to 
avoid  ^  all  suspicion. 

4.  The  result  of  it  was  that  he  pardoned  the  wrong  for 
his  brother's  sake. 

5.  I  did  not  know  with  whom  he  was  talking. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XI-XX 

203.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs,  and 
declensions  of  nouns. 

1  See  in  text  —  quod  obsides  .  .  .  curSsset. 

2  Cf.  inscientibus  ipsls  in  text.  8  Do  not  use  infinitive. 

LATIN    PROSE  COMP. —  7 


98 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


1.  debeo. 

2.  exspectiJ. 

3.  statuo. 

4.  adgredior. 

5.  interficio. 

6.  committo,  several  mean- 

ings. 

7.  coepi. 

8.  consuesco. 

9.  discedo. 

10.  poUiceor. 

11.  cado. 

12.  praetermittQ. 

13.  se  conferre. 

14.  relinquo. 

15.  queror. 

16.  quaero. 

17.  impedio. 

18.  dubito. 

19.  cognosco  {de,  not  ace). 

20.  impedimentum. 

21.  dubitatio. 

22.  calamitas. 

23.  memini. 

24.  reminiscor. 

25.  praesidium. 


26.  concede.     Cf.  no.  9. 

27.  alienus. 

28.  pauci. 

29.  agmen  novissimum. 

30.  mille. 

31.  cotidie. 

32.  publice. 

33.  frigus. 

34.  (prex.) 

35.  concilium, 

36.  consilium. 

37.  nemo,  nuUius. 

38.  pretium. 

39.  equester. 

40.  supplicium. 

41.  lacrima. 

42.  ops,  sing,  and  pi. 

43.  pernicies. 

44.  vulgus  (note  gender). 

45.  dolor. 

46.  custos. 

47.  quisquam. 

48.  quisque. 

49.  studium. 

50.  liberi. 


204.    Review   thoroughly   the   following    principles    off 
syntax : 

1.  Genitive  of  the  whole,  23. 

2.  Ablative  of  separation,  39. 

3.  Dative  of  purpose ;  dative  of  agent ;  37,  95. 

4.  Constructions  with  oportet  and  debed^  in,  1 12. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


99 


5.  Passive  periphrastic  conjunction ;  gerundive  with 
curdy  95.^ 

6.  Clauses  of  result,  144,  145. 

205.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences  employing  the  words  of  203  and  the  constructions 
of  204.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


206 


CHAPTER  XXI 


a.  qui  cognoscerent  misit. 
J.   qui    rel    militaris    peritissi- 
mus  habebatur. 


a.  he  sent  men  to  ascertain. 

b.  who    was     considered    very 

skillful  in  military  affairs. 


1.  Scouts  informed  Caesar  that  the  ascent  was  easy. 

2.  He  will  send  men  to  find  out  where  the  enemy  have 
gone. 

3.  He  said  that  Considius  was  considered  skillful  in  mili- 
tary matters. 

4.  Show  me  what  your  plan  is. 


207 

a.  equo  admisso. 

b.  multo  die. 


CHAPTER   XXII 


c.   quo  consuerat  intervallo. 


a,  at  full  speed. 

b,  late  in  the  day. 

c,  at  the  usual  interval. 


1.  He  found  out  that  the  enemy  were  coming  at  full 
speed. 

2.  Late  in  the  day,  Caesar  was  informed  that  the  enemy 
were  not  more  than  a  mile  from  his  camp. 

1  When  no  direct  references  are  given  to  Part  I,  the  student  should  search  the 
text  and  refer  to  his  grammar  for  the  desired  construction. 


lOO 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


3.  Do  not  join  battle  unless  they  attack  us. 

4.  He  seized  ^  the  mountain  and  awaited  the  enemy. 

5.  They  followed  at  their  usual  speed. 


208 


CHAPTER   XXni 


a.  blduum  supererat  cum  fru- 

mentum      metiri       opor- 
teret. 

b,  eo  magis. 


a,  two     days     remain,    within 

which  (before)  grain 
ought  to  be  measured 
out,  etc. 

b.  the  more  so,  all  the  more. 


1.  The  commander  ought  to  look  out  for  supplies. 

2.  The  more  so  because  only  a  day  remains  before  we 
must  begin  battle. 

3.  I  think  they  have  changed  their  plan  2  and  will  cut 
us  off  from  supplies. 


209 


CHAPTER  XXIV 


a.  m  summo  lugo. 

b.  sub  primam  nostram  aciem 

successerunt. 


a.  on  top  of  the  ridge. 

b.  they  advanced  close  to  our 

first  line. 


1.  He  sends  two  legions  to  fill  up  the  top  of  the  hill. 

2.  Order  your  men  to  follow  with  the  baggage. 

3.  They  will  form^  a  phalanx  and  advance  close  to  our 
line. 

210  CHAPTER   XXV 


a.  in  eos  impetum  fecerunt. 

b.  Gallls   magno    erat   impedi- 

ment©. 

c.  conversa  signa  intulerunt. 


a.  they  attacked  them. 

b.  the     Gauls      were     greatly 

hindered. 

c.  they      faced      about      and 

charged. 


1  Do  not  use  the  indicative.  2  «« changed  their  plan,"  use  abl.  absolute. 

"  Do  not  use  the  indicative. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  >,'  i^Olf* 

1.  Caesar  removed  all  of  the  horses  in  order  to  equalize 
the  danger. 

2.  We  are  greatly  hindered  in  fighting,  because  we  can- 
not throw  away  our  shields. 

3.  When   we    attacked    them,   they   withdrew    to   the 
mountain. 

4.  They  guarded  those  who  ^  had  been  conquered. 

5.  Face  about  and  renew  the  fight.    , 

211  CHAPTER   XXVI 


a,  diu  atque  acriter  pugnatum 

est. 

b,  ad  multam  noctem. 

c,  se    eodem    loco    quo    Hel- 

vetios  habiturum. 


a.  long      and      fiercely     they 

fought. 

b.  till  late  at  night. 

c.  that     he     would     consider 

them    in   the   same   light 
as  the  Helvetians. 


1.  As  our  men  came  up,  the  enemy  fought  with  them 
long  into  the  night. 

2.  If  you  help  them  in  any  way,  I  will  consider  you  in 
the  same  Hght  as  I  do  ^  the  enemy. 

3.  There  will  be  a  vigorous  fight  around  the  baggage. 

4.  Letters  are  sent  to   the    Lingones   not   to  help  the 
Helvetians. 

5.  Our  men  delayed  burying  ^  their  dead  for  many  days. 


212  CHAPTER  XXVII 

a.  dum  ea  conquiruntur. 

b,  prima  nocte.  x 


a,  while     they  were     hunting 
these  up. 

b,  at  nightfall. 


1  Do  not  use  the  relative.    See  87.  2  ••  i  do,"  omit. 

*  use  prep,  and  noun. 


I02 


LATIN   ?^OSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


1.  When  he  had  demanded  their  arms,  with  tears  they 
obeyed. 

2.  While  they  were  being  punished,  they  wept. 

3.  At  the  beginning  of  night,  they  did  not  surrender 
their  arms. 

4.  I  think  they  will  leave  camp. 

213       CHAPTERS   XXVIII   AND   XXIX 


a,  Helvetios  revert!  iussit. 

b,  Allobrogibus     imperavit     ut 

facerent. 

c,  parem  atque. 


a.  he   ordered   the   Helvetians 

to  return. 

b.  he  ordered    the  Allobroges 

to  furnish. 

c.  same  as. 


1.  I  will  order  1  them  to  hand  over  the  fugitives. 

2.  The  Aedui  requested  him  to  grant  this. 

3.  I  ordered  ^  them  to  be  received  in  surrender. 

4.  They  have  the  same  liberty  as  we  have. 

5.  The  sum  total  is  many  thousand. 


214 


CHAPTER  XXX 


a,  petierunt  uti    id    facere   li- 

ceret. 

b,  iure  iurando  ne  quis   enun- 

tiaret  inter  se  sanxerunt. 


a.  they   begged   permission  to 

do  this. 

b.  they    ordained   by   an   oath 

with  one  another  that  no 
one  should  disclose. 


1.  At  the  completion  of  the  war,  Caesar  got  possession 
of  many  states. 

2.  Although^  I  have  inflicted  punishment  on  you,  stil 
you  congratulate  me. 

3.  I  beg  permission  to  appoint  a  council. 


1  Use  impero. 


2  Use  iubeo. 


«  See  171 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 


103 


4.    Ordain  under  oath  that  no  one  make  war  on  the 
Romans. 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XXI-XXX 

215.  Review  thoroughly  the  meaning  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs,  and  the 
declensions  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  reverto. 

2.  licet. 

3.  habeo,  in  pass. 

4.  peto. 

5.  posco. 

6.  postulO. 

7.  consido. 

8.  confido. 

9.  cohortor. 

10.  audeo. 

1 1 .  sustineo. 

12.  bellum  infero,  w.  dat.  or 

in  and  ace. 

13.  resisto. 

14.  intermitto. 

15.  permitto. 

16.  amitto. 

17.  redeo. 

18.  pared. 

19.  moror. 

20.  morior. 

2 1 .  aperio. 

22.  vereor. 

23.  dedo. 

24.  dediticius. 


25.  deditio. 

26.  idem. 

27.  par. 

28.  similis. 

29.  signum. 

30.  rursus. 

31.  prope. 

32.  acies. 

33.  latus. 

34.  latus. 

35.  vulnus. 

36.  nuntius. 

37.  vesper. 

38.  ratio. 

39.  usus. 

40.  saltis. 

41.  condicio. 

42.  atque,  see  82. 

43.  peritus.     imperitus. 

44.  communis. 

45.  opportunus. 

46.  medius. 

47.  quantus. 

48.  tantus. 

49.  acriter. 


104  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

2 1 6.  Review  thoroughly  the  following  principles  of 
syntax : 

1.  Translations  of  the  ablative  absolute. 

2.  Ablative  of  degree  of  difference,  48. 

3.  Genitive  with  adjectives;  dative  with  adjectives,  24,  35. 

4.  Impersonal  verbs,  27.     (Consult  grammar.) 

5.  Double  accusative  with  verbs  of  asking,  etc.,  15. 

6.  Construction  with/^/<?,  quaeroy  postuld^  15,  I. 

7.  Relative  clauses,  175. 

217.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  215  and  the  constructions 
of  216.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 

218  CHAPTER  XXXI 

a,  semel  atque  iterum. 


b,  neque  recusaturos  quo  mi- 
nus essent. 

€,  qui  adduci  non  potuerit  ut 
iuraret. 

d.  nobilissimi  cuiusque. 

e,  de  omnibus  supplicium  su- 

mere. 
/  deterrere    ne    maior    multi- 
tudo  traducatur. 


a,  again  and  again,  more  than 

once. 

b,  nor  refuse  to  be. 

c,  who  could  not   be   induced 

to  take  an  oath. 

d,  of  all  of  the  highest  rank. 

e,  to  inflict  punishment  on  all, 

to  punish  all. 

f,  to  frighten  a  greater  multi- 

tude from  crossing. 


1.  May  we  treat  with  you  about  what  they  said  .'* 

2.  Diviciacus  says  that  the  Germans  have  been  called 
in  by  the  Sequani. 

3.  We  have  been  defeated  ^  again  and  again  and  have 
lost  very  many  men. 

1  Do  not  use  indicative. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


105 


4.  He  says  that  those  who  were  very  powerful  have 
given  hostages. 

5.  We  won't  refuse  to  implore  aid  of  the  Romans. 

6.  You  are  the  only  one  who  ^  can't  be  induced  to  ask 
for  help. 

7.  Not  being  bound  ^  by  an  oath,  I  shall  come  to  Rome. 

8.  A  serious  disaster  befell  the  vanquished. 

9.  The  result  will  be  in  a  few  years  that  we  shall  all 
be  driven  out  of  this  place. 

10.  All  of  the  highest  rank  were  defeated. 

11.  If  everything  isn't  done  according  to  my  wish,  I 
shall  have  to  seek  other  dwellings. 

12.  Caesar  frightened  the  Germans  from  emigrating. 

13.  We  shall  punish  you. 


CHAPTER  XXXII 


a,  not  even  in  secret. 

b,  the  Sequani  must  endure  all 

tortures. 


219 

a.  ne  in  occulto  quidem. 

b,  Sequanis     omnes    cruciatus 

essent  perferendi. 

1.  What  was  the  cause  of  this  behavior?^ 

2.  I  asked  him  who  made  the  speech. 

3.  He  noticed  that  they  did  not  dare  even  to  complain. 

4.  We   ought  not   to  dread   his  cruelty  when   he  is 
absent.* 

220  CHAPTER  XXXIII 

a.  sibi  earn  rem  curae  futuram. 


b,  sibi    temperaturos   quin  ex- 

Irent. 

c.  quam  matiirrime. 


1  See  174. 
*'*when  . 


2  See  8s.  3. 
.  absent,"  use  one  word. 


that  he  would  look  out  for 

this  matter, 
that  they  would  refrain  from 

going  forth, 
as  early  as  possible,  at   the 

earliest  possible  moment. 
*res. 


I06  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

1.  I  will  look  out  for  that. 

2.  It  will  be  dangerous  for  the  Romans,  if  the  Germans 
get  into  the  habit  of  ^  crossing  the  Rhine. 

3.  ArJDvistus  could  not  refrain  from  assuming  insolence. 

4.  I  think    I    ought   to   undertake   this   matter   at  the 
earliest  possible  moment. 


221  CHAPTER  XXXIV 

a.  placuit  ei  ut  mitteret.  I  a,  he  resolved  to  send. 

b,  quid  Caesar!  negoti  esset.        |  b,  what  business  Caesar  had. 

1.  I  am  resolved  to  treat  with  you. 

2.  If  I  had  wished  2  anything,  I  would  have  sent  am- 
bassadors. 

3.  Quote  2  indirectly  after  dlxit.^ 

4.  What  business  have  you  in  Gaul  anyhow  ? 


222  CHAPTER   XXXV 


a,  hanc  gratiam  re  ferret. 

b,  sibi    perpetuam      amicitiam 

cum  eo  futuram. 


a,  he  made  this  return. 

b,  that   he  would  have  lasting 

friendship  with  him. 


1.  What  return  are  you  making  us } 

2.  I  demand  of  you  not  to  lead  any  army  across  the 
Rhine. 

3.  If  you  should*  do  this,  I  would  have  lasting  friend- 
ship with  you. 

4.  If  I  gain  my  request,  I'll  not  neglect  my  friends. 

"^"gtX  .  .  .  of,"  use  one  word.  *  See  123. 

«  See  169,  4,  5.  *  See  125. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


107 


I 


223 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 


a,  qui  faceret. 

d,  intellecturum      quid      Ger- 
mani  possent. 


a.  since  he  made  (see  173,  4). 
d,  he    would    iind     out    what 

strength      the      Germans 

have. 


1.  It  is  a  right  of  war  that  the  conquerors  ^  should  rule 
as  they  wish. 

2.  I  ought  to  exercise  my  right,  since  I  have  conquered 
you. 

3.  If  you  think  we  have  no  strength,  come  on. 

4.  If  you  make  war  on  us,  we  will  pay  the  taxes. 

5.  Quote  4  indirectly  after  dixerunt. 

224   CHAPTERS   XXXVII   AND   XXXVIII 


a,  Aedui  veniebant  questum 
quod  Harudes  popula- 
rentur. 

d,  mons  magna  altitiidine. 


a,  the    Aedui    came    to   com- 

plain because  the  Haru- 
des were  laying  waste. 

b,  a  mountain  of  great  height. 


1.  They  are  complaining  because ^  peace  cannot  be  pur- 
chased even  by  giving  hostages. 

2.  I  must  hasten  by  forced  marches  so  that  their  forces 
may  not  unite. 

3.  The  enemy  are  advancing  to  occupy  the  town. 

4.  Resistance  cannot  easily  be  made,  if  we  do  not  take 
great  precautions. 

5.  The  town  was  very  useful  for  war,  because  ^  it  con- 
tained a  mountain  of  great  size. 

6.  A  river  touchf.s  the  base  of  it  on  either  side. 


1  See  71,  7. 


2  See  173. 


io8 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


225 


CHAPTER   XXXIX 


a.  dum    ad   Vesontionem    mo- 

ratur. 

b.  alius  alia  causa  inlata. 

c.  petebat     ut     discedere     li- 

ceret. 


a.  while  he  was  delaying  near 

Vesontio. 

b.  each      one      presenting     a 

different  excuse. 

c.  begged    permission    to    de- 

part. 


1.  While  we  were  delaying  a  few  days,  the  whole  army- 
was  seized  with  fear. 

2.  The  Germans  are  men  of  marvelous  bravery. 

3.  Caesar  asserted   that   this   panic  started  with  those 
who  had  no  experience  in  war. 

4.  One  presented  one  excuse,  another  another.^ 

5.  Caesar's  troops  will  not  beg  permission  to  advance. 

6.  He  feared  that  they  would  not  be  obedient  to  the 
word  of  command. 


226 


CHAPTER  XL 


a.  quam  in  partem. 

b.  sibi  persuader!. 

c.  quantum  boni. 

d.  pares  esse  nostro  exercituT. 

e.  neque     sui    potestatem    fe- 

cisset. 


a.  in  what  direction. 

b.  that  he  was  persuaded. 

c.  how  much  advantage. 

d.  to  be  a  match  for  our  army. 

e.  and  had  not  given   (them) 

a  chance  at  him. 


1.  I  have  a  right  to  inquire  in  what  direction  we  are 
marching. 

2.  Why  did  he  call  a  council  ? 

3.  We   are   persuaded  ^   that    he    will    not  bring  war 
upon  us. 

1  See  73.  2  See  32,  2. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


109 


4.  If  you  should  lose  confidence  in  your  commander, 
what,  pray,  should  you  fear  ? 

5.  You  can  judge  how  much  courage  the  enemy  have, 
now  that  the  Cimbri  have  been  defeated.  ^ 

6.  The  Romans  feared  that  the  Germans  were  their 
match. 

7.  If  you  give  me  a  chance  at  you,  I  will  defeat  you 
more  by  stratagem  than  valor. 

8.  I  know  that  Caesar  will  take  care  of  this. 

9.  I  know  that  whoever  does  not  advance  ^  has  no  con- 
fidence in  the  general. 

10.   Which  is  the  stronger,  duty  or  fear  ? 

REVIEW   OF  CHAPTERS   XXXI-XL 

227.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
verbs,  memorizing  principal  parts  of  verbs,  declensions  of 
adjectives  and  nouns; 


I. 

recuso. 

14. 

accedO. 

2. 

despero  (de,  not  ace). 

15. 

experior. 

3- 

supplicium  sumo. 

16. 

efficio. 

4. 

adsuefacio. 

17. 

adsum. 

5. 

adsuesco. 

18. 

desum. 

6. 

suscipio. 

19. 

impello. 

7. 

placeo. 

20. 

tempers. 

8: 

gratiam  refers. 

21. 

deterreo. 

9- 

gratiam  habeo. 

22, 

cruciatus. 

10. 

gratias  ago. 

23. 

absens. 

II. 

neglego. 

24. 

mature. 

12. 

praecaveo. 

25. 

negotium. 

13. 

arcesso. 

26. 

omnino. 

1  Use  participle. 

2 

See  166. 

no 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


27.  perpetuus. 

28.  iterum. 

29.  semel. 

30.  vero. 

31.  paulatim. 

32.  paulisper. 

33.  paulum. 

34.  simulatio. 

35.  ordo. 

36.  palus. 

37.  f acinus. 

38.  diligentia. 


39.  magnitude. 

40.  diflacultas. 

41.  conloquium. 

42.  commeatus. 

43.  sedes. 

44.  c6nsuetud5. 

45.  uter. 

46.  uterque. 

47.  plerumque. 

48.  hue. 

49.  praeterea. 

50.  subito. 


228.  Review  thoroughly  the  following  principles  of 
syntax : 

1.  Ablative  of  description,  49. 

2.  Genitive  of  description,  22. 

3.  Genitive  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  with  causa, 
142.  2. 

4.  Supine  in  um,  96. 

5.  Causal  clauses  introduced  by  quod,  173. 

6.  Substantive  clauses  with  verbs  of  hindering,  refusing, 
and  with  verbs  of  accomplishing,  150. 

7.  Indirect  questions,  134. 

229.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  227  and  the  constructions  of 
228.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


230 

a,  ei  gratias  egit. 

b,  a  nostris  abesse. 


CHAPTER  XLI 


a,  thanked  him. 

b,  were  distant  from  ours. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  III 

1.  We  thank  Caesar  for  delivering^  such  a  speech. 

2.  They  were  quite  ready  to  apologize  to  me. 

3.  The   policy  of  the   campaign   is   the   commander's, 
not  ours. 

4.  Scouts  informed  us  that  the  enemy  were  fifty  miles 
away  from  our  camp. 


b 


231  CHAPTER   XLII 

tf.  si  quid  opus  facto  esset. 

b.  in  loco  habiturum. 


a.  if  there   were   any  need  of 

action. 
d,  would  regard  as. 


1.  You  may  do  what  you  have  asked  for. 

2.  Don't  refuse^  me  when  I  ask. 

3.  Caesar   was   afraid    that   the    conference   would   be 
broken  off. 

4.  If  there  is  any  need  of  cavalry,  let  the  soldiers  be 
put  on  horses. 

5.  Regard  us  as  your  friends. 

232  CHAPTER  XLHI 


a.  ubi  eo  ventum  est. 
d,  ipsis  cum  Aeduis  intercede- 
rent. 


a.  when  they  came  there. 

b.  existed   between  themselves 

and  the  Aedui. 


1.  Ariovistus  said  he  would  carry  on  the  conference^ 
on  horseback. 

2.  When  they  had  come  to  the  mound,  Caesar  showed 
what  gifts  the  Senate  had  bestowed. 

3.  Reasons  for  intimacy  exist  between  you  and  them. 

1 "  for  delivering  "=because  he  delivered.  2  See  116. 

•  "carry  on  the  conference,"  one  word. 


112 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


4.  I  was  called  a  friend  by  the  Senate  before  you  came 
into  Gaul. 

5.  I  will  make  this  demand,  not  to  cross  with  your  army. 


233 


CHAPTER   XLIV 


a,  transTsse  Rhenum  sese  roga- 

tum  a  Gallis. 

b,  sibi  praesidio  esse. 

c,  quod  traducat. 


d,  se  prius  in  Gilliam  venisse 
quam  populum  Romanum. 


d. 


that  he  had  crossed  the 
Rhine  at  the  request  oi 
the  Gauls. 

to  be  a  protection  to  him. 

as  to  his  leading,  (tradu- 
cat would  be  indicative 
in  direct  discourLe.) 

that  he  had  come  into  Gaul 
before  the  Roman  people. 


1.  I  will  leave  home  at  your  request. 

2.  I  did  not  make  war  on  you,^  but  you  on  me. 

3.  If  you  wish  to  enjoy  peace,  pay  the  tribute. 

4.  I  crossed  the  Rhine  voluntarily  to  impose  ^  a  tax  on 
the  vanquished. 

5.  If  you  should  be  a  hindrance  to  me,  I  would  not 
seek  your  friendship. 

6.  As  to  my  leaving  my  territory,  I  am  doing  this  to 
defend  myself. 

7.  I  say  that  you  made  an  attack  before  we  did.^ 

8.  Why  ought  you  to  use  our  help  .'* 

9.  I  am  not  so  simple  as  not  to  know  that  Caesar  is 
pretending  friendship. 

10.    He  says  he  will  do  whatever  you  say. 


1  Note  the  order  of  the  Latin  in  the  text,  .  .  .  non  sese  intulisse. 
*  *•  to  impose  "  —  express  in  several  ways.  *  Omit. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


"3 


234  CHAPTERS  XLV  AND   XLVI 

a,  Galliam  esse  Ariovisti. 


b,  quibus     populus     Romanus 

ignovisset. 
€,   committendum     non     puta- 

bat  ut  did  posset. 


a.  that  Gaul  belonged  to  Ari- 

ovistus. 

b,  whom    the    Roman    people 

had  pardoned. 
r.   he  thought  that  no  ground 
should   be  given  for  say- 
ing. 


1.  My  habit  doesn't  allow  me  to  ^  desert  my  allies. 

2.  Gaul  belongs  to  Caesar  rather  than  to  Ariovistus. 

3.  They  would  have  enjoyed  their  own  laws,  had  you 
pardoned  2  them. 

4.  Caesar  orders  his  men   not  to  throw  stones  at  the 
Germans. 

5.  No  ground  ought  to  be  given  for  saying  that  we  ex- 
cluded them  from  the  conference. 

6.  Don't  hurl  back  your  weapons. 


235 


CHAPTER  XLVn 


a.  biduo  post. 

b.  retinerl  quin  conicerent. 

c.  qua  multa  utebatur. 


a,  two  days  afterwards. 

b,  to  be  kept  from  hurling. 

c,  which  he  spoke  fluently. 


1.  Three  days  afterwards  he  said  he  would  send  some 
one  as  an  ambassador. 

2.  I  will  keep  the  enemy  from  ^  throwing  stones  at  you. 

3.  If  you  cannot  go  yourself,  send   a   man  of   great 
courage. 

4.  Can  you  speak  Latin  fluently  } 


1  Don't  use  infinitive.  2  See  123. 

lATIN  PROSE  COMP.  — 8 


«  See  150,  (i)  and  (2), 


114  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

236  CHAPTER  XLVIII 


a.  ut  el  potestas  non  deesset. 

b.  singuli  singulos. 

c.  SI  quid  erat  durius. 


a,  that  he  might  not  lack  the 

opportunity. 

b,  one  apiece. 

c,  if  there  was  any  difficulty. 


1.  If  there  is^  any  difficulty,  they  will  not  lack  the  op- 
portunity. 

2.  If  there  were  any  difficulty,  I  would  not  lack  the 
opportunity. 

3.  If  there  should  be  any  difficulty,  we  should  not  lack 
the  opportunity. 

4.  They  will  select  one  horse  apiece. 

5.  We  shall  have  to  fight  a  cavalry  battle. 


237  CHAPTERS   XLIX   AND   L 


^ 


a,  quam  ob  rem. 

b,  utnim  ex  usu  esset  necne. 


a,  why. 

b.  whether  it  was  expedient  or 

not. 


1.  Caesar  chose  a   place  beyond   the  place  where  the 
enemy  was. 

2.  He  will  send  the  third  line  to  fortify  ^  the  camp. 

3.  At  the  completion  of  the  work,  they  retreated  into 
camp. 

4.  I  will  ask  him  why  he  does  not  give  us  a  chance 
to  fight. 

5.  Is  it  the  divine  will  for  us  to  storm  the  camp  } 

6.  Tell  me  whether  the  moon  is  full  or  not. 

1  Review  126^  *  Express  in  several  ways. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  II5 

238  CHAPTERS  LI   AND   LII 

a,  on  the  next  day. 


a»  proximo  die,  postridie  eius 

diel. 
b.  reperti  sunt  complures  nostri 

qui  insillrent. 


b,  there  were  very  many  of  our 
men  who  jumped,  etc. 


1.  On  the  next  day  he  did  not  use  the  soldiers  of  the 
legions  for  show. 

2.  At  our  departure  we  shall  implore  you  not  to  leave 
any  hope  in  flight. 

3.  I  will  put  an  officer  in  charge  of  each  legion. 

4.  They  attacked  us  so  quickly  that  a  hand  to  hand 
encounter  resulted. 

5.  Send  the  cavalry  to  help  them. 

6    There  are  many  who  ^  are  engaged  in  the  battle  line. 

239  CHAPTERS   LHI   AND   LIV 


a,  hostes  terga  verterunt. 
b»  neque    prius    fugere    desti- 
terunt  quam  pervenenint. 
€,  se  praesente. 


a.  the  enemy  fled. 

b.  and  they  did  not  cease  fly- 

ing until  they  arrived. 

c.  in  his  presence. 


1.  When    they   cannot    rely   on    their    strength,   they 
will  flee. 

2.  Our  men  did  not  cease   pursuing   until   they  killed 
many  thousand. 

3.  He  was  bound  and  dragged  in  flight. 

4.  Ariovistus  is  said  to  have  escaped  in  a  small  boat 
that  he  had  found.^ 

5.  They  cast  lots  in  our  presence. 

6.  Now   that   Ariovistus    had    been    defeated,    Caesar 
thought  he  was  safe. 

1  See  174.  t  •*  that  .  .  .  found  "  —  one  word. 


Ii6 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  H 


240     REVIEW  OF   CHAPTERS   XLI-LIII 

Review  thoroughly  the  following  vocabulary,  memorizing 
the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs,  and  the  declensions  of  the 
nouns  and  adjectives : 


(^de   and   abl,  of 

thing. 
per    or    ab  with 

person.) 


1.  certiorfio 

2.  certiorem 

facio 

3.  tollo. 

4.  interpono. 

5.  intercedo. 

6.  interdico. 

7.  exeo. 

8.  defends. 

9.  simulo. 

10.  ignosco. 

11.  conficio. 

12.  se  recipere. 

13.  reperio. 

14.  invenio. 

15.  praeficio. 

16.  consulo,  with  dat.  and  ace 

17.  doceo. 

18.  transeo. 

19.  circumsistS. 

20.  transduce. 

21.  nanciscor. 

22.  tergum. 

23.  subsidium. 

24.  genus. 

241.    Review    thoroughly   the 
syntax : 


25.  adulescens 

26.  sententia. 

27.  regio. 

28.  labor. 

29.  detrimentum. 

30.  praemium. 

31.  aditus. 

32.  incolumis. 

33.  idoneus,  cf.  alienus. 

34.  iniquus. 

35.  aequus. 

36.  utrimque. 

37.  statim. 

38.  comminus. 

39.  complures. 

40.  durus. 

41.  telum. 

42.  sponte. 

43.  stipendium. 

44.  domus. 

45.  60  (adv.). 

46.  ultro. 

47.  factum. 

48.  opus,  indecl. 

49.  opus,  eris. 

following    principles    of 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  II7 

1.  The  predicate  genitive  (see  grammar). 

2.  Accusative  with  compounds,  circum,  praeteVy  trans. 

3.  Double  questions,  direct  and  indirect,  80. 

4.  Intransitive  verbs,  32. 

5.  Clauses  introduced  by  antequam  2iwdi  priiisqtmmy  154. 

6.  Conditional  sentences,  three  types,  1 21-125. 

242.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  240  and  the  constructions 
ot  241.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


I 


Book  II 


Note.  Sentences  in  groups  A  are  for  those  who  begin  to  read  Caesar  at  Book  II. 
Those  in  groups  B  are  for  students  who  have  read  Book  I.  The  student  should 
not  depend  on  the  English-Latin  vocabulary  for  the  Latin  words.  The  Latin 
text  upon  which  each  exercise  is  based  should  always  be  consulted  for  the 
proper  words  or  phrases. 


43                            CHAPTER  I 

a. 

certior  fiebat. 

a,  he  was  informed. 

b. 

inter  se  dare. 

b,  were  exchanging,  were  giving 
to  one  another. 

c. 

exercitum    hiemare  moleste 

c,   they  were  annoyed  that  an 

ferebant. 

army  should  winter. 

A.  I.   We  are  informed;  he  will  inform  Caesar;  I  have 
informed  them. 

2.  We  exchange ;  you  exchange. 

3.  They  feared  that  Gaul  would  be  subdued. 

4.  I  am  annoyed  that  you  are  conspiring  against  me. 

5.  Some  desire  a  revolution. 

6.  I    am    informed    that    they    are    leading    an   army 
against  us. 

B.  I.    They  informed   him   that  we  were  exchanging 
hostages. 

2.  I  am  afraid  that  they  will  pass  the  winter  in  Gaul. 

3.  We  are  grieved  that  Caesar  was  not  informed  that 
they  were  conspiring. 

4.  Those  who  can  hire  men  will  generally  usurp  royal 
power. 

n3 


i 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


119 


244 


CHAPTER   II 


a. 


qui   deduceret    Q.    Pedium 
misit. 

d.   dat  negotium  Senonibus  uti 
cognoscant. 


a.  he  sent   Quintus  Pedius  to 

lead. 

b.  he  employs  the  Senones  to 

find  out. 


A.  I.I  will  enroll  troops  among  the  Gauls. 

2.  I  sent  them  to  find  out  about  this. 

3.  We  employed  him  to  inform  us. 

4.  They  announced  that  Caesar  was  coming  to  the  army. 

5.  We  ought  not  to  hesitate.^ 

B.  I.   We  will  send  an  officer  to  enroll  two  legions. 

2.  We  gave  it  in  charge  ^  of  Pedius  to  gather  an  army 
together. 

3.  He  was  informed  that  they  had  broken'  camp  and 
were  setting  out  toward  the  Belgae. 


245  CHAPTER  III 

a.  se  suaque  omnia. 

b^  ne  Suessiones  quidem. 


c.    deterrere  quin  cum  his  con- 
sentlrent. 


a,  themselves  and  all  their  pos- 
sessions. 

b,  not    even     the    Suessiones. 

(Note     order     of    Latin 
words.) 

c,  to  prevent   from  conspiring 

with  these. 


^A.     I.    Myself  and  all  my  property;  ourselves  and  all 
our  possessions. 

2.   The  Germans  who  live  in  Gaul  enjoy  their  own  laws. 


1  See  III. 

2  "  gave  . 
8  Use  participle. 


charge  of";  does  this  mean  same  as  "  employed" ? 


I20  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

3.  He  said  that^  the  Germans  who  lived  in  Gaul  enjoyed 
their  own  laws. 

4.  He  is  not  ready  to  give  even  hostages. 

5.  We  will  prevent  them  from^  aiding  you. 

B.    .1.   We  who  have  given  you  all  our  property  will  not 
conspire  against  you. 

2.  Write  I  indirectly  after  dlxerunt. 

3.  We  have  prevented  them  from ^  enjoying  even  their 
own  laws. 

4.  Caesar  came  so   quickly  that  the   Remi  said  they 
would  help  him. 

246.  CHAPTER  IV 


a.  qui    Cimbros    ingredl    pro- 

hibuerint. 

b.  sibi  sunierent. 

c*   plurimum  valere. 


a.  who  kept  the  Cimbri  from 

entering. 

b.  they  were  assuming. 

c.  were  the  most  powerful. 


A.     I.   What  can  you  do  in  war? 

2.  I  will  ask  him  what  you  can  do  in  war. 

3.  We  will  keep  them  from  settling  there. 

4.  I  have  found  out  that  they  have  entered  our  territory. 

5.  You  are  assuming  great  authority. 

6.  How  large  a  number  has  each  one  promised } 

7.  They  are  the  most  powerful,   because  they  have 
many  soldiers. 

8.  Quote  7  indirectly  after  dixit. 

9.  The  chief  command  of  the  whole  war  will  be  con- 
ferred upon  Galba. 

10.   The  Nervii  were  regarded  as  extremely  cruel. 

B.     I.   I  will  ask  him  who  are  descended  from  the 
Germans. 

1  Review  165-169.  "See  150,  (i)  and  (2). 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


121 


2.  We  are  the  only  ones  who  ^  have  expelled  the  Gauls. 

3.  They  will  prevent  us  from  assuming  great  authority. 

4.  They  are  the  most  powerful,  because  they  can  furnish 
a  hundred  thousand  men. 

5.  Quote  4  indirectly  after  dixit. 

6.  I  have  found  out  that  the  Nervii  were  considered  ex- 
tremely cruel. 


247 


CHAPTER  V 


a,  ne  confligendum  sit. 

b,  commeatus  ut    portarl  pos- 

sent  efficiebat. 

c,  in  altitudinem    pedum   XII 

vallo. 


c. 


lest    they    should    have    to 

contend, 
made    it    possible    for 

plies  to  be  brought, 
by  a  wall  twelve  feet  high. 


sup- 


A.  I.    It  concerns  us. 

2.  We  shall  be  compelled  ^  to  fight  with  the  enemy. 

3.  We  learned  that  Caesar  had  pitched  his  camp. 

4.  I  will  make  it  possible  for  you  to  go. 

5.  This  ditch  will  be  six  feet  deep. 

6.  Caesar  ordered  ^  them  to  bring  supplies. 

B.  I.    It  concerned  us  that  they  keep  the  enemy  apart. 

2.  If  you  do  this,  we  shall  have  to  fight 

3.  He  learned  that  troops  had  been  sent  and  were  being 
led  across  the  river. 

4.  The  river  makes  it  possible  for  me  to  be  safe. 

5.  The  bridge  will  be  one  hundred  feet  long. 

6.  We  shall  order  ^  them  to  hurry. 


1  Is  this  a  simple  relative  clause  ? 

**'we  .  .  .  fight,"  see  iii.  95. 

•  What  construction  would  follow  impero  ?    See  147, 


122 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


248 


CHAPTER  VI 


a,  murus    defensoribus     nuda- 

tus  est. 

b,  testudine  facta  murura  sub- 

ruunt. 

c,  in    muro     consistendl     po- 

testas  erat  nulll. 


a,  the    wall    was    stripped   of 

its  defenders. 

b,  by  forming   a  testudo    they 

undermine  the  wall. 

c,  nobody  could   keep  a  foot- 

hold on  the  wall. 


A.  I.    The  town  is  two  miles  from  the  river. 

2.  We  have  cleared  the  town  of  soldiers. 

3.  This  was  done  by  hurling  stones. 

4.  We  cannot  keep  a  foothold  on  the  wall. 

5.  They  said  that  Iccius  was  in  command  of  the  town. 

B.  I.    A   town    named    Bibrax  was   attacked   by  the 
Belgae  on  their  march. 

2.  We  began  to  clear  the  town  of  soldiers. 

3.  By  hurling  many  javelins  they  put  an  end  to^  the 
attack. 

4.  Nobody  could  ^  hurl  stones  against  the  wall. 

5.  Iccius  says  that  the  town  will  be  taken,  unless  Caesar 
sends  him  help. 


249 


CHAPTER  VII 


a.  funditores  subsidio  oppida- 

nis  mittit. 

b.  apud  oppidum  morati,  om- 

nibus vTcIs  incensis,  ad 
castra  Caesaris  contende- 
runt 


he  sends  the  slingers  to  aid 
the  townsmen. 

after  lingering  about  the 
town,  and  after  all  the 
villages  had  been  burned, 
they  hastened  to  Caesar's 
camp.  (Note  change  in 
use  of  the  participle.) 


1 "  put  an  end  to  "  =  make  an  end  of. 


2  Do  not  use  possum. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


123 


A.  I.    I  will  send  men  to  help  you. 

2.  For  the  same  reason  we  employed  the  slingers. 

3.  After  pitching  ^  camp,  they  Hngered  in  the  town, 

4.  Many  buildings  were  burned. 

B.  I.    Caesar  used  the  messengers  as  guides  and  sent 
soldiers  to  help  them. 

2.  After  gaining  possession  ^  of  the  town  and  pitching  ^ 
his  camp,  he  waited  for  them  a  little  while. 

3.  They  were  more  than  three  miles  off. 


250 


CHAPTER  VIII 


a,  tantum  .  .  .  quantum. 

b,  quod     tantum     multitudine 

poterant. 

c,  suas  copias  eductas  instriix- 

erunt. 


a.  as  much  ...  as. 

b.  because  they  were  so  strong 

in  numbers. 

c.  they   led    their    forces    out 

and  drew  them  up. 


A.  I.    Our  men  have  a  high  reputation  for  valor. 

2.  The  place  was  suitable  for^  pitching  a  camp. 

3.  The  hill  extends  as  far  as  we  can  see. 

4.  He  did  this  so  as  not  to  be  surrounded. 

5.  We  are  very  strong  in  numbers. 

6.  I  will  lead  ^  out  and  draw  up  my  troops. 

B.  I.    He  perceived  that  the  place  was  suitable  for^ 
pitching  camp. 

2.  That  hill  covers  as   much   ground   as  an  army  can 
occupy. 

3.  They  are  so  strong  in  numbers  that  they  can  sur- 
round us  as  we  fight. 

4.  After  digging  a  ditch,  he  stationed  war  engines. 

1  See  89,  I.  2  See  85,  2.  8  Do  not  use  the  dative. 

4  Avoid  using  two  coordinate  verbs. 


124 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  11 


5.  We  will  lead  ^  the  legion  out  of  the  town  and  draw 
it  up. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   I-VIII 

251.  Review  thoroughly  the  meaning  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs,  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives. 


I. 

studeo. 

26. 

certus,  compare. 

2. 

cognoscS. 

27. 

regnum. 

3. 

dubito. 

28. 

negotium. 

4. 

deterreo. 

29. 

obses. 

5. 

prohibeO. 

30. 

celeritas. 

6. 

iuvo. 

31. 

celeriter. 

7. 

audeo. 

32. 

plurimum. 

8. 

valeo. 

33. 

quantus. 

9. 

possum. 

34. 

tantus. 

10. 

habeor. 

35. 

magnitudo. 

II. 

quaero. 

36. 

commeatus. 

12. 

postulo. 

37. 

potestas. 

13. 

distineo  (note  the  force 

38. 

imperium. 

of  dis). 

39- 

paulum. 

14. 

impero. 

40. 

paulo. 

15. 

iubeo. 

41. 

paulisper. 

16. 

cogo. 

42. 

paulatim. 

17. 

coepi. 

43- 

idoneus. 

18. 

incipio. 

44. 

uterque. 

19. 

praeficiO. 

45. 

quisque. 

20. 

praesum. 

46. 

medius. 

21. 

contendo. 

47. 

summus,  compare. 

22. 

conficio. 

48. 

alter. 

23- 

efficio. 

49. 

plerumque. 

24. 

obtineo. 

50. 

ne  .  .  .  quidem. 

25. 

occupo. 

1  Avoid  using  two  coSrdinate  verbs. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  125 

252.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Dative  of  possession,  of  purpose,  and  the  dative  used 
with  adjectives,  34,  35>  37- 

2.  Ablative  of  separation.  When  must  a  preposition 
be  used  ?  39. 

3.  Accusative  of  extent  of  space  and  duration  of  time, 
16. 

4.  Construction  with  quaero  2Mdi  postulo^  15.  i. 

5.  Uses  of  quod  to  introduce  relative,  causal,  and  sub- 
stantive clauses,  173. 

6.  Substantive  clauses  after  verbs  of  doubting,  verbs  of 
hindering,  and  verbs  oi  fearing,  135,  136,  150. 

253.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen' 
tences  employing  the  words  of  251  and  the  constructions 
of  252.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 

254  CHAPTER   IX 


a,  si    nostri    transTrent   hostes 

exspectabant. 

b,  eo  consilio  ut  castellum  ex- 

pugnarent. 


a.  the   enemy  were  waiting  to 

see    i/    our    men    would 
cross. 

b,  with    the   design   of  taking 

the  redoubt. 


A.     I.   A  river  was   between   Caesar's   army  and   the 
enemy. 

2.  We  are  waiting  to  see  if  they  will  cross. 

3.  Caesar  will  not  begin  to  cross. 

4.  They  are  doing  this  with  the  design  of  capturing  the 
camp. 

5.  Titurius  commands  the  soldiers. 


126 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  11 


B.     I.   We  are  waiting  to  see  if  they  will  attack  us. 

2.  If  ^  the  cavalry  battle  is  favorable  to  neither  party, 
we  will  not  begin  to  cross. 

3.  The  enemy  are  hastening  to  the  river  with  the  design 
of  finding  fords. 

4.  Who  will  be  in  charge  of  the   redoubt  when  the 
enemy  cross  ? 


255 


CHAPTER  X 


a,  primes  circumventos    inter- 

fecerunt. 

b,  constituerunt  optimum  esse 

quemque  revertl. 

c,  his    persuaderi     ut     diutius 

morarentur  non  poterat. 


a,  they  surrounded  and  killed 

the  first. 

b.  they    decided    that    it    was 

best  for  each  to  return. 
€,   these  could  not  be  persuaded 
to  wait  any  longer. 


A.     I.    A  fierce  battle  is  being  fought. 

2.  We  attacked  them  while  ^  they  were  crossing. 

3.  They  will  surround  ^  and  kill  him. 

4.  It  is  best  for  each  to  fight  in  his  own  territory. 

5.  I  can't  be  persuaded  to  return  home. 

6.  We  assembled  to  defend  our  homes. 


B.     I.   They  informed  Caesar  that  a  fierce  battle  was 
being  fought. 

2.  They  drove  them  back^  and  slew  many  of  the  enemy. 

3.  It  is  best  for  us  to  use  our  own  grain  supplies. 

4.  We  shall  attack  the  enemy  while  ^  they  are  crossing. 

5.  We  can't  be  persuaded  to  fight  in  foreign  territory. 


i"if .  .  , 

2  "  while 
«  See  88. 


do  not  use  si  and  the  indicative. 

crossing  "  —  express  by  one  word  in  Latin. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 


127 


256 


CHAPTER  XI 


a.  fecerunt   ut  profectio  vide- 

retur. 

b.  prima    lOce;    sub    occasum 

solis. 

c.  exaudito  clamore. 


a.  they    made  their  departure 

seem. 
d,  at  daybreak ;  at  sunset. 

c.   on  hearing  the  shout. 


A.  I.    Everybody  is  leaving  camp. 

2.  Their  departure  made  Caesar  fear  an  ambuscade. 

3.  At  dawn,  the  fact  was  established. 

4.  Why  did  they  withdraw  } 

5.  On  seeing  our  men,  they  fled  several  miles. 

6.  At  sunset,  they  will  be  out  of  danger. 

B.  I.    Caesar  could   not  understand   why  they  were 
hastening  home. 

2.  Their  departure  would  ^  have  made  any  one  fear  an 
ambuscade. 

3.  At  daybreak,  the  cavalry  attacked  the  rear. 

4.  Those  in  front,  on  seeing  the  enemy,  were  thrown 
into  confusion. 

5.  At  sunset,  they  had  fled  as  far  as  they  could. 


257 


CHAPTERS   Xn   AND   XIH 


a.  id  paucis  defendentibus  ex- 

pugnare  non  potuit. 

b.  quae  ad  oppugnandum  usul 

erant. 

c.  celeritate  Romanorum   per- 

moti. 

d.  maiores  natu. 


a.  although  there  were  few  de- 

fenders, he  could  not  cap- 
ture. 

b.  what  was  useful  in   besieg- 

ing. 

c.  alarmed  at  the  speed  of  the 

Romans. 

d.  the  elders. 


1 "  would  have  made  "  —  See  127,  118. 


128  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

A.  I.   On   the   next  day,  the   enemy  recovered  from 
their  alarm. 

2.  Although  the  wall  was   high,  he  tried   to  take  the 
town. 

3.  Sheds  are  useful  in  besieging. 

4.  The  Suessiones  were  alarmed  at  the  towers. 

5.  Caesar  received  the  two  sons  of  Galba  as  hostages. 

6.  The  elders  said  they  had  not  fought  against  Caesar. 

7.  The  women  approached  the  camp  with  outstretched 
hands. 

8.  I  will  come  under  your  protection. 

B.  I.   Although  he  saw  the  height  of  the  wall,  Caesar 
tried  to  take  the  town. 

2.  Ditches  and  walls  are  useful  in  defending  a  town. 

3.  The  Gauls  were  alarmed  at  these  works  and  sought 
peace  of  Caesar. 

4.  Galba's  two  sons  were  received  by  Caesar  as  hostages. 

5.  The  elders  approached  the  camp. 

6.  With  hands  outspread,  the  women  urged  their  country- 
men to  surrender  to  Caesar. 

258  CHAPTER  XIV 


populo  Romano  bellum  in- 

tulisse. 
petere  Bellovacos  ut  iitatur. 


a.  had  waged  war  on  the  Ro- 

man people. 

b.  that  the    Bellovaci    begged 

him  to  use. 


A.     I.    How  great  a  war  did  you  wage  on  the  enemy } 

2.  We  understand  how  great  a  war  you  waged  on  them. 

3.  I  begged  him  to  do  this. 

4.  He   says  that  those   who   did   this    are    fleeing  to 
Britain. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  1 29 

B.     I.    We  understand  who  have  brought  war  on  the 
Romans. 

2.  If  you  do  this,  I  will  beg  Caesar  to  show  his  charac- 
teristic kindness. 

3.  Quote  2  indirectly  ^  after  dixit. 


259  CHAPTERS  XV  AND  XVI 


(a)  nullum  aditum  esse  ad  eos 

mercatoribus. 
(d)   nihil  vim. 
{c)    his  persuaserant  uti  expe- 

rirentur. 


(a)  that  traders  have  no  access 

to  them. 
(^)   no  wine. 
(c)    they  had  persuaded  these 

to  try. 


A.  I.    Caesar  said  he  would  demand  many  hostages. 

2.  We  will  surrender  ourselves  and  all  our  property. 

3.  Caesar  had  access  to  the  Gauls. 

4.  The  Nervii  allow  no  wine  to  be  brought  into  their 
territory. 

5.  They  learned  that  Caesar  had  marched  many  miles. 

6.  I  shall  persuade  them  to  wait  for  me. 

7.  The  enemy  are  on  the  other  side  of  the  river. 

B.  I.    Caesar  said  he  would  demand  hostages  and  make 
inquiry  about  their  customs. 

2.  Will  you  surrender  yourself  and  all  your  property  ? 

3.  The  Nervii  have  no  wine  in  their  country. 

4.  They  learned  that  Caesar  had  marched  many  miles. 

5.  I  shall  persuade   him  to  wait  for  me  on  the  other 
side  of  the  river. 

1  Review  carefully  165-169. 
LATIN   PROSE  COMP.  —  9 


I30  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


260  CHAPTER  XVII 


a,  exploratores  praemittit  qui 
locum  castris  idoneum 
deligant. 

h,  quicquam  negoti. 

c,  non  omittendum  sibi  con- 
silium Nervii  existimave- 
runt. 


a.  he  sends    ahead    scouts   t<i 

choose  a  place  suitable  foi 
a  camp. 

b.  any  trouble. 

c.  the     Nervii     thought     they 

ought    not    to    disregard 
the  advice. 


A.  I.    He  sent  ahead  men  to  do  this. 

2.  They  observed  our  army's  usual  manner  of  marching. 

3.  There  will  not  be  any  trouble  in  routing^  the  first 
legion. 

4.  Our  strength  is  in  cavalry  forces. 

5.  They  bent  the  trees  to  furnish  ^  a  fortification. 

6.  I  think  that  the  Nervii  ought  not  to  disregard  this 
advice. 

7.  We  can't  even  look  through  the  hedge. 

B.  I.   They  sent  men  to  observe  our  manner  of  march. 

2.  If  the  first  legion  is  routed,  there  will  not  be  any 
trouble  in  plundering  ^  the  baggage. 

3.  Our  strength  was  in  cavalry  forces. 

4.  The  hedge  furnishes  a  defense  which  ^  cannot  be 
entered. 

5.  Do  you  think  that  the  Nervii  ought  to  disregard  this 
advice  ? 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   IX-XVII 

261.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs,  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 

1  Use  infinitive.  2  ♦•  to  furnish,"  cf.  praedandi  causa.  3  See  174. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


13 


1.  c5iior. 

2.  exspectQ. 

3.  consisto. 

4.  constituo. 

5.  expugno. 

6.  oppugno. 

7.  interficio. 

8.  inter eo. 

9.  persuaded. 

10.  moror. 

11.  morior. 

12.  deficio. 

13.  desum. 

14.  intellego. 

15.  propero. 

16.  maturo. 

17.  desisto. 

18.  se  recipere. 

19.  pando. 

20.  accedo. 

21.  infero. 

22.  experior. 

23.  dedo. 

24.  deditio. 

2 So  dediticius. 


26.  deligS. 

27.  omitto. 

28.  consuetude. 

29.  impedio. 

30.  impedimentum. 

31.  appropinquo. 

32.  complures. 

33.  usus. 

34.  consilium. 

35.  secundus. 

36.  alienus. 

37.  iniquus. 

38.  res  frumentaria. 

39.  proficiscor. 

40.  profectio. 

41.  clamor. 

42.  insidiae. 

43.  agmen, 

44.  novus. 

45.  pauci. 

46.  aditus. 

47.  nihil. 

48.  quisquam. 

49.  ineo. 

50.  initium. 


262.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Genitive  of  the  whole,  23. 

2.  Passive  periphrastic,  95. 

3.  Construction  with /^r5'//^<3^<?(7,  147. 

4.  Indirect  questions,  134. 

5.  Sequence  of  tenses,  1 31-133. 

6.  Consecutive  clauses  dependent  on  facto,  efficw,  etc. 


132 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


263.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences, employing  the  words  of  261  and  the  constructions 
of  262.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


264 


CHAPTERS   XVIII   AND   XIX 


a.  fluminis  erat  altitudo  pedum 

circiter  trium. 
h,  ratio    aliter    se    habebat  ac 

Belgae    ad     Nervios    de- 

tulerant. 

c,  ut  aciem  constituerant. 

d,  impetum  in  nostros  equites 

fecerunt. 


a,  the  depth  of  the  river  was 
about  three  feet. 

d.  the  arrangement  was  differ- 
ent from  what  the  Belgae 
had  reported  to  the 
Nervii. 

c,  just  as  they  had  drawn  up 

the  line  of  battle. 

d.  they    made    an   attack    on 

our  cavalry. 


A.  I.   The  river  Sambre  has  been  mentioned  above. 

2.  One  cannot  see  ^  into  the  woods. 

3.  The  height  of  the  hill  was  about  two  hundred  feet. 

4.  The  plan  of  march  is  different  from  what  the  enemy 
thought. 

5.  Two  legions  will  guard  the  rear. 

6.  We  will  not  retreat  into  the  woods. 

7.  They  attacked  us  as  we  were  retreating. 
8.*    He  will  do  just  as  he  has  agreed. 

9.  After  the  camp  had  been  fortified,  we  saw  the 
enemy. 

10.  The  cavalry  was  easily  routed  and  thrown  into  con- 
fusion. 

B.  I.  The  foot  of  the  hill  is  cleared  of  woods,  so  that 
the  enemy  cannot  hide. 

1 "  one  cannot  see  "  —  it  cannot  be  seen. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


133 


2.  The  hill  that  had  been  chosen  for  a  camp  was  about 
two  hundred  feet  high. 

3.  Caesar's  custom   is   different   from   what   has  been 
reported. 

4.  They   didn't  dare   to   attack  the   Romans   as  they 
retreated. 

5.  How  far  will  they  follow  us  ? 

6.  We  will  do  just  as  we  have  agreed. 

7.  When  the  cavalry  had  been  routed,  they  made  for 
Caesar*s  camp. 

265  CHAPTER  XX 


a,  Caesari    omnia     iino    tem- 

pore erant  agenda. 

b,  cum     ad      arma      concurri 

oporteret. 

c,  quod  singulis  legionibus  sin- 

gulos  legates  Caesar  dis- 
cedere  vetuerat. 


a,  Caesar    had    to    do   every- 

thing at  once. 

b,  when    they    must    rush    to 

arms. 

c,  because  Caesar  had  forbid- 

den the  lieutenants  to 
leave  their  respective 
legions. 


A.  I.   You  must  ^  do  this  quickly. 

2.  Others  show  us  what  we  ought  ^  to  do. 

3.  Caesar  will  forbid  the  lieutenants  to  give  the  signal 
to  their  respective  legions. 

4.  The  experience  of  the  soldiers  helped  them. 

5.  We  will  execute  by  ourselves  what  seems  best. 

B.  I.    When  the  signal  is  given  the  soldiers  must^  run 
to  arms. 

2.  Others  ought  ^  not  to  show  us  what  we  have  ^  to  do. 

3.  Caesar  had  ordered  the  lieutenants  to  draw  up  their 
respective  legions. 

1  Review  carefully  iii,  95. 


134  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


266  CHAPTERS   XXI    AND   XXII 


a.  quam  in  partem. 

d.  quo  telum  adici  posset. 

c,  aliae  alia  in  parte. 


a.  in  that  direction  in  which. 
^.  a  spear's  throw. 
c.   some   in   one   place,   others 
in  another. 


A.  I.    He  will  go  in  that  direction  in  which  he  has 
been  ordered. 

2.  We  will  urge  the  soldiers  to  ^  remember  this. 

3.  He  is  not  more  than  a  stone's  throw  off. 

4.  We  did  not  have  time  to  prepare  our  javelins. 

5.  You  will  lose  time  for  ^  fighting. 

6.  Some  of  the  soldiers  were   in   one   place,  others  in 
another. 

7.  What  is  needed  in  each  town  ? 

8.  The  inequality  of   things  was  so  great  that  various 
results  of  fortune  followed. 

B.  I.   We  urged  the  soldiers  to  ^  go  in  that  direction  in 
which  they  had  been  ordered. 

2.  Since  the  enemy  are  not  more  than  a  stone's  throw 
off,  you  will  not  have  time  to  encourage  the  soldiers. 

3.  They  will  lose  time  for  ^  fighting. 

4.  Some  of  the  soldiers  fought  in  one  place,  others  in 
another. 

5.  We  can  provide  what  is  needed  in  each  town. 

267  CHAPTER   XXIII 


a.  a  fronte. 
d.  duce  Boduognato. 
c.   non    magno    ab    ea    inter- 
vallo. 


a.  in  front. 

^.  under     the     leadership    of 

Boduognatus. 
c,   not  far  from  it. 


1  Do  not  use  the  infinitive.  a  Do  not  use  the  dative. 


CAESAR,  GALT.IC  WAR  I35 

A.  I.   These  legions  had  opposed  the  Atrebates. 

2.  They  were  killed  while  trying  to  cross  the  river. 

3.  The  enemy  will  not  hesitate  to  renew  the  fight. 

4.  The  whole  camp  was  exposed  in  front. 

5.  The  seventh  legion   is   stationed   not  far   from  the 
twelfth. 

6.  Under  Caesar's  leadership  the  camp  was  nearly  sur- 
rounded. 

B.  I.    Many  of  the  enemy  were  killed  while  resisting^ 
our  men. 

2.  The  enemy  renewed   the   fight ^  and   hurled^  their 
weapons. 

3.  The  camp  was  exposed  in  front,  because  two  legions 
were  stationed  not  far  from  the  right  wing. 

4.  Under  Caesar's  leadership  we  shall  not  hesitate  to 
engage  with  the  Gauls. 

268  CHAPTER  XXIV 


a.  adversis    hostibus     occurre- 

bant. 

b,  calories  praecipites  fugae  sese 

mandabant. 
€.   alii   aliam   in    partem    fere- 
bantu  r. 


they  met  the  enemy  face 
to  face. 

the  camp  followers  took  to 
flight  in  utter  confusion. 

some  rushed  in  one  direc- 
tion, others  in  another. 


A.     I.    I   said   that   the   infantry  were  routed  by  the 
enemy. 

2.  I  met  him  face  to  face. 

3.  We  took  to  flight  in  great  confusion. 

4.  Some  were  alarmed  by  one^  thing,  others  by  another 

5.  The  camp  was  filling  up  with  the  enemy. 

1  See  87.  2  Do  not  use  coordinate  verbs.  *  See  73. 


136  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

6.  The  soldiers  were  nearly  surrounded  and  held  fast. 

7.  It  was  reported  that  the    Nervii   had  captured  our 
camp. 

B.     I.   When  we  retreated,  we  met  him  face  to  face. 

2.  I  took  to  flight  in  great  confusion. 

3.  Some  were  alarmed  by  one  ^  thing,  others  by  another. 

4.  It  is  said  that  the  cavalry  had  been  sent  to  Caesar 
as  help. 

5.  The  Nervii  scattered  our  men  and  almost  took  the 
camp. 


269                       CHAPTER 

XXV 

a,  ubi  milites  sibi  ipsos  ad  pug- 

a. 

when  he  saw  that  the  soldiers 

nam     esse    impedimento 

hindered  one  another   in 

vidit. 

fighting. 

b,  signa  inferre. 

b. 

to  charge. 

c»  cum  quisque  operam  navare 

c. 

since  each  one  wished  to  do 

cuperet. 

his  best. 

A.  I.   We  hinder  one  another  in  fighting. 

2.  Publius   Sextius   Baculus  was   exhausted   by   many 
severe  wounds. 

3.  There  is  no  reserve  that^  can  be  brought  up. 

4.  Although^   many  had   been   killed,  Caesar  did  not 
abandon  the  contest. 

5.  He  snatched  a  shield  from  a  soldier.* 

6.  We  will  charge,  so  as  to  open  up  the  ranks. 

7.  Each  man  will  do  his  best. 

B.  I.   Owing  to  the  crowded  condition  of  the  soldiers, 
we  hindered  one  another  in  fighting. 

1  See  73.  2  See  174.  »  See  87,  89.  *  Cf.  militi  in  the  terU 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  I37 

2.  Although^  many  are  exhausted  by  wounds,  Caesar 
will  not  abandon  the  contest. 

3.  There  is  no  reserve  that  ^  can  be  brought  up. 

4.  We  will  charge  so  that  the  soldiers  may  use  their 
swords  more  easily. 

5.  Each  man  will  do  his  best,  so  as  to  infuse  hope  in  the 
general. 

270  CHAPTER  XXVI 

a.  he  urged  the  tribunes  to 
face  about  and  charge  the 
enemy. 


tribunes  monuit  ut  con- 
versa  signa  in  hostis  in- 
ferrent. 

cum  alius  alii  subsidium 
ferret. 

cum  quanto  in  perlculo  im- 
perator  versaretur  cogno- 
vissent. 


since      they      helped     one 

another, 
when    they    found    out    in 

what  danger   the  general 

was  involved. 


A.  I.I  urged  them  to  ^  take  a  stand  near  by. 

2.  Face  about  and  charge  the  enemy. 

3.  They  helped  one  another. 

4.  I  don't  fear  being  seen  by  the  enemy. 

5.  Labienus  learned  what  the  enemy  were  doing. 

6.  He  learned  that  the  commander  was  involved  in  danger. 

B.  I.    We  will  urge  them  to ^  help  one  another. 

2.  Don't*  be  afraid,  face  about  and  charge  the  Nervii. 

3.  The  soldiers  fear  being  hard  pressed  by  the  enemy. 

4.  Labienus  could  see  what  danger  the  camp  was  in. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XVIII-XXVI 

271.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs,  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 

1  See  87,  89.  2  See  174.  8  Review  147.  *  See  116. 


38 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


1.  pello. 

2.  compellO. 

3.  compleo. 

4.  nascor. 

5.  subsequor. 

6.  defero. 

7.  discedo. 

8.  accedo. 

9.  arcesso. 
ID.  praescribo. 

11.  doceo. 

12.  veto. 

13.  administro. 

14.  concurro. 

15.  occurro. 

16.  obvenio. 

17.  adicio. 

18.  cohortor. 

19.  redintegrO. 

20.  mando. 

21.  desero. 

22.  versor. 

23.  intermittO. 

24.  committo. 

25.  amitto. 


26.  provides. 

27.  converts. 

28.  aliter. 

29.  ordo. 

30.  ratio. 

31.  declivis. 

32.  accli vitas. 
33-  pars. 

34.  par. 

3$.  apertus. 

36.  alius. 

37.  alter. 

38.  altus. 

39.  opera. 

40.  opus. 

41.  opus,  eris. 

42.  ops. 

43.  paene. 

44.  fere. 

45.  coUis. 

46.  adversus. 

47.  subsidium. 

48.  confertus. 

49.  conspectus. 

50.  rursus. 


I 


272.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Genitive  of  quality  to  denote  measure,  22. 

2.  Dative  of  agent  with  passive  periphrastic  verbs,  95. 

3.  Passive  periphrastic,  oportet,  debed,  95,  iii. 

4.  Cases  of  the  gerund,  91. 

5.  Clauses  after  verbs  of  urging,  ordering,  requesting^  147. 

6.  Moods  with  ubi^  ut^  postquam,  etc.,  152. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  1 39 

273.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  271  and  the  constructions 
of  272.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 

274  CHAPTER   XXVII 


a.  ut  proximi  iacentibus  Insis- 

terent. 

b,  ut  iudicarl  deberet. 


a,  that    the   next   stood   upon 

them  as  they  lay  fallen. 

b,  that  one  must  decide. 


A.  I.    Those  who  were  exhausted  with  wounds  leaned 
on  their  shields. 

2.  Let  ^  us  put  ourselves  ahead  of  the  cavalry. 

3.  He  stood  upon  his  friend  as  he  lay  fallen. 

4.  They  showed  such  valor  that  they  dared  to  do  very 
difficult  deeds.^ 

5.  One  must  decide  that  the  Nervii  were  very  brave. 

B.  I.   They  leaned  on  their  shields  to  fight  men  who 
were  armed. 

2.  The  Nervii  are  so  brave  that  they  fight  as  they  lie 
exhausted  with  wounds. 

3.  One  must  decide  that  the  Gauls  dare  to  do  very  diffi- 
cult deeds.2 

275  CHAPTER   XXVIII 


a.  qui  arma  ferre  possent. 

b,  flnitimis    imperavit   ut 

prohiberent. 


a.  capable  of  bearing  arms. 

b.  he  ordered   their  neighbors 

to  refrain. 


A.     I.    The  elders  think   that   the  vanquished  are  not 
safe. 

2.   There  are  not  many  capable  ^  of  bearing  arms. 

1  See  115.  *  Omit  s  Review  174. 


I40  IJVTIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

3.  Caesar  ordered  ^   the    Nervii   to   be   protected   very 
carefully. 

4.  He  ordered  2  the  vanquished  to  use  their  own  towns. 

B.     I.    There  were  not  many  elders  capable ^  of  bearing 
arms. 

2.  Caesar   ordered  ^   the   ambassadors  to   surrender   to 
him. 

3.  In  order  to  seem  to  exercise  mercy,  Caesar  orders^ 
their  neighbors  to  spare  the  Nervii. 

276  CHAPTER   XXIX 


a.  cum    auxilio    Nervils    veni- 

rent. 

b,  cum  alias   bellum   Inferrent 

alias  inlatum  defenderent. 


a,  while  they  were  on  their  way 

to  help  the  Nervii. 

b,  when  at  one  time  they  made 

war,  at  another  defended 
themselves  when  attacked. 


A.  I.   While  we  were   on   our  way  to  help  you,  the 
battle  was  reported. 

2.  This  town  is  excellently  fortified  in  every  direction. 

3.  The  approach  had  been  fortified  with  rocks  of  great 
weight. 

4.  The  Cimbri  had  marched  into  Italy. 

5.  We  will  defend  ourselves  when  attacked. 

B.  I.   While  we  were  on  our  way  to  help  them,  it  was 
reported  that  a  battle  had  been  fought. 

2.  This  town,  which  is  excellently  fortified,  has  a  steep 
approach. 

3.  By  fortifying   this   wall,  they  defended   themselves 
when  attacked. 

1  Use  iubeo.  *  Use  impero.  *  Review  174. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  141 


277  CHAPTERS   XXX   AND   XXXI 


a,  valid    in    circuitu    XV    mi- 

lium. 

b,  quod    tanta    machinatio    ab 

tanto     spatio     instituere- 
tur. 

c,  traditis  armis. 


a,  by   a   wall   fifteen   miles   in 

circumference. 

b,  because  so  large  an  engine 

was  being   set  up  so  far 
off.     (See  173,  I.) 

c,  iftheir  arms  were  surrendered. 


A.  I.    The  fort  was   six  hundred  feet  in  circumference. 

2.  The  Romans  saw  that  they  kept  themselves  in  the 
town. 

3.  A  tower  was  set  up  a  great  distance  off. 

4.  The  Gauls  laughed   because   the    Romans   were  so 
small. 

5.  We  will  surrender   ourselves   and   all   our  property 
to  you. 

6.  Caesar   used    his    customary  ^    kindness    which   the 
Gauls  had  heard  about. 

7.  He  says  that  Caesar  will  use  his  customary  ^  kind- 
ness which  the  Gauls  have  heard  about. 

8.  If  we  are  deprived  of  our  arms,  the  enemy  will  kill 
our  children. 

B.  I.    A  tower  fifty  feet  in  circumference  was  set  up  a 
great  distance  off. 

2.  The  Gauls  laughed  because  the  Romans  expected  to 
move  this  tower. 

3.  If  the  Romans  can  move  such  an  engine,  they  have 
divine  help. 

4.  Quote  3,  indirectly  after  Galli  putabant. 

5.  We  beg  for  one  favor;  do  not  deprive  us  of  our  arms. 

6.  If  our  arms  are  surrendered,  what  tortures  shall  we 
not  suffer } 

1  Suus, 


142.  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


278  CHAPTER  XXXII 


a.  finitimis     imperaturum     ne 
quam  iniuriam  inferrent. 


a.  that  he  would  order  their 
neighbors  not  to  inflict  any 
injury.     (See  72.) 


A.  I.    If  you  will  not  inflict  any  injury  on  us,  we  will 
surrender. 

2.  Quote  I  indirectly  after  dixerunt. 

3.  They  threw  so  many  weapons  into  the  ditch  that  the 
piles  equaled  the  top  of  the  wall. 

4.  If^   the   arms   are    concealed,   they  will   not  enjoy 
peace. 

B.  I.    If  you  will  not  inflict  any  injury  on  us,  we  will 
do  what  you  order. 

2.  Quote  I  indirectly  after  dicunt. 

3.  Although  many  arms  were  concealed,  yet  they  en 
joyed  peace. 

279  CHAPTER   XXXIII 

a.  concursum  est. 


b.  capitum  numerus  relatus 
est  milium  quinquaginta 
trium. 


a.  there  was  a  rush,  they  ran 

together. 

b.  the    number    of    souls   was 

reported  to  be  fifty-three 
thousand. 


A.    I.    Let  the   townsmen   receive   no  injury  from  our 
men. 

2.  The   Gauls    believed    Caesar    would   withdraw  the 
garrisons. 

3.  Had  they  formed  this  plan  before } 

-    4.   There  was  a  rush  to  fight  the  enemy. 

1  Avoi4  the  use  of  si. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  I4i 

5.  Although  there  were  many  defenders,  the  gates  were 
broken  down. 

6.  The  number  of  those  who  were  killed  was  said  to  be 
four  thousand. 

B.     I.    Caesar  orders  the  soldiers  not  to  inflict  any  injury 
on  the  Gauls. 

2.  If   this   plan  was  entered  upon  before,  ought  ^  the 
townsmen  to  have  been  sold  ^  ? 

3.  There  was  a  rush  on  the  part  of^  the  Romans  to 
fight  the  enemy. 

4.  The  number  of  those  who  were  killed  was  said  to  be 
four  thousand. 

280        CHAPTERS   XXXIV  AND   XXXV 

a.  uti    legati    mitterentur    qui     a.  that  ambassadors  were  sent 
poUicerentur.  to  promise. 

A.  I.   Crassus  informed  Caesar  that  the  states  along 
the  coast  ^  had  been  pacified. 

2.  He   sent  officers   to   lead  the    legions  into   winter 
quarters. 

3.  Such  a  thanksgiving  had  never  been  voted  up  to  this 
time. 

4.  They  promised  *  to  return  to  Caesar. 

5.  We  will  do  what  he  orders. 

B.  I.    Crassus  informed  Caesar  that  the  states  which 
bordered  the  ocean  had  been  pacified. 

2.  He  sends  officers  to  lead  the  legions  among  the  states 
where  the  war  had  been  waged. 

3.  Such  a  thanksgiving  had  never  been,  voted  up  to  this 
time  in  honor  of  any  one. 

1  Review  112.  2  •«  on  the  part  of"  —  what  does  this  mean  ? 

8  "  along  the  coast "  —  use  one  word.    <  "  to  return  "  —  ace.  and  fut.  infinitive. 
5  "  To  have  been  sold  "  —  venire.    The  passive  of  vendo  is  supplied  by  veneo. 


144 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XXVII-XXXV 

281.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  de 
clension  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  instituo. 

2.  insisto. 

3.  indico. 

4.  iaceo. 

5.  iacio. 

6.  conficio. 

7.  deleo. 

8.  ascendo. 

9.  ago. 

10.  redigo. 

11.  praesto,  in  trans. 

and  trans. 

12.  audeo. 

13.  defendo. 

14.  respondeo. 

15.  trado. 

16.  contineo. 

17.  in  video. 

18.  consuescd. 

19.  confido. 

20.  attingo. 

21.  adaequo. 

22.  celo. 

23.  cado. 

24.  accido. 

25.  occido. 


26.  consilium  inire. 

27.  inermis. 

28.  nequiquam. 

29.  vulnus. 

30.  extremus. 

31.  iniuria. 

32.  consensus. 

33.  consentio. 

34.  iter. 

35.  pondus. 

36.  saxum. 

37.  mansuetudo. 

38.  dementia. 

39.  quis,  inter,  and 

indef. 

40.  condicio. 

41.  exiguitas. 

42.  exiguus. 

43.  eruptio. 

44.  supplicatio. 

45.  supplicium. 

46.  pellis. 

47.  vis. 

48.  praesertim. 

49.  sicut. 

50.  noctu. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  I45 

282.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Genitive  and  ablative  of  quality,  22,  49. 

2.  Dative  with  verbs  meaning  command^  obey,  etc.,  32. 

3.  Verbs  used  impersonally. 

4.  Constructions  with  mbed  and  impero,  147,  148. 

5.  Principal  statements  and  subordinate  clauses  in  in- 
direct discourse,  160,  166. 

6.  Uses  of  si^us,  se^  sibi,  and  ipse,  65,  69,  74. 

7.  Relative  clauses  of  result  and  characteristic,  145.  i, 
174. 

283.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  281  and  the  constructions 
of  282.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


LATIN    PROSE   COMP. 


y' 


Book   III 

284  CHAPTER   I 

1.  What  reason  had^   Caesar  for   opening   up  a  road 
through  the  Alps  ? 

2.  I  will   permit  you,  if  you  think  there  is  need,  to  ^ 
winter  in  this  place. 

3.  Galba  was  permitted  ^  to  ^  go  among  the  Alps. 

4.  There  were  two  parts  in  the  village  of  Octodurus ; 
one  *  the  soldiers  occupied,  the  other  Galba  fortified. 


285  CHAPTER   II 

1.  The  Gauls   who   had   left  the  village  occupied  the 
mountains. 

2.  They  informed  Galba  that  the  Gauls  who^  had  left 
the  village  were  occupying  the  mountains. 

3.  Will  the  Romans  be  able  to  sustain  the  Gauls*  attack, 
if  ^  many  of  the  soldiers  are  withdrawn  ? 

4.  We  are  persuaded  that  the  Romans  have  taken  the 
children  away  from  the  Gauls. 


1  See  34.  2  Do  not  use  the  infinitive. 

8  See  32,  2.  *  See  73. 

6  "who  .  .  .  village"  —  is  a  subordinate  clause  in  indirect  discourse  ever  in 
the  indicative  ? 

•  Express  the  condition  in  some  other  way  than  by  using  sL 

146 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR  1 47 

286  CHAPTER   III 

1.  Sufficient  provision  for  supplies  had  not  been  made. 

2.  Can  supplies  be   brought   up   when   the   roads   are 
blocked  ? 

3.  Some  said,  "  Let-^  us  go  back  by  the  same  roads  by 
which  we  came." 

4.  The  majority,  however,  did  not  decide  to  hasten  to  a 
place  2  of  safety. 

287  CHAPTERS   IV  AND   V 

1.  The  signal  was  given,  and  the  enemy  hurled  stones 
on  the  camp. 

2.  The  Romans  will  aid  that^  part  which  is  deprived  of 
defenders. 

3.  Not  only  not  the  weary,  but  not  even  the  wounded, 
retreated. 

4.  On  *  account  of  the  failing  strength  of  our  men,  the 
situation  was  critical. 

5.  He  said  to  Galba,  "  If  we  make  a  sally,  there  is  one 
hope  of  safety." 

6.  Therefore  Galba  said,  "Stop   the  fight  and  refresh 
yourselves." 

7.  Tell  the  soldiers  to  ^  rush  out  of  camp. 

288  CHAPTER   VI 

I.    You  leave  us  no^  opportunity  either  of  learning  what 
is  going  on  or  of  collecting  our  wits. 

1  See  115.  2  "a  place  of"  —  omit. 

8"thatpart  which"  — study  the  text  — quaecumque  pars  .  .  .  eo. 
^  "  on  .  .  .  men,"  express  by  a  clause.  ^  See  147,  148. 

6  Combine  the  negative  with  "  either  "  and  "  or." 


148  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

2.  We  entertained  the  hope  of  surrounding  the  enemy. 

3.  Galba  came  into  the  Alps  with  one  purpose,  but  met 
a  different  situation.^ 

4.  Since  the  enemy  had  been  defeated,  Galba  returned 
to  the  province. 

289  CHAPTERS   VII   AND   VIII 

1.  Caesar 2  had  every  reason  to  believe  that  he  could 
start  for  Illyricum. 

2.  The  cause  of  the  sudden  war  that  broke  out  near  the 
ocean  was  as  follows : 

3.  The  Veneti  kept  Caesar's  ambassadors  with  the  pur- 
pose of  getting  back  their  own  hostages. 

4.  All  who  are  in  the  habit  of   using  the  harbors  are 
tributaries  of  the  Veneti. 

5.  In  many  respects  the  Veneti  surpassed  the  Romans. 

6.  We  had  rather^  recover  our   hostages  than  put  up 
with  the  slavery  of  the  Romans. 

7.  They  said  to  Crassus  that  they  would  send  back  the 
ambassadors,  if  he  would  give  up  their  hostages. 

290  CHAPTER   IX 

1.  Crassus  informed  Caesar  of  all  these  matters. 

2.  After  many  war  vessels  had  been  built,  Caesar  him- 
self came  just  as  soon  as  possible. 

3.  We  see  what  a  crime  we  have  been  guilty  of. 

4.  Since  you  have  thrown  ambassadors  into  chains,  get 
ready  for  war. 

1  Use  res.  2  Cf.  text  —  cum  omnibus  .  .  .  existimSret 

•  "  we  had  rather  "=  we  prefer. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


149 


5.  We  are  confident  that  nothing  will  happen  contrary 
to  expectation. 

6.  The  Veneti  think  they  know  the  shallows  in  those 
places  where  they  will  carry  on  ^  war. 

7.  Let  us  get  together  as  much  grain  as  possible. 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   I-IX 

291.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  declension 
of  nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  pertineo. 

2.  volo. 

3.  malo. 

4.  nolo. 

5.  permittS. 

6.  patior. 

7.  concede. 

8.  premo. 

9.  detraho. 

10.  abstraho. 

1 1 .  sustineo. 

12.  doles. 

13.  persuades. 

14.  intercludo. 

15.  placeo. 

16.  attribuo. 

1 7.  antecedo,  with  the  ace. 

18.  discedo. 

19.  excedo. 

20.  succedo. 


21.  insto. 

22.  consto. 

23.  colligo. 

24.  reficio. 

25.  potior. 

26.  occurro. 

27.  adeo. 

28.  coorior. 

29.  secundus. 

30.  castellum. 

31.  undique. 

32.  ubique. 

33.  vallis. 

34.  vallum. 

35.  aliquot. 

36.  consilium  capere. 

37.  singillatim. 

38.  frustra. 

39.  paucitas. 

40.  satis. 


1  See  94. 


150  Latin  prose  composition— part  ii 


41.  hiems. 

42.  concilium. 

43.  consilium. 

44.  sententia. 

45.  opinio. 


46.  portus. 

47.  defectio. 

48.  deficio. 

49.  integer. 

50.  incolumis. 


292.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Ablative  with  utor, potior,  etc.,  44. 

2.  The  gerundive  construction  with  these  verbs. 

3.  Object  clauses  with  verbs  of  feeling.  Substantive 
clauses  introduced  by  quod. 

4.  Intransitive  verbs  used  in  the  passive,  32.  2. 

5.  Causa  with  genitive  of  gerund  and  gerundive,  91,  93, 
142.  I,  2. 

6.  Conditional  clauses ;  simple  supposition  of  fact,  and 
supposition  of  something  contrary  to  fact,  1 21-123. 

293.  The  instructor  should  form  original  EngHsh  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  291  and  the  constructions 
of  292.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


294  CHAPTERS   X   AND   XI 

1.  Although   there  were   many  difficulties,  yet  Caesar 
thought  he  ought  to  wage  war. 

2.  If  this  revolt  is  overlooked,  the  Morini  will  think  they 
may  ^  do  the  same  thing. 

3.  All  men  ought  ^  to  hate  slavery. 

4.  He  instructed  Labienus  to  go  with  the  cavalry. 

1  Review  carefully  117,  119.  «  See  iii. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  I51 

5.  Caesar    sent   Crassus    to    keep    the    enemy    from^ 
uniting. 

6.  He  took  care  2   that   aid   should   not   be   sent  from 
Aquitania. 

295  CHAPTER   Xn 

1.  The  towns  were  so  situated  that  there  was  no  access 
either  on  foot  or  by  ships. 

2.  Caesar,  therefore,  shut  off  the  sea  by  dikes  which  ^ 
he  made  equal  to  the  walls  of  the  town. 

3.  They  can  remove   their   goods   on  account  of  their 
abundance  of  ships. 

4.  The  tide  ebbs  twice  every  twenty-four  hours. 

296  CHAPTER   Xni 

1.  The   ships   of   the  Veneti   are   flat-bottomed,  so  as 
more  easily  to  encounter  the  shoals. 

2.  Since  they  were  made  wholly  of  oak  they  could  en- 
dure any  violence. 

3.  They  thought  that  linen  sails  would  not   withstand 
such  severe  gales  of  wind. 

4.  Their  ships  can't  be  harmed  with  the  ram. 

5.  They  were  of  such  great  height  that  weapons  could 
not  easily  be  thrown  to  them. 

6.  Our  ships  had  to  fear  the  rocks  and  shoals. 

297  CHAPTER   XIV 

1.  Caesar  decided  that  he  ought  not  to  spend  so  much 
labor  in  vain. 

2.  It  is  not  clear  to  me  what  plan  of  battle  to  adopt. 

1  See  150.  2  Q{^  in  the  text  —  qui  earn  .  .  .  curet.  8  gee  174. 


152  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

3.  The  enemy  cannot   be  injured  with   the   towers  on 
account  of  the  height  of  their  ships. 

4.  The  poles  that  were  prepared  by  our  men  were  very 
useful. 

5.  Our  soldiers  surpass  the  Veneti  in  valor. 

6.  No  deed  of  valor  escaped  notice,  because  Caesar  had 
a  view  of  the  sea. 

298  CHAPTERS   XV  AND   XVI 

1.  The  enemy  sought  safety  in  flight,  when  they  noticed 
our  men  boarding  ^  their  ships. 

2.  The  calm  was  so  sudden  that  we  could  easily  finish 
the  business. 

3.  We  will  follow  up  and  capture  the  ships  one  by  one. 

4.  Let  us  collect  into  one  place  whatever  ships  we  have 
anywhere. 

5.  We  have  no  place  to  retreat  ^  to. 

6.  Caesar  decided  that  they  must  be  sold  into  slavery. 

299  CHAPTER   XVII 

1.  While  Caesar  was^  fighting  with  the  Veneti,  many 
states  revolted. 

2.  When  the  gates  are  closed,  we  will  unite  with  them. 

3.  Every  day  the  enemy  offered  Sabinus  a  chance  to 
fight. 

4.  We  will  stay  in  camp,  although   we   are  somewhat 
criticised. 

5.  Ought  Sabinus  to  fight  when  Caesar  is  absent.^ 

1  Do  not  use  the  participle.  2  Cf.  in  *ext  —  quo  se  reciperent. 

3  See  102,  3. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  1 53 

300  CHAPTER   XVIII 

1 .  He  persuaded  a  certain  man  to  set  forth  the  fear  of 
t   the  Romans. 

2.  The  Gauls  did  not  know  when  Sabinus  would  set  out 
from  his  camp. 

3.  We  ought  not  to  lose  an  opportunity  of  going  to  the 
camp. 

4.  We  shall  not  hasten  to  the  camp  until  ^  we  have 
taken  arms. 

5.  We  have  collected  fagots  to  fill  the  ditch  with. 

301  CHAPTER  XIX 

1 .  The  Romans  rallied  and  armed  themselves  in  as  little 
time  as  possible. 

2.  When  the  enemy  arrived,  all  out  of  breath,  Sabinus 
gave  his  men  the  signal  which  they  desired.^ 

3.  As  a  result^  of  the  bravery  of  our  men,  not  even  one 
of  the  enemy  escaped. 

4.  Sabinus  informed  Caesar  of  his  victory. 

5.  The  Gauls  are  quick  to  surrender. 

REVIEW  OF   CHAPTERS   X-XIX 

302.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  learning  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  de- 
clension of  nouns  and  adjectives  : 


1.  desum. 

2.  deficio. 

3.  careo. 

4.  praesum. 


5.  nosco. 

6.  distribuo. 

7.  partior. 

8.  pareo. 


1  See  156.  2  Cf.  in  the  text  —  cupientibus  signum  dat. 

8  Cf.  in  the  text — factum  est  .  .  .  ut  .  .  .  ferrent. 


154 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


9.  comparo. 

10.  noceo. 

11.  concido. 

12.  concido. 

13.  consector. 

14.  amitto. 

15.  admitto. 

16.  neglego. 

17.  licet. 

18.  studeo. 

19.  odi  (see  106). 

20.  mando. 

21.  euro. 

22.  trado. 

23.  navigatio. 

24.  classis. 

25.  facultas. 

26.  opportunitas. 

27.  occasio. 

28.  tempestas. 

29.  funis. 


30.  poUiceor. 

31.  poUicitatiO. 

32.  ferreus. 

33.  similis. 

34.  alacer. 

35.  eiusmodi. 

36.  admodum. 

37.  clam. 

38.  f acinus. 

39.  officium. 

40.  imprimis. 

41.  onus. 

42.  servitus. 

43.  quemadmodum. 

44.  quidam. 

45.  quidem. 

46.  lateo. 

47.  perfero. 

48.  adaequo. 

49.  siimo. 

50.  contumelia. 


303.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Dative  with  compounds  of  suniy  33. 

2.  Predicate  genitive.     (Consult  grammar.) 

3.  Place  where,  whence,  whither.     (Consult  grammar.) 

4.  Gerundive  with  curd,  trade,  etc.     (Consult  grammar.) 

5.  Constructions   with  priusquam  and  with  postquam, 
152,  154. 

6.  Concessive  clauses,  171. 

304.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  302  and  the  constructions 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  1 55 

of  303.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


305  CHAPTER  XX 

1.  I  see  that  we  must  fight  in  the  same  place  where  a 
Roman  army  has  been  defeated. 

2.  A  few  years  ago  Manlius  lost  his  baggage,  because^ 
he  did  not  use  ordinary  diligence. 

3.  The  Romans  were  not  very  strong  in  cavalry. 

4.  Place  your  infantry  in  the  valley  in  ambush. 


306  CHAPTER  XXI 

1.  Let  us  rely  on  our  bravery,  and  not  turn  and  flee. 

2.  What  can  you  do  when  ^  you  have  no  general  ? 

3.  We  perceived  that  the  Aquitanians  were  skillful  ^  in 
working  mines. 

4.  They  asked  Caesar  to  do  this. 


307  CHAPTER   XXn 

1.  We  shall  enjoy  life  along  with  those  to  whose  friend 
ship  we  have  pledged  ourselves. 

2.  If  anything  happens  to  you,  we  shall  commit  suicide. 

3.  There  is  no  one  who  will  refuse  to  die,  if*  his  friend 
is  killed. 

4.  Although^  he  was  repulsed,  yet  he  fought  bravely. 


1  See  89, 173.  2  ••  when  ...  no  "= without.  «  See  24. 

*  Do  not  use  si.  *  See  87. 


156  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

308  CHAPTER   XXIII 

1 .  The  town  was  taken  a  few  days  after  ^  we  arrived 

2.  Let  us  ask  for  help  and  exchange  hostages. 

3.  Do  not  think  that  they  have  not  great  skill  in  Roman 
customs. 

4.  We  ought  not  to  hesitate  ^  to  cut  the  enemy  off  from 
supplies. 

5.  Do  you  all  entertain  the  same  opinion  ? 

309  CHAPTER   XXIV 

1.  Let  us  wait  to  see  what  plan  the  enemy  will  adopt. 

2.  I  think  it  will  not  be  safe  to  lead  ^  out  our  troops  and 
draw  up  a  double  line  of  battle. 

3.  We  shall  attack  the  Romans  while  they  are  re- 
treating.^ 

4.  We  must  no  longer  delay  encouraging  the  soldiers. 

310  CHAPTER  XXV 

1.  Some  hurled  weapons,  while*  others  provided  stones 

2.  We  do  not  put  much  confidence  in  you.^ 

3.  We  announced  to  Crassus  that  the  enemy  were  fight- 
ing fearlessly. 

311  CHAPTER  XXVI 

1.  We  urged  them  to  show  us  what  was  being  done. 

2.  The  horsemen  are  being  led  around  by  a  longer 
route,  so  that  the  attention  of  the  enemy  may  not  be  fixed 
on  them.^ 

1  Ct  in  text  —  paucis  diebus  quibus.    2  See  text  and  note  exception  to  136,  i. 
«  Use  the  participle.  *  Omit.  ^  See  32.  «  Review  65. 


CAESAR,    GALLIC   WAR  1 57 

3.  They  demolished  the  gate  before  they  were  seen  by 
the  enemy. 

4.  It  is  clear  that  thirty  thousand  Gauls  were  killed. 

312  CHAPTER  XXVIII 

1.  They  are  the  only  ones  left  whom^  Caesar  has  not 
conquered. 

2.  I  think  that  Caesar  carries  on  war  in  a  very  different 
manner  from  the  Morini. 

3.  When  we  betook  ourselves  and  all  our  property  into 
the  woods,  Caesar  could  not  attack  us. 

4.  We  lost  a  few  of  our  men,  because  ^  we  followed  the 
enemy  too  far. 

313  CHAPTER  XXIX 

1.  Having^  cut  down  the  forest,  Caesar  piled  up  the 
material  as  a  rampart. 

2.  On  account  of  the  rains,  the  soldiers  cannot  remain 
longer  in  their  tents. 

3.  Caesar  will  burn  their  villages  and  lead  his  army  into 
winter  quarters. 

REVIEW  OF   CHAPTERS   XX-XXIX 

314.  Review  thoroughly  the  meaning  of  the  following 
words,  learning  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 

1.  aestimo.  5.  committO. 

2.  existimo.  6.  ostendo. 

3.  intellego.  7.  cupio. 

4.  adorior.  8.  perspicio. 

i  See  174.  «  Review  173.  8  See  85,  89. 


158 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


9.  conspiciO. 

10.  obsideo. 

11.  reperiO. 

12.  toUo. 

13.  impetro. 

14.  impero. 

15.  inter cludO. 

16.  augeo. 

17.  decerto. 

18.  arbitror. 

19.  supersum. 

20.  despero. 

21.  repello. 

22.  depello. 

23.  vetus. 

24.  praemium. 

25.  ultro. 

26.  palus. 

27.  item. 

28.  latitude. 

29.  multitudo. 


30.  finitimus 

31.  nominatim. 

32.  plurimum  valere,  posse. 

33.  fretus. 

34.  sine. 

3  5 .   adulescentulus. 

36.  imber. 

37.  materia. 

38.  pecus. 

39.  deinceps. 

40.  commodum. 

41.  casus. 

42.  causa. 

43.  adhuc. 

44.  quisquam. 

45.  quisque. 

46.  tandem. 

47.  tamen. 

48.  adsuetus. 

49.  peritus. 

50.  consto. 


315.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax: 

1.  Genitive  with  adjectives,  24. 

2.  Ablative  of  respect,  47. 

3.  Passive  periphrastic  and  future  infinitives,  95,  109. 

4.  Quo  in  purpose  clauses,  143.  2. 

5.  Supine  to  express  purpose,  96.  i. 

6.  Conditions  referring  to  future  time,  124,  125. 

316.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  314  and  the  constructions 
of  315.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


Book  IV 

317  CHAPTER   I 

1.  In  the  consulship  of  Pompey  and  Crassus,  the  Ger- 
mans came  into  Gaul  on  account  of  their  being  hard 
pressed  by  the  Suevi. 

2.  The  Suevi  used  ^  to  lead  a  thousand  armed  men  from 
each  2  of  the  hundred  cantons. 

3.  The  former  stay  at  home,  while  the  latter  go  out  to 
wage  war. 

4.  No  one  is  allowed  *  to  own  land. 

5.  Freedom  of  life  makes  them  men  of  exti  aordinary 
power. 

318  CHAPTER   II 

1.  We  had  no  buyers  *  for  what  we  captured  in  war. 

2.  The  Germans  made  their  pack  horses  capable  of  very 
great  labor. 

3.  It  was  considered  very  disgraceful  to  use  wine. 

4.  Do  not  allow  yourselves  to  become  weakened. 

319  CHAPTER   III 

1.  They  say  that  their  neighbors  are  unable  to  with- 
stand the  violence  of  the  Suevi. 

2.  Merchants  resort  to  the  Ubii  often. 

3.  Although  the  Ubii  are  Germans,  yet  they  are  more 
civilized  than  the  Suevi. 

1  See  103.  2  Cf.  in  text  —  ex  quibus  .  .  .  singula  milia,  etc. 

*  See  32.  2.  *  Cf.  in  text—  quibus  vendant. 

159 


l60  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

320  CHAPTER   IV 

1.  The  Usipites  wandered  about  in  Germany  for  many 
years. 

2.  Having  reached  the  Rhine,  the  Menapii  prevented 
them  from  ^  forcing  a  passage  over  the  river. 

3.  Scouts  informed  the  Menapii  that  the  Germans  had 
returned  home. 

4.  At  last  they  came  back  again  and  seized  many  ships. 

5.  They  crossed  the    Rhine   before   the  Menapii  were 
informed  of  their  arrival. 

321  CHAPTER  V 

1.  Caesar  fears  that  the  Gauls  are  desirous  of  a  change 
of  government. 

2.  The  Gauls  ask  travelers,  *'  From  what  regions  have 
you  come.'*" 

3.  You  will  have  to  repent  of  the*'^  schemes  you  have 
entered  upon. 

322  CHAPTER  VI 

1.  The  things  we^  expected  would  happen  have  taken 
place. 

2.  They  invited  us  to   send   ambassadors  earlier  than 
usual. 

3.  I  think  we  ought  to  wage  war  with  the  Germans 

323  CHAPTER  VII 

1.  If  provoked,  we  do  not  refuse  to  resist  our  enemies. 

2.  Write  I  indirectly  *  after  dixerunt. 

1  See  150.  2  See  71.  5.  *  See  71.  4. 

*  Review  carefully  165-169. 


Caesar,  gallic  War  i6i 

3.  Resist  anybody  that  makes  war  on  you. 

4.  Write  3  indirectly  ^  after  dicit. 

5.  There  is  nobody  that  is  a  match  for  the  immortal 
gods. 

324  CHAPTERS   VIII   AND   IX 

1.  Caesar  says  that,  if  you  cannot  defend  your  own  ter- 
ritory, you  cannot  hold  that^  belonging  to  others. 

2.  You  may^  ask  help  of  the  Ubil 

3.  Having  reported  these  things  to  their  people,  the  am- 
bassadors returned  to  Caesar. 

4.  They  asked  Caesar  to  wait  for  their  cavalry,  so  as  to 
cause  a  delay. 

325  CHAPTER  X 

1.  The  Meuse  approaches  the  Rhine  not  more  than 
eighty  miles  from  the  ocean. 

2.  Those  who  live  on  the  islands  subsist  on  fish  and 
birds'  eggs. 

326  CHAPTER  XI 

The  Germans  did  not  wish  Caesar  to  advance  any  far- 
ther. Therefore,  in  order  to  cause  a  delay,  as  Caesar 
thought,  they  asked  him  to  give  them  time  to*  send  am- 
bassadors among  the  Ubii.  Caesar  said,  "  I  will  remain 
here  for  one  day ;  but  to-morrow  assemble  here  in  as  large 
numbers  as  possible."  He  said  to  the  prefects  who  were 
in  charge  of  the  cavalry,  *'  Do  not  provoke  the  enemy  to 
an  engagement." 

1  Review  carefully  165-169.  «  "  that  .  .  .  others  "  —  one  Latin  word. 

8  See  117,  118.  4  Cf.  in  text  — ad  has  res  conficiendas. 

LATIN   PROSE  COMP.  —  II 


1 62  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  FART  II 

327  CHAPTER  XII 

The  enemy,  although  our  cavalry  outnumbered  them, 
made  an  attack  quickly  on  our  men  while  they  had  no 
fear.  As  was  their  custom,  the  Germans  leaped  to 
their  feet  and  began  to  stab  our  horses  underneath.  A 
great  many  of  our  men  were  overthrown,  and  the  rest  fled 
until  ^  they  came  to  our  van.  Among  the  seventy-four  of 
our  men  that  were  killed  in  this  fight  was  Piso,  who  was 
thrown  from  his  horse  and  killed,  while  ^  he  was  rescuing 
his  brother  from  danger. 

328  CHAPTER  XIII 

After  Caesar  had  learned  of  this  battle,  thinking  that  it 
was  the  height  of  folly  to  wait  until  the  enemy  had  time  to 
collect  their  forces,  he  decided  that  he  ought  not  to  listen 
to  their  ambassadors  Therefore,  when  a  crowd  ^  of  Ger- 
mans came  to  camp  on  the  next  morning  to  excuse  them- 
selves for  3  having  attacked  his  cavalry,  he  thought  it  a 
very  opportune  occurrence,*  and  retained  them  all.  He 
led  all  his  troops  out  of  camp  and  decided  to  give  battle. 

REVIEW   OF  CHAPTERS   I-XIII 

329.  Review  the  following  vocabulary  thoroughly,  memo- 
rizing the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  declension  ot 
nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  adsuefacio. 

2.  consuesco. 

3.  desilio. 


4.  tueor. 

5.  communico. 

6.  transeo. 


1  Dum,  see  156.  2  •«  a  crowd  of  Germans  ••=the  Germans  in  crowds. 

8  "  for  having  "=because  they  had.  ■*  res. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


163 


7.  prohibeo. 

8.  alo. 

9.  incol5. 

10.  vendo. 

11.  fallo. 

12.  adhibeO. 

13.  sustineo. 

14.  reverter. 

15.  studeo. 

16.  servio. 

17.  occurrS. 

18.  resisto. 

19.  attribuO. 

20.  concedo. 

21.  appropinquo. 

22.  antecedo. 

23.  inter cludO. 

24.  obtineO. 

25.  occupo. 

26.  offero. 

27.  vis. 

28.  vestitus. 

29.  vestigium. 


30.  metus. 

31.  timor. 

32.  perfidia. 

33.  humilis. 

34.  hiems. 

35.  quotannis. 

36.  cotidie. 

37.  cis. 

38.  citra. 

39.  sedes. 

40.  considO. 

41.  aliquot 

42.  par. 

43.  pars. 

44.  oro. 

45.  peto. 

46.  quaerO. 

47.  queror. 

48.  consilium 

49.  fingo. 

50.  invito. 


{inire. 
capere. 


330.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Genitive  of  possession  and  genitive  of  description  used 
in  the  predicate,  20,  22. 

2.  Uses  of  suiis^  sui^  sibi^  se,  65,  69. 

3.  Indirect  object  used  with  transitive  verbs,  with  in- 
transitive verbs  of  special  meaning,  with  compound  verbs. 
How  are  these  verbs  used  in  the  passive  ?  31-33. 

4.  Indirect  statements,  commands,  questions,  134,  160, 
162,  166. 


l64  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

5.  Object  clauses  after  verbs  of  commanding,  requesting,    , 
urging,  etc.,  147. 

6.  Clauses  dependent  on  verbs  of  swearing  and  promisingc 

331.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  329  and  the  constructions 
of  330.  Tkese  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


332  CHAPTER  XIV 


4 


Caesar  arrived  at  the  Germans*  camp  before  there  was 
time  to  seize  arms.  They  were  so  alarmed  at  his  sudden 
arrival  that  they  were  perplexed  as  ^  to  whether  it  would 
be  better  to  fly  in  all  directions  or  to  resist  the  Romans.  I 
Those  who  could  seize  arms  defended  the  camp,  but  the 
rest  fled  and  were  overtaken  by  Caesar's  cavalry. 

333  CHAPTER  XV 

So  many  of  the  Germans  were  being  killed  that  the  rest 
abandoned  everything,  rushed  out  of  camp,  and  fled  to  the 
Rhine.  There  some  were  killed,  and  others  were  over- 
powered by  the  force  of  the  river.  Although  Caesar  gave 
to  those  who  had  remained  in  camp  the  privilege  of  depart- 
ing, they  wished  to  remain  with  him,  owing  to  their  fear  2 
of  the  Gauls. 

334  CHAPTER  XVI 

Caesar  wished  to  cross  the  Rhine,  so  that  the  Germans 
might  fear  for  their  own  interests  and  be  induced  to  ^  re- 

1  "  as  to  "  —  omit.  2  Do  not  use  a  noun. 

*  Do  not  use  the  infinitive. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  165 

turn  home  to  defend  their  own  territory.  Another  reason  ^ 
was  that  the  Sugambri  would  ^  not  surrender  to  Caesar  the 
horsemen  who  had  crossed  the  Meuse.  They  said  to 
Caesar,  **  It  is  not  fair  that  you  should  claim  any  power  or 
authority  across  the  Rhine."  The  Ubii  also  were  being 
hard  pressed  by  the  Suevi,  and  were  urging  Caesar  not  to  ^ 
be  kept  from  helping  them  by  his  state  business.  They 
said  that  even  the  friendship  of  Caesar  would  be  very 
helpful  *  to  them,  now  that  the  Germans  had  been  defeated. 

335  CHAPTER   XVII 

Therefore  Caesar  decided  that  he  must  cross  the  Rhine. 
Although  the  Ubii  promised  to  give^  him  boats,  neverthe- 
less he  thought  he  must  build  a  bridge,  since  it  was  not 
quite  safe  or  consistent  with  his  dignity  to  carry  his  army 
over  in  ships.  ' 

336  CHAPTER   XVIII 

Ten  days  after  he  had  decided  upon  the  plan,  Caesar 
led  his  army  across  the  Rhine.  He  decided  that  he  must 
leave  a  strong  garrison  at  the  bridge  before  he  hastened 
among  the  Sugambri.  These,^  at  the  suggestion  of  their 
friends,  did  not  send  Caesar  hostages,  but  fled  into  the 
woods. 

337  CHAPTER   XIX 

While  Caesar  was^  waiting  among  the  Sugambri,  he 
burned  all  their  villages  and  buildings.     He  then  learned 

1  Cf.  in  text  —  accessit  etiam  quod.  2  gee  117. 

8  Do  not  use  the  infinitive.  ^  See  37.  *       ' 

6  Use  the  future  infinitive.  6  Use  the  relative  pronoun,  see  71,  6, 

'  See  102,  2. 


1 66  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

from  the  Ubii,  whom  he  promised  to  help,  that  the  Suevi 
had  found  out  about  the  bridge  and  had  gathered  them- 
selves and  all  their  property  into  one  place ;  and  that  they 
would  wait  thefe,  if  Caesar  decided  to  fight.  Caesar  had 
crossed  the  Rhine  to  frighten  the  Germans,  to  punish  the 
Sugambri,  and  to  free  the  Ubii  from  their  enemies.  There- 
fore ^  when  he  found  that  these  objects  had  all  been  accom- 
pUshed,  he  decided  to  retreat  into  Gaul. 

338  CHAPTER  XX 

Caesar  had  noticed  that  the  Britons  were  very  useful  to 
the  Gauls  in  war.  Therefore,  although  ^  a  small  part  of 
summer  remained,  he  decided  that  he  ought  to  find  out 
about  the  kind  of  people  and  about  the  harbors.  And  so, 
when  he  could  not^  find  out  from  the  merchants  what 
sort*  of  people  they  were,  or^  how  large  the  harbors  were, 
he  decided  to  set  out  for  Britain  in  person.^ 

339  CHAPTER  XXI 

Volusenus  was  sent  forward  with  a  galley,  and  was  com- 
manded to^  make  a  careful  investigation.  He  came  back 
in  five  days  and  reported  that  he  had  not  dared  to  disem- 
bark. In  the  meantime,  while  Caesar  was  collecting  ships 
among  the  Morini,  ambassadors  came  to  him  from  the 
island  to  promise  friendship.  He  urged  them  to^  submit 
to  the  power  of  the  Romans,  and  allowed  them  to^  return 
home.  He  ordered  Commius,  who  was  very  highly  ^  re- 
garded by  them,  to  return  to  the  island  with  them  and  to 
announce  his  own  coming. 

1  qua  re*.  2  See  171.  « neque. 

*  "  What  sort  of"  —  qualis  ?  6  See  74,  i.  «  See  147. 

'  **  was  .  .  .  regarded,"  cf.  the  text  —  magnl  habebatur,  and  see  zg. 


I 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR  I67 

340  CHAPTER  XXII 

The  Morini  excused  themselves  for  their  former  deeds 
on  the  ground  that  they  were  unacquainted  with  Roman 
customs.  Caesar,  therefore,  promised  to  receive  them 
under  his  protection,  and  ordered  them  to  give  a  large 
number  of  hostages.  He  then  decided  that  he  ought  to 
start  at  once  with  what  ships  he  had,  since  he  feared  that 
the  wind  in  a  short  time  might  keep  him  from  ^  sailing.^ 


341  CHAPTER  XXIII 

Since  the  cavalry  were  boarding  their  ships  too  slowly, 
Caesar  started  ahead  with  a  few  vessels  and  reached  Brit- 
ain first.  When  he  perceived  that  the  enemy  were  drawn 
up  on  the  hills,  and  could  hurl  weapons  on  his  men  as  they 
disembarked,  he  decided  that  he  ought  to  wait  until  ^  the 
rest  of  the  ships  could  help  him.  In  the  meantime  he 
gathered  his  officers  together,  and  showed  them  how^  he 
wished  everything  carried  out. 


342  CHAPTER  XXIV 

When  the  barbarians  learned  what  Caesar  had  decided 
to  do,  they  sent  forward  their  cavalry  and  charioteers  to 
keep  the  Romans  from  disembarking.  The  Romans,  how- 
ever, were  greatly  hindered  because  they  had  to  fight 
while  ^  standing  in  deep  water,  while  ^  the  enemy  could 
hurl  their  weapons  from  dry  land. 

1  Cf.  in  text  —  vento  tenebantur  qu5  minus  .  .  .  possent. 

2  solvo.  8  See  156.  ■*  quern  ad  modum. 
•  Which  of  these  two  ideas  may  be  expressed  by  the  participle  ? 


1 68  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

343  CHAPTER  XXV 

Caesar,  therefore,  in  order  to  dislodge  the  enemy,  sta- 
tioned the  galleys  on  the  exposed  flank  ol  the  barba- 
rians. They  were  so  alarmed  at  this  maneuver^  that 
they  halted  and  began  to  retreat.  The  standard  bearer '-^ 
of  one  of  the  legions  then  urged  his  comrades  to  jump 
down  into  the  water,  if  they  did  not  wish  to  betray  the 
eagle  to  the  barbarians.  Hereupon  they  all  jumped  from 
the  ships  and  did  their  duty  to  the  commonwealth  and  to 
their  general. 

344  CHAPTER  XXVI 

When  the  enemy  noticed  that  our  men  were  jumping 
one  2  from  one  ship,  another  from  another,  and  that  they 
could  not  get  a  firm  footing,  they  surrounded  them  one  by 
one,  and  threw  them  into  great  confusion.  But  as  soon  as 
Caesar  filled  the  skiffs  with  soldiers  and  sent  them  to  help 
his  men,  the  enemy  fled  and  the  Romans  were  able  to 
stand  on  dry  land.  Caesar  could  not  pursue  them  on 
account  of  the  lack  *  of  cavalry. 

REVIEW  OF  CHAPTERS  XIV-XXVI 

345.  Review  the  following  vocabulary  thoroughly, 
memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  declen- 
sion of  nouns  and  adjectives: 


1.  irrumpo. 

2.  immitto. 

3.  expono. 


4.  solvS. 

5.  ago,  several  meanings. 

6.  praesto. 


1  res.  2  See  71, 7.  ^  Cf.  in  text,  alius  alia  ex  navi. 

<  Do  not  use  a  noun.     Express  the  whole  idea  by  a  clause. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 


169 


7.   opprimo. 

29. 

attingS. 

8.   pereo. 

30. 

obsidio. 

9.   discedo. 

31. 

litus. 

10.   distribuo. 

32. 

motus. 

II.   auded. 

33. 

bim. 

12.   confido. 

34. 

exiguitas. 

13.   intersum. 

35. 

exiguus. 

14.   desum. 

36. 

onerarius. 

15.   praesum. 

37. 

onus. 

16.   praeficio. 

38. 

navis  longa. 

17.   nitor. 

39- 

insuefactus. 

18.    prodo. 

40. 

imperitus. 

19.    contendo. 

41. 

idoneus. 

20.   coepL  How  is  pass. used? 

42. 

ad  versus,  adj.  and  adv. 

21.   rescindo. 

43. 

incolumis. 

22.    succido. 

44. 

quisquam. 

23.    incendo. 

45. 

quisque. 

24.   perspicio. 

46. 

opinio. 

25.    adeo. 

47. 

sententia. 

26.   ulciscor. 

48. 

ratio. 

27.    comperio. 

49. 

nequaquam. 

28.   reperio. 

50. 

latus. 

346.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax: 

1.  Dative  with  compounds  of  sum. 

2.  Translations  of  the  ablative  absolute. 

3.  Constructions  with  cum  as  temporal,  causal,  and  con= 
cessive  conjunction,  153,  171,  173.  2. 

4.  Constructions  with,  postq nam,  ubi,  ut^  etc.,  152. 

5.  Constructions  ^ith.  priusqtmm  and  antegtiam,  154. 

6.  Simple  conditions  referring  to  present  and  past  time, 
and  conditions  referring  to  future  time  in  indirect  dis- 
course, 126,  169. 


170  LATIN    PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

347.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  345  and  the  constructions 
of  346.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 

348  CHAPTER  XXVII 

As  soon  as  the  battle  was  over,  the  Britons  came  to 
seek  peace.  Caesar  complained  because  they  had  arrested 
Commius,  whom  he  had  sent  to  them  as  an  envoy,  but,  at 
their  request,^  he  said  he  would  pardon  their  action. 
When  Caesar  ordered  ^  them  to  give  hostages,  they  replied, 
'*  We  will  give  part  of  them  at  once,  but  the  rest  we  shall 
have  to  summon  from  distant  places." 

349  CHAPTER  XXVIII 

Two  days  after  the  battle  was  fought,  the  ships  that  had 
taken  the  cavalry  on  board  approached  Britain,  and,  just 
as^  they  were  visible  from  the  shore,  they  were  driven 
back  by  a  storm,  some  to  the  place  from  which  they  had 
started  and  others  to  the  westward.  The  latter  cast 
anchor,  but  were  filling  with  water  and  of  necessity  made 
for  Gaul. 

350  CHAPTER   XXIX 

Caesar  did  not  know  that  the  full  moon  causes  very 
high  tides,  and  so  he  had  drawn  up  the  galleys  on  the 
beach,  and  had  anchored  the  transport  ships.  The  next 
day  he  found  that  the  former  were  filled  with  water,  and 
that  the  latter  were  being  dashed  about  by  the  storm.  All 
the  soldiers,  therefore,  were  greatly  alarmed,  fearing  that 
they  could  not  return  to  Gaul,  unless  the  ships  were  repaired. 

1  Use  ablative  absolute.  2  Use  irapero.  8  "  just  as  "  =  when. 


I 


CAESAR,  GALl.lC  WAR  171 

351  CHAPTER  XXX 

When  the  Britons  came  to  Caesar  after  the  battle,  they 
noticed  how  contracted  the  camp  was,  and  perceived  the 
confusion  of  the  Roman  army  on  account  of  the  loss  of 
their  ships.  They  therefore  felt  confident  that,  if  they 
should  rebeP  and  prolong  ^  the  matter  until  winter,  they 
could  cut  Caesar  off  from  supplies  and  thus  frighten  ^  any 
one  from  crossing  to  Britain  again. 

352  CHAPTER  XXXI 

Caesar,  suspecting^  from  the  fact  that  the  Britons  were 
conferring*  together  that  they  were  about  to  adopt  some 
new  plan,  sent  some  of  his  men  into  the  fields  for  grain, 
and  ordered  others  to  repair  the  ships.  The  soldiers  car- 
ried out  his  plans  with  such  zeal  that  he  was  ready  for 
every  emergency. 

353  CHAPTER  XXXII 

While  the  seventh  legion  was  foraging,  with^  no  sus- 
picion of  an  attack,  it  was  reported  to  Caesar  that  those 
who  were  on  guard  had  seen  a  cloud  ^  of  dust  in  that 
direction  where  the  legion  had  proceeded.  Suspecting 
that  the  enemy  were  attacking  his  men,  he  left  a  guard  at 
the  camp  and  went  at  once  to  help  his  soldiers.  He  found 
the  Romans  in  confusion,  because  they  had  been  sur- 
rounded while  engaged  in  reaping  the  grain. 

1  Use  ablative  absolute.  2  deterreo. 

8  What  tense  of  the  participle?    See  84. 

*  "  conferring  together,"  cf.  inter  se  conlocutl,  Chapter  30, 

6 "with  .  .  .  attack"  —  use  ablative  absolute. 

8  Express  this  idea  by  an  adjective. 


172  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  11 

354  CHAPTER  XXXIII 

Caesar  saw  how  the  Britons  fought  from  their  chariots. 
They  would  ^  ride  about  in  all  directions  and  try  to  frighten 
the  enemy.  Then  they  would  station  the  chariots  a  little 
distance  from  the  battle  and  fight  on  foot,  so  that  they 
might  retreat  to  them  easily,  should  there  be  any  need. 
They  accomplished  so  much  by  their  daily  practice  that 
they  displayed  in  battle  the  speed  of  cavalry  and  the 
steadiness  of  infantry. 

355  CHAPTER  XXXIV 

Although  the  Romans  recovered  from  fear  at  the  arrival 
of  help,  yet  Caesar  thought  he  ought  to  lead  his  men  back 
to  camp  without  ^  any  loss  of  time.  Meanwhile  the  storms 
that  followed  kept  the  enemy  from  attacking  Caesar. 
But,  after  sending  messengers  in  every  direction  to  tell 
their  people  how  few  soldiers  the  Romans  had,  the  Britons 
gathered  a  large  number  of  troops  to  attack  Caesar's  camp. 

356  CHAPTERS   XXXV  AND   XXXVI 

When  Caesar  had  obtained  a  few  horsemen  with  which 
to  pursue  the  enemy,  he  decided  that  it  was  best  to  draw 
up  a  Une  of  battle.  Just^  as  Caesar  expected,  the  Britons 
soon  fled,  and  many  of  them  were  killed  by  the  horsemen. 
At  the  conclusion  of  the  battle,  the  Britons  sent  ambassa- 
dors to  Caesar  to  say  that  they  would  do  whatever  he 
ordered.  When  the  weather  was  favorable,  he  set  sail  and 
arrived  at  Gaul  safely  in  a  short  time. 

1  See  103,  I.  2  "  vvithout  .  .  .  time  "  —  use  the  ablative  absolute. 

8  "  Just  as  .  .  .  expected  "  =  as  Caesar  thought  it  would  be. 


CAKSAR,   GALLIC   WAR  1 73 

357  CHAPTER   XXXVII 

Caesar  thought  that  the  Morini  were  subdued,  but  they 
attacked  about  three  hundred  of  his  soldiers  while  they 
were  hurrying  into  camp,  and  ordered  them  to  lay  down 
their  arms.  The  Romans  refused^  to  do  this,  and  de- 
fended themselves  for  several  hours  until  Caesar  sent  all 
the  cavalry  to  help  them.     Then  the  Morini  fled. 

358  CHAPTER   XXXVIII 

Caesar  sent  Labienus  to  bring  the  Morini  under  his 
power.  He  did  this^  very  easily,  because  the  Morini  had 
no  place  to^  use  as  a  refuge.  After  Titurius  and  Cotta 
had  laid  waste  the  fields  of  the  Menapii,  Caesar  led  his 
legions  back  into  winter  quarters. 

REVIEW  OF   CHAPTERS   XXVII-XXXVIII 

359.  Review  thoroughly  the  following  vocabulary,  memo- 
rizing the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  declension  of 
nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  adfligo. 

2.  egredior. 

3.  defero. 

4.  comprehendo. 

5.  ignosco. 

6.  tollo. 

7.  coorior. 

8.  compleo. 


9.  accido. 

10.  occido. 

11.  deligo. 

12.  conloquor. 

13.  prohibeo. 

14.  amitto. 

15.  ventito. 

16.  lacesso. 


1 "  refused  to  do  "  =  they  denied  that  they  would  do. 

2  Use  the  relative.    What  position  must  it  have  ?  8  gee  174, 


»74 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 


17.  nanciscor. 

18.  nascor. 

19.  consisto. 

20.  constituo. 

21.  subicio. 

22.  animadverto. 

23.  compltires. 

24.  aes. 

25.  praeda. 

26.  peditatus. 

27.  orbis. 

28.  infra. 

29.  confestim. 

30.  lenis. 

31.  unde. 

32.  inde. 

33.  clam. 


34.  commode. 

35.  confertus. 

36.  genus. 

37.  alienus. 

38.  tempestas. 

39.  etsi. 

40.  tergum. 

41.  continens. 

42.  nolo. 

43.  vulnus. 

44.  conspectus. 

45.  rebellio. 

46.  fere. 

47.  abdo. 

48.  praeceps. 

49.  plerumque. 

50.  eripio. 


360.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Place  where ^  whence,  whither, 

2.  Time  when^  within  which,  during  which,  51,  16. 

3.  Dative  of  service ;  translations  of  an  appositive,  36.  3, 

4.  Ways  of  expressing  purpose,  142,  143. 

5.  Active  and  passive  periphrastic,  94,  95. 

6.  Curd,  trddo,  do  with  the  gerundive. 

7.  Unreal  conditions  in  indirect  discourse,  169.  4,  5. 


361.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  359  and  the  constructions  of 
360.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


Note.  —  Words  in  small  capitals  are  synonyms  of  the  first  word  given. 


abandon,  relingud,  ere^  liqutt  Hctus^ 
LEAVE  BEHIND ;    abicioy  icercy  ieciy 

iectUS,  THROW  FROM  Or  AWAY. 

ability,  ingeniumy  z",  n. 

able,  am  able,  possum^  posse^  potut. 

about,  around,  circuniy  prep.  w.  ace; 

about,  circitery  adv.,  used  w.  numer- 
als ;   about,  concerning,  de  w.  abl. 
absent,  absensy  gen.  absentis, 
accept,  accipidy  cipercy  cepiy  ceptus. 
accomplish,  cdnficidy  ere,  feciy  fectus, 
accord,  his  own  accord,  sua  sponte. 
account,  on  account  of,  proptery  oby 

preps,  w.  ace. 
accuse,  accusdy  drey  dvTy  dtus, 
accustomed,    be    accustomed,    soleoy 

erCy    solitus    sum;    consuescoy   erey 

sueviy  su?tus, 
acknowledge,  confiteor ,  ert,  confessus 

sum. 
across,  trdnsy  prep.  w.  ace. 
adopt,  insisiOy  erey  stitiy  — ;   capidy  erey 

cepty   captus ;    instituoy  erey   stiiuiy 

stilutus.     See  use. 
advance,  progrediory  gredly  gressus 

sum. 
advise,  monedy  erey  uTy  iius ;  suddeoy 

erey  sudsTy  suasum, 
Aedui,  Aeduiy  drumy  m.  pi. 
affair,  resy  rely  f. 
afraid,  be  afraid  of,  timed,  ere,  ut.  — 

See  fear. 
aiXtly  postquam,  conj. 


against,  ««,  contrdy  preps,  w.  ace. 
aid,  auxiliumy  f,  n.;   iuvdy  drey  iuvt, 

iiitum. 
alarm,  commoveo^  erey  movty  motus, 
Alexander,  Alexandery  driy  m. 
alive,  be  alive,  be  living,  vtvoy  ere, 

vixTy  vTctus. 
all,     omniSy    <»,    every,    the    WHOLE, 

ENTIRE,     pi.,     ALL     (persons),     ALL 

(things) ;  tutus,  a,  «/;/,  all  the,  the 

WHOLE,  ENTIRE,  TOTAL  ;    UfliverSUSy 

Oy     uMy     ALL     (taken     together), 

WHOLE,  ENTIRE,  universal;    CUnctly 

aey  Uy  ALL  (united  in  a  body),  all 

TOGETHER. 

allow,  patiory  ty  passus  sum  ;  licety  ere, 
licuit  or  licitum  esty  used  imperson- 
ally. 

ally,  sociusy  f,  m. 

almost,  propey  adv. 

alone,  solusy «,  um, 

already,  iamy  adv. 

also,  et,  etiam. 

although,  quamquamy  quamvis,  cum, 
conjs.     See  171.  87.  6. 

always,  semper,  adv. 

am,  sumy  esse,  fuTy  futurus, 

ambassador,  I'egdtusy  f,  m. 

among,  inter y  prep.  w.  ace. ;  m,  prep, 
w.  abl.  and  ace. 

ancestors,  mdioresy  um,  m.  pi. 

and,  ety  -que,  ac  or  atquty  conjs.    See  82. 

angry,  be  angry  with,  trdsctr,  f,  trd- 
tus  sumy  w.  dat. 


239 


240 


ENGLlSH-LAtlN  VOCABULaRV 


announce,  nuniidy  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
another,  alius,  a,  ud.  \sum. 

answer,  responded,  ere,  spondi,  spon- 
any,  anybody,  any  one,  anything,  ali- 

quis  ;  in  a  negative  sentence,  iillus  ; 

after  sT,  nisi,  ne,  and  num,  quis. 
apologize,  satisfacid,  ere,  feet,  /actus. 
approach,  appropinqud,  dre,  dvi,  dtus, 

COME     NEAR    TO,     DRAW     NIGH,     W. 

dat. ;     adeo,   adire,   adivi   or    adii, 

aditus,  GO  TO,  VISIT,  w.  ace. 
arise,  codrior,  tri,  ortus  sum, 
arm  one's  self,  passive  of  armd,  dre, 

dvi,   dtus;   arma    capio,   ere,   cepi, 

captus. 
arms,  arma,  drum,  n.  pi. 
army,  exercitus,  iis,  m. 
around,  about,  circum,  w.  ace. 
arrest,    comprehendo,   ere,    prehendi, 

prehensus. 
arrival,  adventus,  us,  m. 
arrive,  pervenid,  ire,  vent,  ventum. 
as  much  .  .  .  as,  tantus  .  .  .  quan- 

tus,  a,  um  ;  tarn  ,  .  .  quam. 
as  soon  as,  simul  ac  (^atque)  ;  cum 

prlmum, 
as  soon  as  possible,  quam  prTmum, 

adv. 
ashamed,  something  causes  one  to  be 

ashamed,  pudet,  piidere,  puduit,  or 

puditum  est.     See  27. 
ask,  rogd,  dre,  dvi,  dtus ;  ask  advice 

of,  cjusuld,  ere,  consuluT,  cdnsultus, 

w.  ace;  ask  for,  demand,  postulJ, 

dre,  dvi,  dtus,  w.  ace. ;   quaero,  ere, 

slvT,  situs;  posed, peto.     See  15. 
Aspasia,  Aspasia,  ae,  f. 
assault,  make  an  assault,  slgna  infer 0, 

tnferre,  intuit,  Hiatus  ;  to  make  an 

assault  on  the  enemy,  in  hostts  sTgna 

tnferre. 


assemble,  convenio,  fre,  vent,  ventum 

at  all,  omnhtd,  adv. 

at  the  house  of,  apud,  prep.  w.  aoe. 

Athenians,  Atheniensci,  ium,  m.  pi. 

Athens,  Athenae,  drum,  f.  pi. 

attack,  impetum  facio,  facere,  feci, 
factus ;  ingredior,  ingredi,  ingres- 
sus  sum  ;  to  attack  the  enemy,  in 
hostis  impetum  facere. 

attempt,  cdnor,  drl^  dtus  sum, 

avoid,  vJtd,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 


band,  company,  manus,  us,  f. 
\iaX\\Q,  proelium,  i,  n.;  pugna,  ae,  f. 
be  born,  descended,  ndscor,  I,  ndtus 

sunt. 
be  without,  be  deprived  of,  cared,  ere, 

uT,  itiirus. 
bear,  ferd,    ferre,   tull,   Idtus ;    boar 

vi^ith,  perfero,  ferre,  tull,  Idtus. 
because,  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  conjs. 

See  173. 
become,  be  xasAo.,  fid,  fieri,  factus  sum. 
before,  ante,  prep.  w.  ace;  antequam, 

priusquam,  conjs. ;  the  night  before, 

superiore  node. 
beg,  beg  for,  ord,  dre,  dvi,  dtus  ;  petd, 

ere,  Ivl  or  il,  itus. 
began,  coepl  or  coeptus  sum,  coepisse, 

defective  verb  ;   coeptus  sum  is  only 

used  with  passive  infinitives. 
begin,  incipid,  cipere,  cepJ,  ceptus  ;  be- 
gin a  ha.tt\e,  proelium  committd,  ere, 

mlsi,  missus. 
behalf,  in  behalf  of,  pro,  w.  abl. 
Belgians,  Belgae,  drum,  m.  pi. 
believe,  credo,  ere,  credidl,  crediturus. 
besiege,  oppugno,  dre.,  dvi,  dtus. 
betake  one's  self,  se  cdnferre ;  con' 

ferd,  cdnferre,  contull,  colldtus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


241 


betray,  prodd,  ere,  didiy  ditus. 

bid  (at  an  auction),  liceory  licerlylici- 

tus  sum. 
bind,  vincioy  trey  vinxty  vincttis, 
blame,  culpdy  drey  dvTy  dtus» 
blood,  sanguis y  sanguinis y  m. 
board,  board  ship,  trdnscenddy  ere,  dty 

scensuruSy  in  ndvem. 
boat,  linter,  lintrisy  f.  ;   ndvis,  isy  f. 
body,  corpus,  corporis y  n. 
boldness,  auddcia,  aey  f. 
born,  be  born,  ndscor,  f,  ndtus  sum. 
book,  libeTy  librJy  m. 
both  .  .  .  and,  et  .  ,  .  et. 
bound,  be  bounded,  pass,  of  continedy 

ere,  ui,  tentus, 
boy,  puer,  I,  m. 
hiave, /orHs,  e  ;  auddx,  dcis. 
\iXdisr€iyyfortiter,  auddcler,  advs. 
bravery,  virtHs,  Utisy  f. 
bridge,  pons,  pontisy  m. 
XiXOth^Xy  frdter,  frdtrisy  m. 
building,  lectay  drunty  n. ;  aedificiuniy 

i,  n. 
burn,  burn  up,  comburo,  ilrerey  iissty 

iistus ;  burn  alive,  igni  cremo,  i . 
business,  negotiutn,  t,  n. 
but,  sed,  auteni ;  but  if,  sin,  conjs. 
buy,  eniOy  erey  eml,  emptus, 
by,  dy  aby  prep.  w.  abl. 


Caesar,  Caesar,  aris,  m. 

call  J  appelld,  dre,  din,  dtus,  ADDRESS, 

CALL  BY    NAME,    ENTITLE  ;    nomino, 

dre,  dvt,  dtus,  NAME,  call  by  name  ; 

convoco,    dre,    dvt,   dtus,    SUMMON, 

CALL  together. 
camp,  castra,  drunty  n.  pi. 
can,  possum,  posse,  potul ;  can  not  but, 

facere  ndn  possum  quin,  w.  subj. 

LATIN   PROSE  COMP. —  16 


capture,  capio,  capere,  cepi,  captus. 

care,  cUra,  ae,  f. 

care  iat,  provided, ere,  vtdtyVisuSy-wAdX, 

carefully,  dlligenter,  adv. 

Catiline,  Catillna,  ae,  m. 

cattle,  pecus,  oris,  n. 

cause,  causa,  ae,  f. 

cavalry,   equitdtus,  usy   m.;    equitesy 

itum,   m.  (pi.). 
cease,  desino,  ere,  (stvt)  or  it,  situs. 
certainly,  certe,  adv. 
children,  liberty  drumy  m.  pi. 
choose,  deligo,  ere,  legiy  lectus, 
Cicero,  Cicerdy  onis,  m. 
citizen,  clvis,  is,  m.  and  f. 
city,  urbs,  urbis,  f. 
collect,  colligo,  ligere,  legT,  lectus. 
come,  venid,  trey  vent,  ventum. 
command,  imperd,  dre,  dvl,  dtus,  w. 

dat.;   iubed,  ere,  iussl,  iussus ;  be  in 

command  of,  praesum,  esse,  fuT. 
commander,  imperdtory  drisy  m. 
companion,  ally,  sociusy  i,  m.;    comes, 

itisy  m.  and  f. 
compare,  comparo,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 
compel,  cogo,  ere,  coegi,  codcius ;  com- 

pello,  ere,  pull,  pulsus. 
complain,     complain    of,    queror,    l, 

questus  sum. 
conceal,  celd,  dre,  dvt,  dtus. 
conquer,  vincd,  ere,  vici,  victus. 
conspiracy,  coniurdtio,  onis,  f. 
conspirators,  coniiirdtl,  drum,  m.  pi. 
consul,  consul,  ulis,  m. 
consult,  consuld,  ere,  consuluT,  cdnsul- 

tus,   w.  ace;   w,    dat.,  consult   for, 

consult  the  interests  of. 
contain.    See  hold, 
control,  imperium,  T,  n. 
converse,  colloquor,  loqut,  locutus  sum 
convince.     See  persuade. 


242 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


Corinth,  Corinthusy  f,  f. 
country,  terra^  ae,  f.,  LAND,  EARTH, 
COUNTRY ;   patriot   ae^    f.,   native 

COUNTRY,  FATHERLAND  ;    rus^  ruHSy 

n.,  COUNTRY  as  opposed  to  city ; 
into  the  country,  riis ;  in  the  coun- 
try, ruri. 

courage,  bravery,  virtiis^  litis,  f . ; 
anddcia,  ae^  f. 

covetous,  avians,  a,  um. 

cowardly,  tgndvus^  a,  um. 

Crassus,  Crassus,  I",  m. 

crime,  scelus,  eris,  i^. 

critical  point,  crisis,  discrlmen,  inis,  n. 

cross,  trdnsedy  tre,  ivi  or  «,  itus. 

cruel,  criidelis,  e. 


danger,  perlculum,  z,  n. 

dare,  audeo,  ere,  ausus  sum. 

day,  dies,  ei,  m.  and  f. ;  to-day,  hodie ; 
yesterday,  heslerno  die. 

dear,  cams,  a,  um. 

death,  tnors,  mortis,  f.;  put  to  death, 
need,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

decree,  decerns,  ere,  crevt,  cretus  ;  de- 
cree of  the  senate,  sendtus  consul- 
tum,  t,  n. 

di&&di,  factum,  f,  n. 

deep,  alius,  a,  um. 

defeat,  conquer,  vinco,  ere,  vicTy  victus. 

defend,  dl-fendo,  ere,  fendl,  fensus. 

defendant,  reus,  i,  m. 

delay,  moror,  drt,  dtus  sum. 

deliberate,  dellberd,  dre,  dvT,  dtus. 

demand,  postulo,  dre,  dvi,  dtus.    See 

15- 
democrats,  populdres,  ium,  m. 
denies,  says  not,  nego,  dre,  dvT,  dtus. 
depart,  discedd,  ere,  cessT.  cessum;  di' 

cedOf  ere,  cessl,  cessum. 


deprive,  enpio,  riper e,  ripuT,  reptus : 
prlvo,  dre,  dvT,  dtus;  be  deprived 
of,  lack,  cared,  ere,  ui,  iticrus. 
See  39. 

depth,  altitUdo,  inis,  f. 

desert,  abandon,  forsake,  ^^^r  J,  serere, 
serui,  sertus.     See  abandon. 

desire,  volJ,  velle,  voluT. 

destroy,  deled,  ere,  evi,  etus. 

destruction,  exitium,  f,  n.,  a  going 

OUT,  GOING  TO  NOUGHT,  RUIN  ;  in- 
teritus,  its,  m.,  A  GOING  among 
things  so  as  to  be  no  longer  seen, 

BECOMING    LOST,    GOING    TO    RUIN  ; 

pernicies,  ei,  f.,  killing  utterly, 

SLAUGHTER,  OVERTHROW,  DESTRUC- 
TION ;  internecio,  onis,  f.,  destruc- 
tion, ANNIHILATION. 

determine,  cdnstitud,  ere,  uT,  utus. 

devastate,  vdsto,  dre,  din,  dtus. 

die,  morior,  mori,  mortuus  sum. 

differ,  differo,  differre,  distull,  dild- 
tus. 

difficult,  difficilis,  e. 

diligently,  dJligenter,  adv. 

diminish,  deminud,  ere,  deminuT,  de- 
mi  ml  tus. 

direction,  pars,  partis,  f. 

disaster,  calamitds,  dtis,  f. 

disclose.    See  expose. 

disregard,  neglect  (advice),  omitto, 
mittere,  mist,  missus. 

district,  territory,  field,  ager,  agrJ,  m. 

do,  facio,  facer e,  feci,  factus. 

doubt,  dubito,  dre,  dvi,  dtus  ;  there  is 
no  doubt  that,  non  est  dubium  quln, 
w.  subj. 

doubtful,  dubius,  a,  um. 

drive  away,  depello,  ere,  depuli,  depul- 
sus ;  drive  out,  expello,  ere,  expulT, 
expulsus ;  eicio,  ere.  Heel,  eiectus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


243 


duty,  offtiiunty  f,  n. 

dwell,    dwell    in,    incolo^   ercy    colui, 

cultus ;  habitOy  i. 
dwelling,  domiciliumt  f,  n. 


each,  quisque. 

each  other.    Se«  68, 

eagerly,  cupide,  adv. 

earth,  or  bis  terrdrum,  orbis  ierrae  ; 

orbisy  is,  m. 
easily,  /aci/e,  adv. 
easy,  faci/is,  e,  adj. 
either  . . .  or,  ««/ . . .  auf,  ve/ ,  , ,  vel. 
elect,  cred,  dre,  dvi,  dtus, 
embassy,  legdtio,  onis,  f. 
emigrate  =  go  out  from  territory, 
enable,  efficid,  ere,  feet,  fectus. 
encourage,  cohortor,    drt,  dtus  sum, 

EXHORT,        ANIMATE,       ADMONISH  ; 

consolor,  art,   dtus  sum,   COMFORT 

GREATLY,  CHEER. 

en^,  finis,  is,  m. 

enemy,  hostis,  is.  m.  and  f.,  an  en- 
emy OF  one's  country,  inimicus,  t, 

m.,  A  PERSONAL  ENEMY. 

engage.     See  fight, 
enjoy,  fruor,  fruT,  frUctus  sum  ;  en- 
joy, use,  Hior,  iitt,  Hsus,     See  44. 
enjoyment,  fructus.  Us,  m. 
enough,  satis. 

especially,  praesertim,  adv. 
establish,  constitud,  ere,  ut,  utus» 
Europe,  Ewdpa,  ae,  f. 
even  if,  etiam  st. 
ever,  semper,  always  ;  umquam  {un- 

quam),  AT  ANY  TIME. 

every,  each,  quisque;  every  one,  quis- 
que, quaeque,  quodque  {quicque, 
quidque). 

evidence,  indicium,  i,  n. 


except,  praeter,  prep.  w.  ace. 
exchange,  dd,  dare,  dedi,  datus  (with 

inter  and  reflex,  pronoun), 
execute,  perform,  administro,  are,  dm, 

dtus. 
exhort,  cohortor,  art,  dtus  sum, 
exile,  exsilium,  i,  n. 
expect,  hope  for,  spero,  are,  dvt,  dtus, 
expose,  bring  to  light,  patefacio,  ere, 

feci,  factus ;    expose    (to   danger), 

offer  0,  off  err e,  obtuli,  obldtus, 
eye,  oculus,  t,  m. 


fact,  res,  ret,  f. 

faithful,  fdetis,  e. 

fair,  pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchrum. 

favae,  gloria,  ae,  i. 

family  {i.e.  stock),  genus,  eris,  n.j 
gens,  ntis,  f. 

famous,  cldrus,  a,  um, 

far,  longe,  adv. 

farmer,  agricola,  ae,  m. 

father,  pater,  patris,  m. 

fault,  culpa,  ae,  f. 

fear,  timor,  oris,  m.;  metus.  Us,  m.; 
to  fear,  vereor,  eri,  itus  sum  ;  timed, 
ere, ut;  metud, ere, metuT, {metiltus). 

feel  thankful,  grdtiam  habeo,  ere,  ui, 
itus. 

fellow  =  man,  sometimes  by  ille, 

fellow-citizen,  clvis,  is,  m. 

fertile,  opimus,  a,  um  ;  fertilis,  e. 

few,  pauci,  ae,  a. 

field,  ager,  agri,  m. ;  in  the  field,  mili-' 
tiae  (loc.  case). 

fifteen,  qumdecim,  indecl. 

fifty,  qmnquagintd,  indecl, 

fight,  piigno,  dre,  dvT,  dtum,  used  im- 
personally in  the  passive  ;  e.g.  pUg^ 
ndtur,  it  is  fought,  they  fight. 


244 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


find,  inveniOf  tre^  venT^  ventus^  come 
UPON,  DISCOVER;  reperio^  ire^  reperl 
and  repperiy  repertus^  MEEr  with, 
FIND  our;  cognoscdf  ere^  cognovty  cog- 
nitus,  BECOME  ACQUAINTED  WITH, 
LEARN,  KNOW. 

finish,  cottficio,  ficere^  feci,  fectus. 

first,  primus,  a,  um. 

fit,  fitted,  apius^  a,  um ;  idoneus,  a, 

um. 
five,  quTnque,  indecl. 
flee,  fugio,  fugere,  ftigt,  fugiturus ; 

ierga  verto,  ere,  vertt,  versus. 
fleet,  classis,  is,  f. 
flight,  fuga,  ae,  f.;   put  to  flight,  in 

fiigam  do,  dare,  dedi,  datus ;  fugo, 

are,  dvt,  dtus. 
flow,  fiuo,  ere,  Jiuxt,  Jluxus. 
follow,  follow  close  after,  subsequor, 

I,  secutus  sum, 
following,  posterus,  a,  um.    See  59.  3. 
foolish,  stupid,  dmens,  gen.  amends  ; 

stultus,  a,  um. 
foot,  pes,  pedis,  m. 
for,  pro,  prep.  w.  abl.;   nam,  conj.; 

for  a  long  time,  now  for  a  long  time, 

iam  din,  iam  dudum.     See  102.  3; 

103.  2. 
for  the  future,  in  reliquum  tempus. 
for  the  most  part,  maximum  partem. 
iat  the  sake  of,  causa,  abl.  and  placed 

after  its  limiting  gen. 
force,  vis,  (vis),  f,;  force,  band,  manus, 

Us,  f.;  forces,  troops,  copiae,  drum, 

f.pl. 
foresight,  prudentia,  ae,  f. 
forest,  silva,  ae,  f. 
forget,  cblivTscor,  t,  oblTtus  sum. 
form,  make,/rt^zJ,  facer e,  feci,  factus  ; 

form,  draw  up,  instruoy  ere,  strilxi, 

strUctus. 


former,  ille. 

fortifications,  moenia,  turn,  n. 

fortify,  munid,  tre,  ivt,  itus. 

found,  build  (a  city),  condo,  ere,  con 

didi,  conditus. 
four,  quatluor,  indecl. 
free,  set  free,  libera,  dre,  dvt,  dtus; 

free,  liber,  libera,  llberum. 
friend,  amicus,  i,  m. 
frighten  thoroughly,  perterreo,  ere, 

ui,  itus. 
from,  out  of,    e,  ex.,   prep.  w.    abl.; 

from,  away  from,  from  near,  d,  ab, 

abs,  prep.  w.  abl.;   de,  down  from, 
front,  first,  primus,  a,  um. 
full,  plenus,  a,  um. 


gate,  porta,  ae,  f. 

gather,  come  together,  convenio,  tre, 

venl,  ventum. 
Gaul,  Gallia,  ae,  f. 
Gauls,  Gain,  drum,  m.  pi. 
general,    imperdtor,   oris,  m.;    dux, 

duels,  m.  and  f. 
German,  Germdnus,  a,  um. 
Germans,  GermdnJ,  drum,  ra.  pi. 
Germany,  Germdnia,  ae,  f. 
get  a  firm  f ooting, /fr;;? ?/<?/•  insisto, 

ere,  stitl,  — . 
get  possession  of,  potior,  potlrlf  po- 

tltus  sum. 
get  together.    See  collect 
gift,  donum,  i,  n. 
girl,  puella,  ae,  f. 
give,    do,    dare,    dedi,    datus;    give 

back,  reddo,  ere,  reddidi,  redditus ; 

give  up,  abicio,  icere,  iecl,  iectus ; 

give  up,  desist  from,  desist,  sistere^ 

stitl,  stitum. 
glad,  laetus,  a,  um. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


245 


glory,  gloria,  ae,  f. 

go,  eoy  Ire,  tvt  or  zT,  itum;  go  back, 
redeo,  redire,  redii^  reditus ;  go  to, 
visit,  adeo^  adire^  adtvioxadiif  aditus. 

god,  deusy  deli  m. 

good,  honusy  a,  ton. 

government,  imperiunii  t,  n. 

grain,  /nlfnen/um,  t,  n. 

grant,  do,  dare,  dedl,  datus. 

great,  mdgnus,  a,  urn;  how  great, 
quantus,  a,  urn. 

greedy,  avidus^  a,  um  ;  cupidus,  a,  urn. 

H 

handwriting,  tnanus,  tlSf  f. 

happens,  it  happens,  comes  to  pass, 
the  result  is,  accidit,  isse  ;  contingit, 
contigisse,  contigit ;  fit,  fieri,  factut7i 
est ;  these  verbs  are  often  used  with 
a  substantive  clause  as  subject. 

happy,  bedtus,  a,  um. 

harass,   lacessd,  cessere^  cessTin  or  «, 

(cessttus. 
hardly,  vix^  adv. 
harm,  d'etrimentumy  f,  n. 
hasten,  make  haste,  mdturo,  3re,  dvty 

dtus. 
hate,  odi,  odisse,  osurus,  perf.   with 

pres.  meaning, 
haul,  draw,  dz'uo,  ducercy  dilxt,  ductus; 

trahoy  ere,  trdxi,  ir actus, 
have,  habed,  ercy  «f,  itus, 
he,  she,  it,  isy  eay  id. 
hear,  audio.  Ire,  IvT,  ttus. 
height,  depth,  altitildd,  inisy  f. 
help,  succurroy  ere,  succurrt,  succur- 
i  sum  ;  iuvoy  drey  iuvT,  iutum, 

^      here,  hTCy  adv.  ;   to  be  here,  adsum, 
hesitate,  dubito,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
high,  deep,  altus,  a,  um. 
highest,  summusy  ay  um. 


hill,  collisy  iSy  m. 

himself,  herself,  itself.    See  66. 

hinder,      impedid,      trey      iviy      itus, 

ENTANGLE,   EMBARRASS,  HINDER ; 

reprimoy  ere,  press!,  pressuSy  press 

BACK,    KEEP  BACK,    RESTRAIN,    HIN- 
DER. 

hindrance,  impedtmentum,  t,  n. 

his,  her,  its,  suusy  a,  um,  when  refer- 
ring to  the  same  person  or  thing  as 
the  subject  of  its  sentence,  other- 
wise eius.     See  67. 

hitherto,  adhuc,  adv. 

hold,  iened,  ere,  ul,  tentus. 

home,  homeward,  domum ;  at  home, 
domi. 

hoi)e,  spesy  speJy  f.;  to  hope,  sperd^ 
drCy  dviy  dtus. 

horse,  eguusy  t,  m. 

hostage,  obsesy  obsidisy  m.  and  f. 

hour,  hdra,  ae,  f. 

house,  domuSy  t  (us"),  f.,  the  generic 
word;  tectum,  f,  n.,  that  which 
covers,  the  roof,  by  metonymy, 
HOUSE  ;  at  the  house  of,  apud  and 
ady  preps,  w.  ace. 

how  great,  quantus,  ay  um, 

how  many,  quoty  indecl.  adj.;  quant 
multi,  ae,  a. 

hundred,  ceniumy  indecl. 

hurl,  conicidy  icercy  iecJ,  iecius. 


I,  ego.     See  64. 

if,  SI,  conj.;   if  only,  inodoy  dumy  dum 

modoy  conjs. 
ignorant,  tgndrus,  ay  um. 
illustrious,  cldrusy  a,  um. 
implore,  invoke,  call  upon,  voco,  are, 

dvt,  dtus. 
important.    See  29. 


246 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


in,  iuy  prep.  w.  abl. 

in  the  vicinity  of,  ad,  prep.  w.  ace. 

inactivity,  inertia,  ae,  f. 

incite,  mfiajumd,  drcy  dvT,  dtus. 

indeed,  at  least,  quidem,  adv. ;  placed 
immediately  after  the  emphatic 
word. 

infantry,  pedites,  unty  m.  pi.;  peditd- 
tus,  us,  m. 

inflict  punishment,  supplicium  silmd, 
ere,  sumpsT,  siimptus  ;  to  inflict  pun- 
ishment on  a  soldier,  de  milite  sup- 
plicium sumere  ;  tnferoy  ferre,  tulT, 
illdtus, 

influence,  auctoritds,  dtis,  f.;  have  in- 
fluence, exert  influence,  valeo,  ere, 
uT,  iturus. 

inform  any  one,  aliquem  certiorem 
facio,  facer e,  feci,  facius ;  be  in- 
formed, certior  fid,  fieri,  factus 
sum. 

inhabitant,  incola,  ae,  m. 

injure,  harm,  noced,  ere,  uT,  iturus. 

inquire,  guaerd,  ere,  quaestvi,  quaesTtus. 

intend,  esse  in  animo,  and  dat. 

intercessor,  deprecdtor,  oris,  m. 

interest,  intersum,  esse,  fui,  futurus, 
used  impersonally.     See  28. 

interview,  conference,  colloquium,  t,  n. 

into,  in,  prep.  w.  ace. 

invade,  ingredior,  i,  ingressus  sum. 

invite,  send  for,  arcesso,  ere,  arcessivi, 
arcessTtus  ;  invito,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 

island,  insula,  ae,  f. 

it,  is,  ea,  id. 

Italy,  Italia^  ae,  f. 


join  battle,  proelium  committo,  ere, 
tnisi,  missus;  join  together,  unite, 
coniungo,  ere,  iunxi,  iunctus. 


journey,  iter,  itineris,  n. ;  to  journey, 
iter  facio,  facer  e,  feci,  factus. 

judge,  index,  iildicis,  m.;  iUdicd,  dre^ 
dvi,  dtus, 

just,  aequus,  a,  um. 

justice,  aequitds,  dtis,  f. 

justly,  iUre,  abl.  of  manner. 


keep,  hold,  hahed,  ere,  ui,  itus ;  k«ep, 

restrain,  contineo,  ere,  ul,  ientus. 

kil  1,  interficio,  fcere,  feet,  feet  us, 

king,  rex,  regis,  m. 

know,  know  how,  scio,  scire,  scTvt, 
scitus ;  nosed,  ere,  novi,  notus.  See 
106;  not  know,  nescio,  ire,  ivt,  — , 


Labienus,  Labienus,  t,  m. 

land,  terra,  ae,  f. 

large,  mdgmis,  a,  um. 

lasting,  perpetuus,  a,  um, 

lately,  nuper,  adv. 

latter,  hlc. 

law,  lex,  legis,  f. 

lay  before,  report,  deferd,  de  ferre,  de- 
tuli,  deldtus ;  lay  waste,  vdstd,  dre^ 
dvT,  dtus. 

laziness,  pigriiia,  ae,  f. 

lazy,  piger,  pigra,  pigrum. 

lead,  dUco,  ere,  duxl,  ductus;  lead 
across,  trdduco,  ere,  duxl,  ductus; 
lead  down,  dedilcd,  ere,  diixl,  ductus  ; 
lead  out,  educo,  ere,  duxl,  duc- 
tus;  lead  to,  adduco,  ere,  duxl, 
ductus. 

leader,  dux,  ducis,  m.  and  f. 

learn,  cognoscd,  ere,  cognovl,  cognitus. 

leave  behind,  leave,  relinqud,  ere, 
llqut,  lictus ;  exed,  ire,  il,  itus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


247 


leave  off,  cease,  desind^  ere^  destvt  or 

desit^  desitus. 
left,  sinister^  sinistra^  sinisirum.   See 

remaining, 
legate,  legatus,  f,  m. 
legion,  legidy  dniSf  f. 
leisure,  dtiuniy  f,  n. 
less,  minor,  minus ;  gen.  minoris. 
lessen,  levo,  are,  dvi,  dtus, 
letter,  litter ae,  drum,  f.  pi.;    epistula, 

ae,  f. 
liberality,  llberdlitds,  dtis,  f.  "^ 

liberty,  libertds,  dtis,  f. 
lieutenant,  legdtus,  t,  m. 
life,  vita,  ae,  f. 
light,  daylight,  Itix,  liicis,  f. 
like,  similisy  e;  like,  wish,  void,  velle, 

volui. 
line,  line  of  battle,  acies,  el,  f. 
linger  around.     See  remain, 
little,  parvus,  a,  um ;  too  little,  pa- 
rum,  adv. 
live,    vlt'o,   ere,   vTxl,   victus ;    vitam 

dego,  ere,  degi,  — . 
long,  long  for,  desire  eagerly,  cupio, 

cupere,  cupivl  or  cupil,  cupUus. 
long,  a  long  time,  longer,  longest,  din, 

diutius,  diutissim},  adv. 
long,  longus,  a,  um  ;  long,  as  long  as. 

See  while, 
long  since,  iam  prldem,  adv. 
look  at,  intueor,  ert,  intuitus  sum. 
love,   amor,   oris,  m.;  to  love,  amo, 

dre,  dvi,  dtus. 


make,  facio,  facer e,  feci,  f actus  ;  make 
an  assault.  See  assault;  make  re- 
quital,^J^/^zw  refer  5,  referre,  rettull, 
reldtus.  —  I  shall  requite  you,  tibi 
grdtiam  referam;   make  upon,  in\ 


fero,  Tnferre,  intull,  illdtus,  —  to 
make  war  upon  the  Gauls,  Gallis 
bellum  Inferre ;  make  use  of,  utor, 
ati,  iisus  sum. 

man,  vir,  virl,  m.,  A  MAN  as  distin* 
guished  from  a  woman;  homo,  inis, 
m.  and  f.,  man,  a  human  being. 

many,  uiulti,  ae,  a  ;  many  times,  saepe. 

march,  iter,  itineris,  n.;  to  march, 
iter  facio,  fa  cere,  feci,  factus. 

marry  (of  a  man),  in  mdtrimonium 
duco  ;  (of  a  woman),  niibd^  nUbere, 
nupsl,  niipta. 

may.    See  118,  119. 

meantime,  in  the  meantime,  interim^ 
intered,  advs. 

meditate.     See  think  about. 

meet,  to  meet,  se  obvium  ferre ;  you 
met  me,  mihi  te  obvium  tulisti ;  go 
to  meet,  obviam  (or  obvius,  a,  um) 
eo.  Ire,  tvT  or  il,  itus,  w.  dat.;  meet 
with,  invenio,  ire,  veni,  ventus,yN  ,z.zq., 

memory,  memoria,  ae,  f. 

messenger,  niintius,  t,  m. 

method,  ratio,  dnis,  f. 

middle,  middle  of,  medius,  a,  um. 

mile,  mllle  passuum. 

military  affairs,  res  mtlitdris,  ret 
militdris. 

mind,  mens,  mentis,  f.,  understand- 
ing, intellect,  reason;    animus, 

t,  m.,  WILL,  DESIRE,  PURPOSE;  FEEL- 
ING, affection,  sentiment. 

mistake,  be  misunderstood,  erro,  dre, 
dvi,  dtus. 

money,  pecHnia,  ae,  f. 

more,  plus, phlris,  n.;  amplius,  magis, 
advs. 

mother,  mdter,  mdtris,  f. 

mountain,  mons,  mantis,  m. 

mourn,  luged,  ere,  Ifixu 


248 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


move,  moveOf  movere^  movT,  motus. 
much,  muhus,  rt,  urn. 
multitude,  multitilddf  inis,  f. 
must.     See  iii. 
my,  metis,  a,  urn, 

N 
name,  nomettj  ndminis,  n.;   to  name. 

See  call, 
narrow,  contracted,  small,  parvus,  a, 

um  ;  narrow  limits,  angustiae,  drum, 

f.  pi.;    angustus,  a,  um. 
nature,  ndtura,  ae,  f. 
near,  prope,  fere,  advs. 
nearest,  proximus,  a,  um, 
nearly,  paene,  adv. 
need,  opus,  indecl.  n.,  tlsus,  us,  m. 
need,  egeo  or  indigeo,  ere,  ui,  — . 
negligence,  nequitia,  ae,  f. 
neighborhood,   in  the  neighborhood 

of,  ad,  prep.  w.  ace. 
neighbors,  finitiml,  drum,  m.  pi.; 

vicTnus,  i,  m. 
neither  . . .  nor,  neque  . . .  neque,  nee 

.  .  .  nee. 
never,  numquam  {nunquam),  adv. 
nevertheless,  yet,  stUl,  tamen;   ni- 

hilo  minus,  advs. 
new,  novus,  a,  um, 
nick  of  time,  discrimen,  inis,  n. 
night,  nox,  noctis,  f.;    night  before, 

nox  superior. 
no,  nullus,  a,  um.     See  8l. 
nobody,  no  one,  nemo,  gen.  and  abl. 

supplied  from  nullus. 
not,  non,  ne,  adv.;    not  even,  ne  .  .  . 

quidem,  w.  the  emphatic  word  be- 
tween ne  and  quidem. 
not  only  .  .  .  but  also,  non  solum  , . . 

sed  etiam. 
not  yet,  nondum,  adv. 


nothing,  nihil,  indecl. 
now,  nunc,  iam,  advs. 
numerous,  creber,  crebra,  crebrum. 


oath,  iUs  iUrandum,  iiiris  iurandt,  n. 

obey, pared,  he,  ul, pdritUrus. 

occupy,  occupo,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

officer,  legdtus,  i,  m. 

often,  saepe,  adv. 

old,  senex,  gen.  senis ;  old,  having 
been  born,  ndtus,  a,  um ;  he  is 
twenty  years  old,  vigin^  annos  nd- 
tus  est. 

on,  in,  prep.  w.  ace.  after  verbs  of  mo- 
tion, w.  abl.  after  verbs  of  rest. 

on  this  side  of,  cis,  prep.  w.  ace. 

once,  at  once,  statim,  adv. 

one,  anus,  a,  um. 

one  another.    See  68. 

one  by  one,  singull,  ae,  a. 

opinion,    sententia,    ae,    f.,  OPINIOI^ 

DECISION,      SENTENCE,     JUDGMENT  ;   ~ 

Opinio,   onis,   f.,  opinion,  supposi- 
tion, REPUTATION,   BELIEF. 

Opportunity,  potestds,  dtis,  f. 

opposite,  adversus,  a,  um. 

or,  aut ;  in  double  questions,  an;  or 
not,  in  direct  double  questions,  an 
non;  in  indirect  double  questions, 
necne.    See  So. 

order,  in  order  that,  ut,  conj.  See 
144. 

order,  by  order,  iussil,  abl.  sing.  m. 

order,  command,  iubed,  ere,  iussi,  iuS' 
sus  ;  impero,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

ordinary,  mediocris,  e. 

other,  some  .  .  .  others,  alit  .  .  . 
alii. 

ought,  debed,  ere,  uT,  iius ;  dehed  de- 
notes a  moral  obligation.     See  iii 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


249 


our,  noster,  nostra^  nostrum. 
overcome,  superd,  drey  dvT,  dtus, 
own.    See  69. 


pardon,  tgndsco,  ere^  tgnovTy  tgnotus ; 

pardon   for  sake  of,  condonoy  dre^ 

dvif  atus. 
parent,  parens,  eniisy  c. 
part,  pars,  partis,  f. 
patience,  patientiay  ae,  f. 
patriotic,  bonus,  a,  um;  amdns  ret 

pUblicae. 
pay,  pendoy  ere,  pependT,  pensus  ;  pay 

one's    respects,    salutOy    drCy    dvly 

a  turn. 
peace,  pax,  pads,  f. 
perfect,  perfectus,  ay  um. 
perform,  fungory  fungJy  functus  sumy 

EXECUTE,      DISCHARGE,      OBSERVE  ; 
geroy    ercy   gessTy   gestuSy     MANAGE, 

WAGE,    TRANSACT,    ACCOMPLISH. 

peril,  perlculum,  t,  n. 

perilous,  perlculdsusy  ay  um. 

perish,  peredy  ire,  iT,  iius. 

permit,  allow,  suffer,  patior,  patty  pas- 
sus  sum. 

•persist,  persevero,  drey  dvT,  dtus. 

persuade,  persuddeoy  suddercy  sudsiy 
sudsus. 

pity,  miserety  misererCy  miseruit. 
See  27. 

place,  locuSy  f,  m. ;  pi.  loci  and  locay 
locdrum,  m.  and  n. 

plan,  consilitim,  i,  n.,  determination, 
RESOLUTION,  PURPOSE;  ratio,  onis, 
i.y  COURSE,  MANNER,  METHOD,  FASH- 
ION. 

please,  delecto,  dre,  dvT,  dtus,  w.  ace. ; 

placed,  ere,  ui,  itus,  w.  dat. 
pleasing,  grdtusy  a,  um. 


pleasure,  delectdtioy  onis,  f. 

•pledge, /des,  et,  f. 

plunder,  pillage,  dtripio,  ere,  ut,  rep- 
tus. 

pole,  long  pole,  longuriusy  f,  m. 

poor,  pauper,  gen.  pauperis. 

possession,  possessio,  onisy  f. ;  often 
expressed  by  neuter  plural;  e.g.  him- 
self and  his  possessions,  se  suaque ; 
take  possession  of,  occupdy  drCy  dvt, 
dtusy  w.  ace;  get  possession  of, 
potiory  tri,  itus  sum. 

power,  bodily  strength,  ins,  (yts')y  f.  (pi. 
vires). 

powerful,  potensy  gen.  potentis  ;  pow- 
erful, to  be  very  ^owcxivX,  plUrimum 
posse,  or  valere. 

practically  acquainted  with,  peri- 
tuSy  a,  um,  w.  gen. 

praetor,  praetor,  oris,  m. 

praise,  laus,  laudisy  f.;  to  praise, 
laudo,  dre,  dviy  dtus. 

prefer,  mdloy  mdllcy  mdlui. 

prepare,  pard,  drcy  dvi,  dtus, 

present,  be  present,  adsum,  adesse, 
adfui,  adfuturus. 

preserve,  cdnservd,  drey  dvT,  dtus. 

prevent,  deter reoy  ere,  «f,  ittis ;  pro- 
hibedy  ercy  uiy  itus. 

price,  pretiwHy  i,  n. 

prisoner,  reus,  i,  m. 

promise,  polliceor,  eriy  pollicitus  sum. 

proper,  idoneus,  a,  um. 

property,  res,  rerum,  f.  pi.;  bona, 
drum,  n.  pi. 

prosperity,  secundidres  res. 

provided  that,  modo,  dum,  dum  tnodo, 
conjs.     See  172. 

province,  prdvincia,  ae,  f. 

provision,  make  provision,  provided, 
ere,  vidiy  visus. 


2SO 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


prudence,  prudentia^  ae,  f. 

punish,  punio,  ire,  tvi,  ttus, 

punishment,  supplicium,  i,  n.;  to 
inflict  punishment  upon  any  one,  de 
aliqud  supplicium  sumo,  ere,  sumpsl, 
siimptum ;  to  suffer  punishment, 
poends  persolvOf  ere,  solvl,  solutus; 
supplicium  dJ,  i. 

puri)Ose,  for  the  purpose  of,  causa, 
abl.  of  cause  and  stands  after  its 
limiting  genitive. 

put  in  charge  of,  praeficio,  ere,  feet, 
fectus. 

put  to  death,  need,  are,  dvT,  alum. 

put  to  flight,  in  fugam  do,  dare,  dedt, 
datus;  fugo,  are,  dvi,  dlus. 


quarrel,  dissenlid,  dnis,  f. 
question,  quaestid,  dnis,  f, 
quickly,  celeriler,  adv. 

R 

rank,  line  of  battle,  acies,  H,  f. 

rapidly,  celeriler,  adv. 

rather,  more,  magis,  adv. 

read,  lego,  ere,  legi,  leclus. 

ready,  paralus,  a,   um ;    get  ready, 

compare,  are,  dvt,  dlus, 
rear,  novissimum  agmen. 
reason,  cause,  causa,  ae,  f. 
recall,  revocd,  are,  dvJ,  dlus. 
receive,  accipid,  cipere,  cepT,  ceplus. 
recommend,   urge,  hortor,  drt,  dlus 

sum  ;  cohortor. 
redoubt,  fortress,  caslellum,  t,  n. 
refrain,  temperd,  are,  dvT,  dlus,  w.  dat. 

•of  reflexive  pronoun;  abslined,  ere, 

m,  lenlus. 
refuse,  recusd,  are,  dm,  dltis ;    negd, 

dre,  din,  dlus. 


regard,  dUcd,  ere,  dUxT,  ductus, 

reign,  regnd,  are,  dvt,  dlus. 

relieve,  llberd,  dre,  dvi,  dlus. 

remain,  stay,  remaned,  ere,  mdnstf 
mdnsum. 

remaining,  reliquus,  a,  um. 

remember,  meminl,  meminisse ;  remi' 
ntscor,  I,  — . 

remind,  admoned,  ere,  ui,  ilus. 

renew,  redinlegrd,  dre,  dvT,  dlus, 

repent,  paenilet,  ere,  paeniluit. 

reply,  responded,  ere,  spondt,  spdnsum, 

rescue,  eripid,  eripere,  eripui,  erep* 
lus. 

residence,  domicilium,  i,  n. 

resources,  ops,  opis,  f.  pi.;  aid  (in 
sing.). 

rest  of,  reliquus,  a,  um ;  the  rest, 
celeri,  ae,  a. 

restrain,  reprimd,  ere,  pressT,  pressus  ; 
relined,  ere,  linui,  tcntus. 

retain,  hold,  lened,  ere,  ui,  lenlus. 

return,  r  ever  tor,  t,  versus  sum;  re- 
verld,  ere,  reverli ;  the  present,  im- 
perfect, and  future  tenses  have  the 
passive  form;  reded,  ire,  it,  ilus ; 
reddd,  ere,  reddidl,  reddilus  (Jrans.^, 

revolt,  rebellid,  dnis,  f. 

revolution,  new  form  of  government, 
nova  imperia  (n.  pi.),  res  novae. 

Rhine,  Rhenus,  t,  m. 

rich,  dives,  ilis  ;  locuples,  elis^  adjs. 

rigging, //7«^^,  ium,  m.  pi. 

right,  ids,  idris,  n.;  dexter,  dexlra. 
dexlrum,  adj. 

river,  flumen,  fiuminis,  n. 

road,  via,  ae,  f. ;   iter,  ilineris,  n. 

rock,  saxum,  t,  n. 

Roman,  Rdmdnus,  a,  um. 

Rome,  Roma,  ae,  f. 

route,  fugd,  dre,  dvT,  dlus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


251 


rule,  re^nuniy  t,  n.;  imperium,  t,  n.; 
rego,  regere,  rixi,  rectus  ;  rule  over, 
impero,  are,  dvi^  dtus,  w.  dat. 

run,  curro,  ere^  cucurrif  cursus. 


safe,  tutus,  a,  um^  well  guarded, 
SECURE,  our  OF  DANGER  ;  salvus,  a, 
urn,  inrolumis,  e,  unharmed,  un- 
injured, WELL,  SOUND. 

safety,  salus,  fitis,  f. 

sake,  for  the  sake  of,  causa. 

same,  the  same,  idem,  eadem,  idem. 

save,  servo,  are,  dvt,  dtus ;  conservo, 
dre,  dvT,  dtus ;  conservo  is  servo  in- 
tensified by  the  prefix  con  and  prop- 
erly signifies  keep  thoroughly, 
save  completely. 

say,  dTcd,  dicer e,  dtxT,  dictus  ;  say  not, 
nego,  dre,  dvl,  dtus. 

scatter,  rout,  fugo,  dre,  dvT,  dtus, 

scheme.    See  plan. 

sea,  mare,  maris,  n. 

seal,  sign  urn,  T,  n. 

see,  video,  ere,  vTdi,  vtsus. 

seek,  petJ,  ere,  petivT,  petitus. 

seem,  videor,  ert,  vtsus  sum. 

seize,  occupd,  are,  dvT,  dtus;  capio, 
ere,  cept,  captus ;  comprehendd,  ere, 
comprehendi,  comprehensus, 

self,  ipse,  a,  um, 

sell,  vendo,  ere,  vendidi,  venditus. 

senate,  sendtor,  oris,  m. 

send,  mittd,  ere,  mm,  missus. 

Sequani,  Sequanl,  drum,  m.  pi. 

set  fire  to,  incendJ,  ere,  cendi,  census. 

set  out,-  march,  depart,  projiciscor,  i, 
profectus  sum. 

several.    See  many. 

severe,  gravis,  e. 

she,  generally  omitted.     See  64. 


shield,  scutum,  f,  n. 

ship,  ndvis,  is,  f. 

short,  hrevis,  e. 

show,  doceo,  ere,  uT,  doctus. 

shudder  at,  horreo,  ere,  horrut,   no 

sup.,  governs  ace. 
sick,  aeger,  aegra,  aegrum. 
side,  on  this  side  of,  cis,  prep.  w.  ace. 
signal,  signum,  t,  n. 
silent,  keep  silent,  taceo,  ere,  ui,  itus. 
since,  cuni,  quoniatn,  conjs.     See  87. 
sister,  soror,  oris,  f. 
sit,  be  seated,  sedeo,  ere,  sedi,  sessum, 
six,  sex,  in  d  eel. 
sixteen,  sedecim,  indecl. 
size,  mdgnitudo,  inis,  f. 
skillful,  practically  acquainted  with, 

peritus,  a,  um. 
slaughter,  occTdo,  ere,  cTdl,  cTsus. 
slave,  servus,  i,  m. 
slay,  kill,  interjicid,  ere,  feci,  fectus. 
small,  parvus,  a,  um. 
SO,  tam,  ita,  sic,  advs.;  so  great,  tan- 

tUS,  a,  U771. 

soldier,  miles,  militis,  m. 

some  one,  something,  some,  aliquis, 

quidam,  nescio  quis. 
some  .  .  .    others,  alii  ,  .  .  aliu 
son,  filius,  I,  m. 
soon,  as  soon  as  possible,  quam  prt- 

mum. 
speak,  loquor,  t,  lociitus  sum;   died, 

ere,  dixi,  dictus. 
stand,  std,  stdre,  steti,  stdtus. 
start  out  for.     See  set  out. 
state,  res  publica,  rel  pilblicae,  f. 
stay,  refuaned,  ere,  mdnsi,  mdnsHrus. 
still,  etiam  nunc,  tamen,  advs. 
storm,   expugnd,    dre,    dvl,    dtus;    3 

storm,  tempest,  tempestds,  dtis,  f. 
stranger,  alienus,  I,  m. 


252 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


street,  road,  via,  ae^  f. 

strong, //>-///«^,  a^  um, 

study,  siudiuniy  f,  n. 

stupid,  stultust  «,  um;  aniens^  gen. 

ai7ientis, 
subdue,  pacify,  pdco^  dre,  dm,  dtus. 
such,  so  great,  tantus,  «,  um ;  such, 

of  such  a  kind,  tdlis^  e;  such  ,  ,  . 

as,   tantus  .  .  .  quantus,   when  re- 
ferring  to  size  ;    talis  .  .  .  qtidlis, 

when    referring    to    kind,    nature, 

quality, 
suddenly,  suHtdj  repente,  advs. 
suffer,  patior,  pattf  passus  sum  ;  allow, 

permittOf  3  ;  sino,  ere,  sivt,  situs ; 

endme,  perfero,  ferre,  tul\  Idtus, 
suicide,  to   commit  suicide,  mortem, 

dat.  of  reflex.,  conscisco,  sciscere,  scivi, 

scttus. 
suitable,  idoneus,  a,  um. 
summon,  vocd,  are,  dvt,  dtus. 
supplies,  commedtus,  us,  m.,  used  in 

both   sing,  and  pi.;    supplies   (of 

grain),  res  frumentdria. 
suppose,  existimo,  dre,  dvt,  dtus, 
surely,  profectd,  adv. 
surpass,  excel,  antecello,  ere,  no  perf. 

nor  sup.  ;   praecedo,  ere,  cesst,  ces- 

sUrus  ;  super o,  dre,  dvT,  dtus. 
surrender,  dedo,  ere,  dedidt,  deditus; 

a  surrender,  deditio,  onis,  f. 
surround,  circumdd,  are,  dedi,  datus ; 

circumvenio,  trey  vent,  ventus, 
swamp,  palUs,  adis,  f. 
sword,  gladiuSf  i,  m. 


table,  mensa,  ae,  f. 

take,  capio,  capere,  cept,  capitis ;  take 

away,  removed,  ere,   movi,   motus ; 

take  from,  eripio,  eripere,  eripm. 


ereptus ;  take  part,  be  engaged  in 
anything,  versor,  dri,  dtus  sum ; 
take  possession  of,  occupo,  dre,  dvt, 
dtus,  w.  ace;  take  the  lead  of, 
praesum,  esse,  fui,  futHrus, 

task,  pensum,  i,  n. 

tax,  stipendium,  T,  n. 

teach,  doceo,  ere,  docut,  doctus. 

tell,  died,  ere,  dixi,  diet  us ;  ndrro, 
dre,  dvt,  dtus. 

temple,  templum,  i,  n. 

ten,  decern,  indecl. 

terrify,  perterreo,  ere,  ut,  itus. 

territory,  fines,  ium,  m.  pi.;  ager, 
agri,  m. 

than,  guam,  adv.     See  42. 

thank,  grdtids  ago,  agere,  egt,  dctus. 

thankful,  feel  \}ciz^M\A,grdtiam  habeo, 
ere,  ui,  itus. 

that,  ille,  is;  that,  in  order  that,  ut; 
that  not,  tie,  ut  non. 

the  .  .  .  the,  quantd  ,  ,  .  tanto ; 
quo  .  ,  ,  eo.  ^1 

one  .  .  .  the  other,  alter  .  .  .  alter ;    ^ 
the  one  party  .  .  .  the  other,  alterl 
,  ,  .  alteri. 

their,  suus,  a,  um,  when  referring  to 
same  person  or  thing  as  the  sub- 
ject of  its  sentence,  otherwise, 
eorum. 

there,  in  that  place,  ibi,  adv. 

they,  generally  omitted.     See  64. 

thing,  circumstance,  reason,  etc.,  res^ 
ret,  f. 

think,  puto,  dre,  dvT,  dtus;  arbitror, 
art,  dtus  sum;  think  upon,  think 
of,  cogito,  dre,  dvt,  dtus,  w.  ace. 

third,  iertius,  a,  um. 

this,  hic,  is. 

though,  although,  cum,  w.  subj.    See 


ENGLTSH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


253 


thousand,  mille,  indecl.  adj.  in  sing.; 
pi.,  mllia,  iuniy  noun,  n. 

three,  tres^  tria. 

through,  throughout, /<fr,  prep.  w.  ace. 

till,  until,  dwn^  quoady  conjs.  See 
156. 

time,  tempus,  oris,  n.;  for  all  time,  in 
perpetuum,  sc.  tempus ;  at  one  and 
the  same  time,  «w«/,  adv.;  now  for 
a  long  time,  iam  din,  iam  dUdum, 
ad  vs.;  the  second  time,  a  second 
time,  iterum,  adv. 

to,  ad,  prep.  w.  acc. 

to-day,  kodiey  adv. 

towards,  ad,  prep.  w.  acc. 

town,  oppidujH,  J,  n. 

troops,  copiae,  drum,  f.  pi.;  miles, 
itis,  m. ;  manus,  us,  f. 

true,  verus,  a,  um. 

trust,  hope,  spero,  dre,  dvT,  dtus, 

trusting  to,  fretus,  a,  um,  w.  abl. 

try,  experior,  trt,  expertus  sum, 

twice,  bis,  num.  adv. 

two,  duOf  duae,  duo. 


unbroken,  integer,  gra,  grum. 

under,  sub,  prep.  w.  acc.  and  abl. 

understand,  intellego,  ere,  lexi,  lectus, 

undertake,  carry  out,  perform,  conjicid, 
fie  ere,  fed,  fectus. 

unexpecting,  inoplndns^  antis. 

unfortunate,  miser,  misera^  miserum. 

unless,  nisi,  conj. 

unpopularity,  invidia,  ae,  f. 

until,  till,  dum,  quoady  conjs.  Soe 
156. 

unwilling,  invttus,  a,  um  ;  be  unwill- 
ing, rtolo,  nolle,  noluT. 

unworthy,  indlgnus,  a,  um* 

upon,  in,  prep.  w.  acc. 


urge,  cohortoTy  drt,  dtus  sum, 

use,  iisust  ust  m. ;  ittory  «/?,  ustts  sum. 


valor,  virtus,  utis,  f. 

valuable.    See  29. 

very,  valde,  adv.;   when  a  noun  is  to 

be  emphasized,  ipse  is  used;  e.g.  the 

very  city,  urbs  ipsa. 
very  much,  vehementer,  adv. 
vicinity,  in  or  into  the  vicinity  of,  ad, 

prep.  w.  acc. 
victor,  victor,  oris,  m. 
victory,  victoria,  ae,  f, 
village,  vicus,  t,  m. 
violence,  vTs,  (vis),  f. 
virtue,  virtUs,  Utis,  f. 
voice,  vox,  vdcis,  I. 
vote,  censed,  ere,  censut,  censum. 


wage,  carry  on,  gero,  ere,  gesst,  gestus, 

wait  for,  await,  wait  to  see,  exspecto 
(expecto),  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 

wall,  mUrus,  i,  m.,  the  general  term; 
moenia,  ium,  n.  pL,  city  walls, 
RAMPARTS,  bulwarks;  paries,  pa' 
rietis,  m.,  wall  of  A  house. 

war,  bellum,  i,  n. 

warn,  moned,  ere,  monm,  monitus. 

way,  via,  ae,  f. 

weapon,  telum,  i,  n. 

weary,  defessus,  a,  um, 

well,  bene,  adv. 

when,  cum,  ubi,  ut.    See  152,  153. 

where,  ubi,  adv.;  qm,  adv. 

whether,  utrum,  num,  — ne.    See  80. 

while,  dum,  conj.;  for  a  little  while, 
patdisper,  adv.;  a  little  while  ago, 
patUd  ante.    See  87. 


2S4 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


who,  which,  what,  qui,  quod,  rel. 
pron.;  quis,  quae,  quid,  and  qut^ 
quae,  quod,  interrog.  pron.  and  adj. 

whole,  wholly.     See  all. 

why,  cur,  quid. 

wide,  Idttis,  a,  um, 

width,  Idtitiido,  inis,  f. 

wife,  tixor,  oris,  f. ;  coniUnx,  iugiSy  f. 

willing,  be  willing,  volo^  velle^  volui. 

wing,  cornii.  Us,  n. 

winter,  hiems,  hiemis,  f.;  pass  the 
winter,  hiemo,  are,  dvt,  dtus  ;  winter 
quarters,  hiberna,  drum,  n.  pi.,  sc. 
castra. 

wisdom,  sapientia,  ae,  L 

wise,  sapiens,  gen.  sapientis. 

wish,  desire,  be  willing,  void,  velle, 
voluL 

with,  in  company  with,  cum,  prep.  w. 
abl. ;  with,  near  to,  at  the  house  of, 
apud,  prep.  w.  ace;  with  respect  to, 
de,  prep.  w.  abl. 

withdraw,  deficio,  ficere,  feci,  fectiis; 
to  withdraw  from  allegiance  to  the 
king,  a  rege  dejicere ;  withdraw,  be- 
take one's  self,  recipio,  cipere,  cepi, 
ceptus,  with  reflex.;   se  conferre. 

without,  sine,  prep.  w.  abl. ;  be  with- 
out, cared,  ere^  ut,  itHrus,  w.  abl. 


withstand,  obstd,  stare,  stitt,  stdturus^ 

w.   dat.;    sustined,   ere,   ui,   tentus, 

w.  ace. 
witness,  testis,  m.  and  f.;  witness,  see, 

vided,  ere,  vidi,  visus. 
wonder,  miror,  art,  dtus  sum. 
work,  labor,  orisy  m.;  labor o,  are,  dvt, 

dtus. 
worthy,  dignus,  a,  um ;  it  is  worth 

while,  tantl  est. 
write,  scribo,  ere,  scripsT,  scrJptus, 
wrong,  iniuria,  ae,  f.;  wrong-doing, 

mischief,  malejicium,  i,  n. 


year,  annus,  i,  m. 

yesterday,  hesterno  die, 

yiX,  tamen,  adv. 

you,  tu.     See  64. 

your,  tuus,  a,  um,  when  addressing 
one  person;  vester,  vestra,  vest  rum, 
when  addressing  more  than  one. 

yourself,  tuJ,  etc.    See  66,  69. 

youth,  a  young  man,  iuvenis,  is,  in.; 
adulescens,  entis,  m.  and  f. 

'  ,  2 

zeal,  studium,  t,  n. 


GRAMMATICAL   INDEX 


[Figures  refer  to  Sections] 


Ablative,  syntax  of,  39-52;  abl.  of  ac- 
companiment, 46;  of  cause,  43;  of 
degree  of  difference,  48;  of  man- 
ner, 45;  of  material,  40;  of  means, 
43;  of  source,  40;  of  price,  50;  of 
quality,  49;  of  separation,  39;  of 
specification,  47  ;  of  time,  51;  with 
a  comparative,  42;  with  deponents 
(utor,  fruor,  etc.),  44;  with  ex  or 
de  for  partitive  gen.,  23;  abl.  abso- 
lute, 89. 

ac  (atque),  with  idem,  76. 

Accompaniment,  expressed  by  cum  and 
abl.,  46. 

Accusative,  syntax  of,  12-18;  cognate 
ace,  13;  double  ace,  14-15;  of 
duration  of  time,  16;  of  exclama- 
tion, 18;  of  extent  of  space,  16;  of 
place  to  which,  17;  with  verbs  of 
aiding,  pleasing,  etc.,  32,  i;  with 
verbs  of  pitying,  repenting,  etc.,  27; 
with  verbs  of  remembering,  etc., 
25,  2. 

Accusing,  etc.,  verbs  of,  with  gen., 
26. 

Action,  nouns  of,  21. 

adiuvo,  32,  I. 

Adjectives,  agreement  of  attributive 
adjs.,  5  ;  agreement  of  predicate 
adj.,  6 ;  agreement  with  natural 
gender,  7;  gen.  with  adjs.,  24. 


Agent,  expressed  by  dat.,  95 ;  by  5,  ab 

with  abl.,  41. 
Agreement,  of  adjs.,  5-7;   of  apposi- 

tives,   1-2;   of  predicate  nouns,  4; 

of  collective  noun  and  a  verb,  9; 

of  subject  and   predicate,    lO;    of 

verb,  8. 
aliquis,  72. 

alius,  distinction  from  alter,  73. 
Although,  171,  87,  6. 
an,  in  direct  questions,  80. 
Answers,  81. 
Antecedent,  incorporation  of,  71,   5; 

agreement  of  relative  with,  71,  i,  2; 

sometimes  omitted,  71,  3. 
antequam,  154. 

Apposition,    1-3;     appositive  =  Eng- 
lish clause  of  lime,  etc.,  3. 
As  soon  as,  152. 

Before,  with  clauses,  154. 

causa,  with  gen.  of  gerund,  etc.,  142,  2. 

Causal  clauses,  with  cum,  173,  2;  with 
quod,  quia,  quoniam,  173,  i;  ex- 
pressed by  participle,  87,  3. 

Causal  relatives,  173,  4. 

Cause,  abl.  of,  22. 

Characteristic,  gen.  of,  22  ;  abl.  of, 
49;   relative  clauses  of,  174. 

Collective  noun  with  singular  verb,  9. 


255 


256 


GRAMMATICAL  INDEX 


Comparative,  with  or  without  quam, 
42. 

Concession,  expressed  by  participle, 
87,6. 

Concessive  clauses,  171. 

Conditions,  121-127;  contrary  to  fact, 
123;  apodosis  in  indicative,  123; 
future  ("less  vivid"),  125;  future 
("more  vivid"),  124;  simple 
(where  apodosis  states  a  fact), 
122;  in  ind.  disc,  1 69;  expressed 
by  participle,  87,  2. 

Conjunctions,  list  of,  and  uses,  82. 

cum,  causal,  173,  2;  concessive,  171, 
2;  temporal,  153;  clauses  with  = 
English  perf.  participle,  85,  2;  = 
English  present  passive  participle, 

85,3. 
cum  primum  =  as  soon  as,  152. 
CUpio,  constr.  with,  148,  3. 

Dative,  syntax  of,  31-37;  reference, 
36;  of  agent,  95;  of  indirect  ob- 
ject, 31;  of  interest,  36;  of  pos- 
sessor, 34;  of  purpose  or  end,  37; 
with  verbs  compounded  with  prepo- 
sitions (ad,  ante,  etc.),  32;  with 
adjectives,  35;  retained  with  pas- 
sive of  intransitives,  32,  2. 

debeo,  past  tenses  with  pres.  inf.,  112. 

Declaratory  sentences  in  ind.  disc, 
160. 

Degree  of  difference,  abl.  of,  48. 

Deliberative  subjunctive,  1 10. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  58-61. 

Deponents,  with  abl.,  44;  participles 
of,  85,  I. 

Descriptive  genitive,  22. 

Direct  reflexive,  65,  i. 

Discourse,  indirect.  See  Indirect 
discourse. 


Disjunctive  questions.  See  Double 
questions. 

domus,  constr.,  17,  I,  3. 

Double  dative,  37. 

Double  questions,  80. 

Doubting,  verbs  of,  constr.,  136. 

dum,  in  proviso,  172;  representing 
present  passive  participle,  85,  3;  = 
until,  156;    =  while,  102,  2. 

dum  modo,  in  proviso,  1 72. 

Duration  of  time,  ace  of,  16. 

etsi  =  even  if,  171,  3. 
Exclamation,  in  the  ace,  18, 
Extent  of  space,  ace  of,  16. 

Fearing,  verbs  of,  constr.,  135. 
Feeling,  nouns  of,  21. 
For,  with  temporal  expressions,  16. 
Forgetting,  verbs  of  constr.  with,  25. 
Future  time,  in  the  subjunctive,  94. 

Genitive,  syntax  of,  20-29;  with  ad- 
jectives, 24;  with  nouns  of  action 
or  feeling,  21 ;  of  charge,  26;  of  in- 
definite value,  29;  objective,  21,  2; 
partitive,  23;  with  verbs  of  accus- 
ing, 26;  with  impersonal  verbs,  27; 
with  interest,  etc.,  28;  with  verbs 
of  remembering,  etc.,  25. 

Gerund  and  gerundive,  syntax  of,  91- 
95;  gerund  and  gerundive  distin- 
guished, 91,  92;  cases  of  gerund, 
91;  gerundive  used  instead  of 
gerund,  93  ;  gerundive  denoting 
necessity  or  obligation,  95 ;  gerund- 
ive of  intransitive  verbs  used  im- 
personally, 95,  2;  gerundive  with 
mei,  tui,  sui,  etc,  93,  2. 

hie,  59. 

Hindering,  verbs  of,  constr.,  150. 


GRAMMATICAL  INDEX 


257 


Historical  present,  102,  I. 
Historical  tenses,  131,  2. 
Hortatory  subjunctive,   115;    in  ind. 
disc,  162,  3. 

iam,  iam  diu,  etc.,  with  pres.  and 
imp.  tenses,  102,  3,  103,  2. 

idem,  76. 

ille,  61. 

Imperative,  114;   in  ind.  disc,  162,  2. 

Impersonal  verbs  with  gen.,  27. 

Indefinite  pronouns,  72. 

Indicative  mode,  tenses  of,  102-106; 
conditions  contrary  to  fact,  123,  i. 

Indirect  discourse,  158-169;  tenses 
ofinfin.  in,  161;  tenses  of  subjunc- 
tive in,  166;  conditions  in,  169; 
hortatory  subjunctive  in,  162,  3; 
imperative  in,  162,  2;  questions  in, 
134;   wishes  in,  162,  3. 

Indirect  questions,  134. 

Indirect  reflexive,  65,  2. 

Infinitive,  formation  of,  109;  as  ob- 
ject, 148;  in  ind.  disc,  160;  tenses 
of,  161. 

Instrument.     See  Means. 

inter  nos,  se,  etc,  68. 

Interest,  expressed  by  dat.,  36, 

interest,  const,  with,  28. 

Interrogative  pronouns,  75,  79. 

Intransitive  verbs,  with  dat.,  32;  used 
impersonally  in  the  passive,  32,  2. 

ipse,  74. 

is,  63. 

Islands,  names  of  small,  in  constr.  of 
place,  17. 

iste,  60. 

iubeo,  with  ace,  32,  i;  with  infin., 
148,  I. 


licet,  119. 


Manner,   abl.   of,    45 ;    expressed   by 

participle,  87,  4. 
Material,  abl.  of,  with  ex,  40. 
Means,  abl.  of,  43;  means  and  agent 

distinguished,  43,  i;   expressed  by 

participle,  87,  5. 
Measure  of  difference.     See  Degree, 
miseror,  constr.  with,  27,  i. 
modo,  in  proviso,  172. 

natus,  with  abl.  of  origin  or  source, 
40. 

ne,  with  verbs  of  fearing,  135;  in  ob- 
ject clauses,  147  ;  with  verbs  of 
hindering,  150. 

-ne  .  .  .  an,  in  double  questions,  80. 

Necessity,  expressed  by  the  gerundive, 

95- 
Negative  command.     See  Prohibition. 
Negatives,  with  connectives,  82,  7. 
No,  81. 

non  dubito  =  not  to  hesitate,  136,  i. 
nonne,  in  questions,  78,  2. 
nostriim  and  vestriim,  as  partitive 

gen.,  64,  I. 
num,  in  indirect  questions,  78,  3. 

Object  clauses,  146. 

Objective  genitive,  21,  2. 

Obligation,   expressed   by   gerundive, 

95- 
omnis,  contrasted  with  quisque,  72,  2. 
Origin  or  source,  abl.  of,  40. 

Participles,  formation  of,  85;  English 
present  =  Latin  perf.  of  some  depo- 
nent verbs,  85,  4  ;  expresses  time, 
cause,  manner,  etc,  87  ;  perf.  ac- 
tive, how  represented  in  Latin,  85, 
2;  present  passive,  how  represented 
in  Latin,  85,  3. 


LATIN   PROSE  COMP.  —  1 7 


258 


GRAMMATICAL  INDEX 


Partitive  genitive,  23;  substitutes  for, 

23,1. 
Passive,  of  intransitive  verbs,  32,  2. 
Periphrastic  conjugation,  94,  95. 
Personal  pronouns,  64. 
Pity,  verbs  of,  constr.,  27. 
Polite  subjunctive,  118. 
Possessive  pronouns,  67,  69. 
Possessor,  dat.  of,  34. 
postquam,  posteaquam,  constr.  with, 

152. 
"Potential"  subjunctive,  118. 
Predicate  nouns,  4. 
Prepositions,    in     composition     with 

verbs,  33. 
Present,  historical,   102,  i;    sequence 

with,  131,  2  (a). 
Price,  abl.  of,  50. 

Primary  tenses.    See  Principal  Tenses. 
Principal  tenses,  151. 
priusquam,  154. 
Prohibition,  116. 
Pronouns,  syntax,  etc.,  58-76. 
Provided  that  (proviso),  172. 
Purpose,  clauses  of,  141-143. 

Quality,  gen.  of,  22;   abl.  of,  49. 

quam,  in  comparisons,  42. 

quamquam,  171. 

quamvis,  171. 

Questions,  direct,  78,  79;  double  or 
disjunctive,  80;  indirect,  134;  of 
doubt,  indignation,  etc.,  no;  rhe- 
torical, 163. 

qui,  preceded  by  is,  63,  i;  in  result 
clauses,  145,  i ;   in  purpose  clauses, 

143.  I. 
quia,  173,  I. 
quidam,  72;   quidam  ex  instead  of 

gen.  of  whole,  23,  i, 
quilibet,  72. 


quin,  with  verbs  of  hindering,  150,  2; 

with  verbs  of  doubting,  136. 
quis  (indefinite),  72. 
quisquam,  72. 
quisque,   distinguished   from   omnis, 

72,  2;  with  a  superlative,  72,  3. 
quivis,  72. 

quo,  in  purpose  clauses,  143,  2. 
quoad  =  until,  156. 
quod  (causal),  173,  i. 
quominus,  with  verbs   of  hindering, 

150. 
quoniam,  173,  i.  j 

Reciprocals,  68. 

refert  =  it  concerns,  28. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  65,  66. 

Relative  clauses,  in  general,  71,  175; 
characteristic,  174;  of  cause  and 
concession,  173,  4;  of  purpose, 
143,  i;   of  result,  145,  i. 

Remembering,  verbs  of,  constr.  with, 

25. 
Result,  clauses  of,  144,  145. 
riis,  constr.,  17,  i. 

se,  66,  69. 

Secondary  tenses.  See  Historical 
tenses. 

Separation,  abl.  of,  39. 

Sequence  of  tenses,  131,  132. 

simul  atque  (ac)  =  as  soon  as,  152. 

Specification,  abl.  of,  47. 

Subjunctive,  deliberative,  no;  horta- 
tory, 115;  of  polite  or  modest  asser- 
tion, 118;  "potential,"  118;  in 
prohibitions,  116,  2;  in  wishes 
(optative),  129;  of  characteristic, 
174;  in  causal  clauses,  173,  4;  in 
purpose  clauses,  141 -143;  in  result 
clauses,  145,   i;    in  object  clauses, 


GRAMMATICAL   INDE^ 


259 


146,  147;  in  temporal  clauses,  153, 
154,  156;  in  conditions,  123,  125; 
in  concessive  clauses,  171 ;  in  clauses 
of  pros'iso,  172;  tenses  of,  in  ind. 
disc,  166;   future  time  m,  94. 

SUl,  with  gerundive,  93,  2. 

Supine,  syntax  of,  96. 

suus,  67,  69. 

talis,  use  of  is  like,  63,  3. 

Temporal  clauses,  152-156;  with  dum, 
102,  I,  155,  156;  with  antequam 
and  priusquam,  154. 

Tenses,  of  participle,  84,  85;  of  in- 
dicative, 102-106;  historical,  de- 
fined, 131,  2;  of  infinitive,  108,  109; 
of  subjunctive  in  ind.  disc,  166; 
principal,  defined,  131;  sequence 
of,  132. 

That,  158,  caution. 

Time,  how  long,  16;  when  or  within 
what  period,  51;  clauses  of,  ex- 
pressed by  participle,  87,  i. 


Towns,  in  constructions  of  place  to 
which,  17. 

Until,  154,  2,  156. 

ut,  in  clauses  of  result,  145;  of  pur- 
pose, 143;  =  as,  when,  in  temporal 
clauses,  152;  with  verbs  of  fearing, 
135;   in  object  clauses,  147. 

ut  primum  =  as  soon  as,  152. 

iitor,  etc,  constr.  with,  44. 

utrum  .  .  .  aq,  in  double  questions,  80. 

Value,  indefinite,  gen.  of,  29. 

Verbs,  agreement  with  subject,  8;  with 
two  ace,  list,  14,  15;  with  gen., 
list,  25,  26;  with  dat.,  list,  32,  ^;^; 
with  abl ,  list,  44;  with  inf.  as  object, 
list,  148,  3;  taking  object  clauses, 
list,  147;  with  ind.  disc,  160. 

Vestrum.    See  Nostriim. 

Want,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  39. 
Wishes,  128,  129;  in  ind.  disc,  162,  3. 

Yes,  8i,  2. 


ESSENTIALS  OF  LATIN  FOR 
BEGINNERS 

By  HENRY  C.  PEARSON,  Horace  Mann  School, 
Teachers  College,  New  York.  Author  of  Latin  Prose 
Composition,   Greek  Prose  Composition 

^0.90 


THIS  book  is  designed  to  prepare  pupils  in  a  thorough 
fashion  to  read  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  Jt  contains 
seventy  lessons,  including  ten  that  are  devoted  exclu- 
sively to  reading,  and  six  supplementary  lessons.  The  first 
seventy  lessons  contain  the  minimum  of  what  a  pupil  should 
know  before  he  is  ready  to  read  Latin  with  any  degree  of 
intelligence  and  satisfaction.  The  supplementary  lessons  deal 
largely  with  certain  principles  of  syntax  that  may  be  taken  up 
or  omitted,  according  to  the  desire  of  the  teacher. 
^  The  vocabularies  have  been  carefully  selected,  and  contain, 
with  very  few  exceptions,  only  those  words  that  occur  with 
the  greatest  frequency  in  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  About  five 
hundred  words  are  presented  in  the  first  seventy  lessons. 
There  is  a  constant  comparison  of  English  and  Latin  usage, 
but  not  much  knowledge  of  English  grammar  on  the  part  of 
the  pupil  is  taken  for  granted.  The  more  difficult  construc- 
tions are  first  considered  from  the  English  point  of  view. 
^  The  topics,  such  as  nouns,  adjectives,  pronouns,  and  verbs, 
are  not  treated  in  a  piecemeal  fashion,  but  four  or  five  con- 
secutive lessons  are  devoted  to  one  topic  before  passing  on  to 
another.  Sufficient  change,  however,  is  introduced  to  avoid 
monotony.  The  work  is  provided  with  ample  reviews ;  the 
regular  exercises  review  the  vocabulary  and  constructions  of 
the  preceding  lessons,  and  these  are  supplemented  by  review 
exercises.  The  last  twenty  pages  are  devoted  to  carefully 
graded  material  for  reading,  composed  of  selections  from  Viri 
Romae  and  the  first  twenty  chapters  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War, 
Book  n.,  in  simplified  form. 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 


Cm8> 


LATIN     GRAMMARS 

By  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  Ph.D., LL.D.,  Professor 
Emeritus  in  Brown  University 


Complete  Latin  Grammar,  |5i.25 


Short  Latin  Grammar  .     .  $0.80 


THESE  text-books  represent  the  latest  advances  in  philo- 
logical science,  and  embody  the  results  of  the  author's 
large  experience  in  teaching,  and  of  his  own  linguistic 
studies,  together  with   the  suggestions  and  advice  of  eminent 
German  speciaHsts  in  the  field  of  historical  and  comparative 
grammar. 

•[[  Throughout  each  volume  the  instruction  has  been  adapted 
to  present  jnethods  and  present  needs.  A  special  effort  has 
been  made  to  develop  the  practical  side  of  grammar,  to  make 
it  as  helpful  as  possible  to  the  teacher  in  explaining  the  force 
of  involved  constructions  in  Latin  authors,  and  to  the  learner 
in  understanding  and  appreciating  the  thought  in  a  compH- 
cated  Latin  sentence. 

^  The  COMPLETE  LATIN  GRAMMAR  is  designed  to 
meet  the  needs  of  Latin  students  in  both  schools  and  colleges. 
Simplicity  and  clearness  of  presentation,  as  well  as  of  language, 
form  leading  characteristics  of  the  work.  Attention  is  directed 
particularly  to  the  arrangement  of  material,  and  to  the  treat- 
ment of  etymology,  syntax,  moods  and  tenses,  subjunctive, 
indirect  discourse,  and  hidden  quantity. 
T[  The  SHORT  LATIN  GRAMMAR  is  intended  for 
those  who  prefer  to  begin  with  a  more  elementary  manual, 
or  for  those  who  do  not  contemplate  a  collegiate  course.  In 
its  preparation  the  convenience  and  interest  of  the  student  have 
been  carefully  consulted.  The  paradigms,  rules,  and  dis- 
cussions have  in  general  been  introduced  in  the  exact  form 
and  language  of  the  Complete  Latin  Grammar,  by  which  it 
may  at  any  time  be  supplemented.  The  numbering  of  the 
sections  in  the  two  books  is  also  alike. 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 

C237) 


CAESAR'S     GALLIC     WAR 

Edited    by    ALBERT    HARKNESS,     Ph.D.,     LL.D., 

Professor  Emeritus  in  Brown  University;  assisted  by 
CHARLES  H.  FORBES,  A.B.,  Professor  of  Latin 
in  Phillips  Academy,   Andover,   Mass. 


Complete  Edition   .     .     .  ^1.25 


Four  Book  Edition 


THIS  edition  of  Caesar's  Commentaries  is  now  issued  in 
two  forms.  Besides  the  complete  edition  containing  the 
entire  seven  books  of  the  Gallic  War,  there  is  also  an 
edition  in  which  the  first  four  books  are  published  separately. 
As  these  four  books  of  Caesar  are  those  generally  read  by 
students  in  preparing  for  college,  and  constitute  the  minimum 
requirements  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  and  of 
the  New  York  State  Education  Department,  this  smaller  volume 
satisfies  the  demands  in  many  schools  at  less  than  the  usual 
cost.  Both  editions  present  the  necessary  pedagogic  appa- 
ratus, with  parallel  references  to  the  standard  Latin  grammars. 
^  The  introduction  contains  an  outline  of  the  life  of  Caesar, 
a  description  in  brief  of  the  scenes  of  his  military  operations 
in  Gaul,  Germany,  and  Britain,  and  a  short  treatise  on  the 
military  system  of  the  Romans,  together  with  a  list  of  valuable 
works  on  the  subjects  discussed  in  the  introduction. 
^  In  the  notes,  such  difficult  subjects  as  the  subjunctive  mood, 
and  indirect  discourse,  have  been  treated  with  unusual  clear- 
ness. In  the  earlier  books  frequent  comparisons  have  been  made 
between  the  direct  and  the  indirect  forms  of  discourse,  and 
between  kindred  constructions.  The  notes  to  the  Second  Book 
are  sufficiently  full  for  students  who  begin  with  that  book. 
^  The  vocabulary  gives  special  attention  to  etymology,  but 
ihe  treatment  is  made  as  simple  as  possible,  with  the  sole  aim 
of  aiding  the  student  in  understanding  and  appreciating  the 
significant  elements  of  words.  The  illustrations  constitute 
one  of  the  most  striking  features  of  the  work. 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 

C257) 


A     NEW     CICERO 

Edited  by  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Pro- 
fessor Emeritus  in  Brown  University  ;  assisted  by],  C. 
KIRTLAND,  Jr.,  Professor  in  Phillips  Exeter  Academy; 
and  G.  H.  WILLIAMS,  Professor  in  Kalamazoo  Col- 
lege, late  Instructor  in  Phillips  Exeter  Academy 


Nine  Oration  Edition  .     .  ^1.25 


Six  Oration  Edition      .     .  ^i.oo 


FOR  convenience  this  edition  of  Cicero  has  been  pub- 
lished in  tw^o  forms.  The  larger  edition  includes  the 
four  orations  against  Catiline,  the  Manilian  Law,  Archias, 
Marcellus,  Ligarius,  and  the  Fourteenth  Philippic.  The 
smaller  edition  contains  the  first  six  of  these  orations,  which 
are  those  required  by  the  College  Entrance  Examination 
Board,  and  by  the  New  York  State  Education  Department. 
•|y  Before  the  text  of  each  oration  is  a  special  introduction, 
which  is  intended  to  awaken  the  interest  of  the  student  by 
furnishing  him  with  information  in  regard  to  the  oration. 
^  The  general  introduction  presents  an  outline  of  the  life  of 
Cicero,  a  brief  history  of  Roman  oratory,  a  chronological  table 
of  contemporaneous  Roman  history,  a  short  account  of  the 
main  divisions  of  the  Roman  people,  the  powers  and  the 
duties  of  magistrates,  of  the  senate,  of  the  popular  assemblies, 
and  of  the  courts  of  justice. 

^  The  notes  give  the  student  the  key  to  all  really  difficult  pas- 
sages, and  at  the  same  time  furnish  him  with  such  collateral 
information  upon  Roman  manners  and  customs,  upon  Roman 
history  and  life,  as  will  enable  him  to  understand,  appreciate, 
and  enjoy  these  masterpieces  of  Roman  oratory.  7  he  gram- 
matical references  are  to  all  the  standard  Latin  grammars. 
•[y  The  vocabulary  gives  the  primary  meanings  of  words,  with 
such  other  meanings  as  the  student  will  need  in  translating 
the  orations.  Special  attention  is  devoted  to  the  important 
subject  of  etymology.     There  are  many  maps  and  illustrations. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 
(254) 


VIRGIL'S    AENEID 

Edited  by  HENRY  S.  FRIEZE,  late  Professor  of  Latin,  Uni- 
versity of  Michigan.  Revised  by  WALTER  H.  DEN- 
NISON,  Professor  of  Latin,  University  of  Michigan 


First  Six  Books    .     .     .     .  ^1.30  Complete $1.50 

Complete  Text  Edition  .     .  $0.50 


IN  its  present  form  this  v;^ell-known  v^^brk  has  been  thor- 
oughly revised  and  modernized.  It  is  published  in  two 
volumes :  one  containing  the  first  six  books,  the  other  the 
entire  tw^elve  books — an  arrangement  especially  convenient  for 
students  who  read  more  than  the  minimum  College  Entrance 
Requirements  in  Latin.  Both  volumes  are  printed  on  very 
thin  opaque  paper,  thus  making  each  an  extraordinarily 
compact  and  usable  book. 

^  The  introduction  has  been  enlarged  by  the  addition  of 
sections  on  the  life  and  writings  of  Virgil,  the  plan  of  the 
Aeneid,  the  meter,  manuscripts,  editions,  and  helpful  books 
of  reference. 

^y  The  text  has  been  corrected  to  conform  to  the  readings  that 
have  become  established,  and  the  spellings  are  in  accord  with 
the  evidence  of  inscripdons  of  the  first  century  A.D.  To  meet 
the  need  of  early  assistance  in  reading  the  verse  metrically, 
the  long  vowels  in  the  first  two  books  are  fully  indicated. 
^  The  notes  have  been  thoroughly  revised,  and  largely  added 
to.  The  old  grammar  :  eferences  are  corrected,  and  new  ones 
added.  The  literary  appreciation  of  the  poet  is  increased  by 
parallel  quotations  from  English  literature.  The  irregularities 
of  scansion  in  each  book  are  given  with  sufficient  explanations. 
^  The  vocabulary  has  been  made  as  simple  as  possible,  and 
includes  only  those  words  occurring  in  the  Aeneid.  The 
illustrations  and  maps,  for  the  most  part,  are  new  and  fresh, 
and  have  been  selected  with  great  care,  with  a  view  to  assist- 
ing directly  in  the  interpretation  of  the  text. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 

(256) 


A    TERM     OF    OVID 

I0.75 

Edited   by    CLARENCE   W.    GLEASON,  A.M. 
(Harvard),  of  Roxbury  Latin  School 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 

Greek  Primer $1.00 

Greek  Prose  Composition  for  Schools 80 

Story  of  Cyrus 75 

Xenophon's  Cyropaedia 1.25 


THE  ten  stories  from  the  Metamorphoses  included  in 
this  book  are:  Atalanta's  Last  Race;  Pyramus  and 
Thisbe  ;  Apollo's  Unrequited  Love  for  Daphne ; 
How  Phaeton  Drove  his  Father's  Chariot  ;  The  Death  of 
Orpheus  ;  The  Touch  of  Gold  ;  Philemon  and  Baucis ; 
The  Impiety  and  Punishment  of  Niobe ;  The  Flood  ; 
Perseus  and  Andromeda. 

^1  There  is  a  distinct  advantage  in  using  these  selections 
from  Ovid  as  a  stepping-stone  from  Caesar  to  Virgil. 
Written  in  an  entertaining  manner,  they  not  only  make  the 
student  acquainted  with  the  legends  of  the  gods  and  heroes, 
but  also  lessen  the  greatest  gap  in  a  continuous  Latin  course  by 
familiarizing  him  with  the  vocabulary  of  Virgil  in  easier  verse. 
In  the  present  volume  are  all  but  300  of  the  words  found  in 
the  first  book  of  the  Aeneid. 

^  The  work  contains  about  1,420  lines  of  text,  with  full 
notes  on  the  text  and  on  scansion,  and  a  vocabulary.  The 
first  hundred  lines  are  divided  into  feet  for  scansion,  with  the 
accents  and  caesuras  marked.  The  first  three  stories  are 
accompanied  by  a  parallel  version  in  the  order  of  ordinary 
Latin  prose,  with  the  quantities  indicated.  There  are  also 
synonyms  of  words  not  usual  in  prose,  and  of  common 
words  in  extraordinary  uses. 


AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 

C264) 


LATIN     DICTIONARIES 


HARPER'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY 

Founded    on    the    translation   of   Freund's    Latin-German 
Lexicon.      Edited  by    E.   A.   Andrews,  LL.D.     Revised, 
Enlarged,   and  in  great  part  Rewritten  by  Charlton  T. 
Lewis,   Ph.D.,  and  Charles  Short,  LL.D. 
Royal  Octavo,  2030  pages.     Sheep,  ^6.505   Full  Russia,  ;^i 0.00 

•[[  The  translation  of  Dr.  Freund's  great  Latin-German 
Lexicon,  edited  by  the  late  Dr.  E.  A.  Andrews,  and  pub- 
lished in  1850,  has  been  from  that  time  in  extensive  and 
satisfactory  use  throughout  England  and  America.  Mean- 
while great  advances  have  been  made  in  the  science  on  which 
lexicography  depends.  The  present  work  embodies  the  latest 
advances  in  philological  study  and  research,  and  is  in  every 
respect  the  most  complete  and  satisfactory  Latin  Dictionary 
published. 

LEWIS'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY  FOR  SCHOOLS 

By  Charlton  T.  Lewis,  Ph.D. 

Large  Octavo,  1200  pages.     Cloth,  $4.50  j  Half  Leather,    ^5.00 

^  This  dictionary  is  not  an  abridgment,  but  an  entirely  new 
and  independent  work,  designed  to  include  all  of  the  student's 
needs,  after  acquiring  the  elements  of  grammar,  for  the  inter- 
pretation of  the  Latin  authors  commonly  read  in  school. 

LEWIS'S  ELEMENTARY  LATIN  DICTIONARY 

By  Charlton  T.  Lewis,  Ph.D. 

Crown  Octavo,  952  pages.     Half  Leather ;552.oo 

^  This  work  is  sufficiently  full  to  meet  the  needs  of  students 
in  secondary  or  preparatory  schools,  and  also  in  the  first  and 
second  years'  work  in  colleges. 

SMITH'S  ENGLISH-LATIN  DICTIONARY 

A  (^omplete  and  Critical    English-Latin    Dictionary.      By 
William    Smith,    LL.D.,    and    Theophilus    D.  Hall, 
M.A.,   Fellow  of  University  College,  London.     With  a 
Dictionaiy  of  Proper  Names. 
Royal  Octavo,  765  pages.     Sheep ^4.00 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 

(278/ 


A     GREEK     PRIMER 

|l.OO 

By  CLARENCE  W.  GLEASON,  A.M.  (Harvard), 
of  the  Roxbury  Latin  School 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 

Greek  Prose  Composition  for  Schools j^o,8o 

The  Story  of  Cyrus 75 

Xenophon's  Cyropaedia 1. 2 5 

A  Term  of  Ovid 75 


WITH  many  modifications  suggested  by  class-room  ex- 
perience, this  text-book  continues  the  general  plan  of 
Gleason  &  Atherton's  First  Greek  Book.  The  verb 
is  developed  somewhat  more  slowly  and  naturally,  with  the 
second  aorist  still  nearer  the  beginning.  The  number  of  les- 
sons has  been  increased,  in  order  to  give  more  practice  on  verb 
forms.  The  infinitive  and  participle  and  indirect  discourse 
are  treated  at  greater  length.  Three  lessons  are  devoted 
entirely  to  Greek  equivalents  of  common  Latin  constructions. 
^  Although  the  book  is  intended  as  an  introduction  to  the 
study  of  Greek  rather  than  as  a  short  cut  to  the  Anabasis  of 
Xenophon,  the  latter  has  been  drawn  on  freely  for  reading 
matter.  Of  the  750  words  in  the  lesson  vocabularies  all  but 
about  20  (and  of  the  600  additional  words  used  in  the 
selections  for  reading,  more  than  half)  are  found  in  the 
Anabasis. 

^  The  reading  selections  in  and  following  the  lessons  have 
been  taken  from  as  varied  sources  as  possible,  and  are  intended 
to  arouse  the  beginner's  interest  in  Greek  Hterature.  The 
model  sentences,  designed  only  as  examples  of  the  syntax 
under  discussion,  and  selected  with  a  view  to  memorizing, 
are  made,  wherever  practicable,  from  words  familiar  to  the 
student.  The  sentences  to  be  rendered  into  Greek  are  cut 
down  to  the  minimum. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 

(280 


A     GRAMMAR     OF     ATTIC 

AND     IONIC     GREEK 

I1.50 

By  FRANK  COLE  BABBITT,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  Pro- 
fessor of  the  Greek  Language,  Trinity  College,  Hartford; 
formerly  Fellow  of  the  American  School  of  Classical 
Studies  at  Athens 


THIS  grammar  states  the  essential  facts  and  principles  of 
the  Greek  language  in  concise  form,  with  only  so  much 
discussion  as  may  reasonably  be  demanded  for  a  clear 
understanding  of  the  subject.  It  therefore  meets  the  wants 
of  secondary  schools,  and  at  the  same  time  is  sufficient  for 
all  ordinary  demands  of  the  college  course.  The  book  incor- 
porates the  results  of  the  more  recent  philological  studies,  and 
includes  many  departures  from  conventional  presentation. 
^  The  body  of  the  book  is  devoted  to  Attic  Greek,  while 
Ionic  forms  are  given  in  the  footnotes.  The  subject  of  in- 
direct discourse  is  put  at  the  end  of  syntax,  and  each  principle 
has  been  fully  stated  in  its  proper  place.  Tables  of  syntacdcal 
usage  for  reference  are  included,  thus  making  it  possible  for  the 
student  to  perceive  the  normal  usage  at  a  glance. 
^  In  order  to  simplify  the  subject,  the  verbs  have  been 
reduced  to  five  classes,  yet  nothing  has  been  sacrificed  in  the 
process.  All  contract  forms  are  given  as  they  are  found  in 
Attic  Greek,  followed  by  the  uncontracted  forms  in  paren- 
theses. The  treatment  of  cases  is  thoroughly  logical  and  clear. 
The  true  genidve  and  the  ablative  genidve  are  distinguished 
from  each  other,  and  considered  separately ;  likewise,  the  true 
dative,  the  locative  dative,  and  the  instrumental  dative.  In 
this  way  much  confusion  is  avoided. 

^  Much  of  the  attractiveness  of  the  book  is  due  to  the 
prominence  given  to  the  examples  by  the  use  of  large  type; 
to  the  graphic  presentauon  of  vowel  changes ;  to  the  liberal 
use  of  headings;  and  to  the  untechnical  form  of  statement. 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 


(284) 


ELEMENTARY  GREEK 
TEXTS 

Edited   by  CLARENCE  W.    GLEASON,  A.M. 
(Harvard),  of  the  Roxbury  Latin  School 

THE  STORY  OF  CYRUS $0.75 


A  DELIGHTFUL  substitute  for  the  usual  reading  books 
of  the  first  year  in  Greek.  It  can  be  used  to  excellent 
advantage  during  the  second  term  to  supplement  the 
work  in  the  beginner's  book,  and  to  prepare  the  student  for 
the  complete  text  of  the  Cyropaedia,  Hellenica,  or  Anabasis. 
It  is  also  adapted  for  rapid  or  sight  reading  at  the  beginning 
of  the  second  year.  Based  upon  the  Cyropaedia,  it  contains 
in  simplified  form  the  more  interesting  portions  of  that  book, 
and  those  most  closely  pertaining  to  the  personal  history  of 
Cyrus  the  Great.  Following  the  text  are  English  sentences 
to  be  turned  into  Greek,  giving  a  good  drill  in  grammatical 
training.      The  notes  and  vocabulary  are  entirely  adequate. 


XENOPHON'S  CYROPAEDIA $1.2^ 


THE  suitability  of  the  Cyropaedia  for  school  purposes  is 
here  practically  demonstrated.  This  edition  may  alter- 
nate with,  or  may  be  substituted  for,  the  Anabasis, 
which  too  often  is  the  only  book  read  in  second  year  work  in 
Greek.  By  the  omission  of  passages  of  minor  interest  or 
importance,  the  Cyropaedia  is  here  shortened  nearly  one  half. 
No  change  has,  however,  been  made  in  the  construction  of 
sentences,  except  in  the  interest  of  brevity.  The  book  con- 
tains the  necessary  notes  and  a  complete  vocabulary. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 

(294) 


GREEK     DICTIONARIES 


LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S   GREEK-ENGLISH 
LEXICON 

Compiled  by  Henry  George  Liddell,  D.D.,  and 
Robert  Scott,  D.D  ,  assisted  by  Henry  Drisler,  LL.D. 
Imperial  Quarto,  1794  pages.     Sheep $10.00 

^[  The  present  edition  of  this  great  work  has  been  thoroughly 
revised,  and  large  additions  made  to  it.  The  editors  have 
been  favored  v^^ith  the  cooperation  of  many  scholars,  and 
several  important  articles  have  been  entirely  rewritten. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S    GREEK-ENGLISH 

LEXICON— Intermediate 

Royal  Octavo,  910  pages.  Cloth,  $2'S°  »  Half  Leather,  $4.00 
^  This  abridgment  will  not  only  meet  every  need  encountered 
in  preparatory  schools,  but  will  also  satisfy  the  requirements 
of  most  college  students. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S   GREEK-ENGLISH 

LEXICON— Abridged 

Crown  Octavo,  832  pages.      Half  Leather $i-'2-S 

^  This  abridgment  is  intended  chiefly  for  use  by  students 
in  secondary  and  college  preparatory  schools. 

THAYER'S  GREEK-ENGLISH  LEXICON  OF 
THE  NEW  TESTAMENT 

Being  Grimm's  Wilke's  Clavis  Novi  Testament!.     Trans- 
lated, Revised,  and  Enlarged  by  Joseph  Henry  Thayer, 
D.D.,  LL.D.     Royal  Octavo,  727  pages. 
Cloth,  ^5.00;  Half  Leather $6.50 

YONGE'S  ENGLISH-GREEK  LEXICON 

By  C.   D.   YoNGE.     Edited    by  Henry  Drisler,  LL.D. 

Royal  Octavo,  903  pages.      Sheep r?4-5o 

AUTENRIETH'S  HOMERIC  DICTIONARY 

Translated  and  Edited  by  Robert  P.  Keep,  Ph.D.  New 
Edition.  Revised  by  Isaac  Flagg,  Ph.D.  i2mo,  312 
pages.     Illustrated.     Cloth j^i.io 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 

C310) 


DESCRIPTIVE 
CATALOGUE    OF    HIGH 
SCHOOL   AND    COLLEGE 

TEXT-BOOKS 

Published  Complete  and  in  Sections 


WE  issue  a  Catalogue  of  High  School  and  College  Text- 
Books,  which  we  have  tried  to  make  as  valuable  and 
as  useful  to  teachers  as  possible.  In  this  catalogue 
are  set  forth  briefly  and  clearly  the  scope  and  leading  charac- 
teristics of  each  of  our  best  text-books.  In  most  cases  there 
are  also  given  testimonials  from  well-known  teachers,  which 
have  been  selected  quite  as  much  for  their  descriptive  qualities 
as  for  their  value  as  commendations. 

•[[  For  the  convenience  of  teachers  this  Catalogue  is  also 
published  in  separate  sections  treating  of  the  various  branches  of 
study.  These  pamphlets  are  entitled  :  English,  Mathematics, 
History  and  Political  Science,  Science,  Modern  Languages, 
Ancient  Languages,  and  Philosophy  and  Education. 
^  In  addition  we  have  a  single  pamphlet  devoted  to  Newest 
Books  in  every  subject. 

^  Teachers  seeking  the  newest  and  best  books  for  their 
classes  are  invited  to  send  for  our  Complete  High  School  and 
College  Catalogue,  or  for  such  sections  as  may  be  of  greatest 
interest. 

^  Copies  of  our  price  lists,  or  of  special  circulars,  m  which 
these  books  are  described  at  greater  length  than  the  space 
limitations  of  the  catalogue  permit,  will  be  mailed  to  any 
address  on  request. 

^  All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  nearest 
of  the  following  offices  of  the  company :  New  York,  Cincin- 
nati, Chicago,  Boston,  Atlanta,  San  Francisco. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 

(3«) 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  clesl<  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  tine 
NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

— jonponr  — 


12,000(11/95) 


VB  36273 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


